Copyright: Copyright 1996 - 2003. Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Citation: Copyright 1996 - 2003. Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.


CS Help PDF functionality


PDF advanced


Lets you output values as Native, CMYK, RGB, or grayscale.


Enable to optimize the resolution of images in the PDF file for the World Wide Web.


Enable to embed a file within a PDF file.


Displays the filename and location of embedded files.


Lets you choose the drive and folder where the file you want to embed is stored.


PDF document


Enable to include hyperlinks in a .PDF file. Including hyperlinks lets you view, in Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader, jumps to other Web pages or the Internet.


Enable to generate bookmarks in a .PDF file. Bookmarks are links represented by text.


Enable to display the project page in Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader.


Enable to display a full screen in Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader.


Enable to display bookmarks in Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader.


File, Publish to PDF db


Displays the name and location of a .PDF file.


Opens the Save as PDF dialog box and lets you choose the drive and folder in which to save the file.


Enable to publish all pages in a document.


 Enable to publish the current view.


Enable to publish the selected object.


Enable to publish slides.


Enable to publish speakers notes.


Enable to publish audience notes.


 Enable to publish handouts


Lets you specify the number of copies you want to publish.


Lets you choose a compatibility, depending upon what kind of viewer the recipients of the PDF file have.


Displays the name of the author of the PDF file.


Displays keywords associated with the PDF file.


Displays a .PDF style from the list box. You can choose a preset .PDF style or create your own. The preset PDF styles contain guidelines for general publishing and publishing to the Web.


Lets you add or save a .PDF style.


Lets you delete a .PDF style.


PDF objects


Enable to export text as curves. If you are using unusual text characters, exporting text as curves can eliminate problems with font variances on different computer systems.


Enable to embed fonts. This makes a .PDF file more portable since the fonts do not have to reside on other systems.


Enable to embed the 14 basic fonts to your computer system. This eliminates font variances on different systems.


Enable to convert True Type to Type 1 fonts. Converting True Type to Type 1 fonts can increase file size if there are many fonts in a file.


Enable to subset Type 1 fonts. Subsetting fonts can reduce file size.


Displays a percentage of the fonts used.


Lets you type a percentage of fonts used in a document.


Displays a percentage of the fonts used.


Enable to export files in binary file format. Binary is less portable as some computers do not support the file format.


Enable to export files in ASCII file format. ASCII is a fully portable file format.


Enable to compress text and  line art. This is useful when you want to reduce file size.


Lets you compress bitmaps using JPEG, LZW, or ZIP compression. This is useful when you want to reduce file size.


Lets you change JPEG compression quality. The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.


Lets you change JPEG compression quality. The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.


Displays the degree of JPEG compression quality used when publishing bitmaps.


Lets you change JPEG compression quality. The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.


Lets you change JPEG compression quality. The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.


This is a list of the available toolbars. A check mark beside a toolbar indicates an active toolbar.


Enable to enlarge the toolbar icons.


Click this to display an overview Help topic about this dialog box. For Help on an item, click the [image]  button, and click the item.


Specify how much to expand or compress the space between letters.


If you have several animated objects or bullets on a slide, specify the order in which the animations will play. For example, you could have the bulleted list appear first, then the animated objects.


Browse to locate a sound file to include with the animation.


Select the animation effect you want from the list.


Select the direction of the animation effect. Some animations do not require you to select a direction.


Select the speed of the animation effect.


Select to visually emphasize one bulleted item at a time and dim all other bullets on the slide.


Select to start the cascade effect with the last bullet in the chart and progress to the first bullet.


This is how your current selections will display.


The bulleted list displays as the slide does.


Animate the entire bulleted list. After the slide appears, the bulleted list comes onto the slide.


Select to display main level bullets and sub-level bullets one at a time during a slide show.


These are the alternative presentations you have defined for this slide show. Select the one you want to play, edit, and so on.


Click to put a new entry into the list of custom audiences. After you create a new audience, click Rename to give the entry a meaningful name.


Click to remove the selected custom audience entry.


Click to give the selected custom audience entry a new name. When you create a new entry, it always appears as "Copy of [original name]." Give each entry a descriptive name.


Click to select sizing options for the boxes in the organization chart.


Box size is determined by the size of the largest box in the branch below the selection.


Box size is determined by the size of the largest box in the same level. Boxes are in the same level if they have the same number of managers, counting from their immediate manager to the top manager in the chart.


Box size is determined by the largest box in the chart.


The size of each box is determined by its contents. Longer names and titles have larger boxes.


Click to specify how tall and wide the selected boxes will be, based on a percentage of the text height and width inside the boxes. You can also drag a corner handle on a selected box to manually adjust all boxes on that level to a fixed size.


Specify how tall the boxes will be, based on a percentage of the text height inside the box.


Specify how wide the boxes will be, based on a percentage of the text width within the box.


Return horizontal and vertical values to the original settings.


Type placeholder text for a new organization chart field. Your placeholder can be up to 26 characters long and can include letters, numbers, and characters.


Adds the placeholder text you typed as a new field.


Displays the current fields in the order they appear inside the organization chart boxes. Click the fields to select them for moving and deleting.


Remove a current field from the list and from the organization chart boxes. Any information already in that field will be lost.


Move the selected field up one position in the list, until it reaches the top.


Move the selected field down one position in the list, until it reaches the bottom.


Rename the currently selected field.


Select a color for the shadow behind objects and text. For a more realistic look, select a slightly darker shade of the background color.


Type or edit the name of the document's author.


Type or edit the name of the document's author.


Type or edit the name of the person who last saved the document.


Type or edit the name of the person who last saved the document.


Type or edit the title of this document.


Type or edit the title of this document.


Type or edit a line explaining the subject of the document.


Type or edit a line explaining the subject of the document.


Type or edit any keywords you want for this document. You can use QuickFinder to search your computer or network for these keywords.


Type or edit any keywords you want for this document. You can use QuickFinder to search your computer or network for these keywords.


Type or edit any comments you want to make about this document.


Type or edit any comments you want to make about this document.


This is the master this slide show uses.


This is the master this slide show uses.


This is the revision number for the document. Each time you open and save the document, the revision number goes up one.


This is the revision number for the document. Each time you open and save the document, the revision number goes up one.


Closes this dialog and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog without saving any changes you have made.


Click to view an overview Help topic about this dialog box. For specific help, click the [image] button, and click any control.


Select a predefined size, or select User defined, then specify a custom width and height for the bitmap.


Select Inches, Centimeters, or Pixels as the units you use to specify the height and width of the bitmap.


Select the screen resolution (in dots per inch) for the bitmap.


Select the number of bits and colors for the bitmap. The higher the number of colors, the larger the bitmap file will be, and the more memory space it will use.


Cancels all changes and returns to default settings.


This is how high the bitmap will be, in the units you selected.


This is how wide the bitmap will be, in the units you selected.


Select the grid and snap options you want to use.


Display the grid. The grid appears as a series of dotted lines over the slide. It does not print.


Force objects to align with the grid as you create or move them.


Specify the amount of space you want between horizontal points.


Specify the amount of space you want between vertical points.


Specify the interval between gridlines displayed on the screen. For example, specifying 4 means that every fourth gridline is displayed.


Specify a snap zone value to define the area in which objects snap to alignment guides. For example, if you specify .5", all objects you create or move within one half inch of the alignment guides will automatically snap to the guides.


Save the current grid and snap settings to use in all new drawings and slide shows.


Reset all grid and snap options to the default settings.


The title of the slide.


This is the name of the SpeedLink.


This is what happens when you click the SpeedLink while playing the slide show.


This is the keystroke associated with this SpeedLink.


Click to select the action that is put into effect when you click the  SpeedLink object during a slide show.


Click to edit the selected SpeedLink.


Specify the path and filename of the movie file you want to use.


Select a border type for the movie file. The border displays around the movie on the slide and while you are playing the movie.


Display a control panel with progress indicator and pause, play, and stop buttons when playing the movie. The controls do not appear until you click the movie to play it.


Rewind the movie when it stops playing. The image returns to the first frame of the file and freezes. If you do not select this option, the movie stops at the last frame and displays that image.


Keep the movie running over and over. To stop the movie, click it or click the stop button on the control panel.


Select options controlling how and when the movie plays during the slide show.


Make the movie invisible until you click it to play it during the slide show. When this slide displays, you can click the spot where the movie is to make it appear and play. When it finishes playing, it disappears again.


Play the movie when you click it. As you play the slide show, the movie will remain still until you click it, and then it will start playing.


Play the movie automatically after the slide displays. Specify the number of seconds you want the movie to wait before it begins playing.


Select the type of master you want to use for a slide show. The different types of masters are suited to different types of presentations. For example, select a 35mm master if you want to convert a slide show to 35mm color slides or to color transparencies, or select a color master if you want to present the slide show on a color monitor.


Select this option if you do not want to choose a master each time you begin a new slide show. Corel Presentations will use the default master automatically. If you want to change the master later, you can select another from the Master Gallery.


Select the master you want to use. Masters apply to all the slides in a slide show.


Click to record Wave audio sound clips to accompany a slide show. The Windows 95 Sound Recorder has its own Help system which you can refer to if you need further instructions on recording.


Make the object invisible until its time to play. When it finishes playing, the object disappears again.


Play the object when you click it during a slide show. The object will not play until you click it.


Automatically play the object a certain number of seconds after a slide transition ends. You specify the delay time.


This is the type of OLE object you have selected. All the play settings you choose will apply to it.


Select the style of connector you want to use in the organization chart.

Use right-angle connectors with closely-spaced positions for better readability, or use direct connectors for a dynamic look in widely spaced organization charts.


Click the branch structure you want to use. Each branch consists of a manager and subordinates.


Specify the number of columns you want to display under a manager position when you select the Multiple column structure.


Display connecting lines to staff positions.


Display connecting lines to subordinate positions.


Specify how many coworkers you want to add, then click Right or Left to add them beside the currently selected box.


Specify how many staff positions you want to add.


Specify how many subordinate positions you want to add.


Click an orientation for the currently selected branch(es) of an organization chart. You can use different orientations to help fit the chart into a smaller space, or to emphasize the different levels.


Specify the level you want to start a selection with, and how many levels down from that position you want to include in that selection.


Specify the amount of space between manager and subordinate positions.


Specify the amount of space between coworker positions.


Eliminate excessive white space around positions in a selected branch or level. Selecting this option helps fit the organization chart onto the slide more clearly.


Close this dialog box.


Cancel all changes and return to default settings.


Use the colors specified in your Web browser's Preferences settings for the slide show pages.


Select the colors you want to use for the slide show. These colors apply only to the slide show pages; they do not change the colors specified in your Web browser's Preferences settings.


Select the color for text on slide show pages. This does not affect the color of text on the slides themselves.


Select the color for hypertext jumps on slide show pages. This does not affect the color of text on the slides themselves.


Select the color for hypertext links you have already visited. This does not affect the color of text on the slides themselves.


Select the color for the background of slide show pages. This does not affect the background color of the slides themselves.


Select to use a bitmap as the background for slide show pages.


Select to browse to the bitmap you want to use as a background for slide show pages. This will not affect the background color of the slides themselves.


Select the screen size you want to use to display slide show pages.


Specify the height and width of the slide graphics. You can select a standard size, or click Custom size to specify your own.


Display a border around the slide graphics. You can specify the width of the border.


Select the type of graphic format you want to use for the slides. Read the description for more information about each type of graphic.


This explains each type of graphic format, and gives basic information about when to use that format.


Specify the amount of compression to use for JPEG versions of slide graphics.


Type your email address. It will appear on the slide show pages so viewers can contact you.


Type the complete URL for your home page. It will appear as a link so your viewers can click to learn more about you.


Type any information you want to appear on the slide show pages.


Increase the versatility of an Internet slide show by allowing viewers to download the original version of the show with all sound, transitions, animation, and advance options. If you select this option, make sure there is a copy of the original .shw file on the server along with the Internet slide show pages.


Customize your own layout for the HTML pages of an Internet slide show.


After you have created a layout, you can choose to use it for another Internet slide show.


These are the layouts you have already defined for an Internet slide show. Click one to select it.


Click to view the currently-selected layout before you apply it to an Internet slide show.


Click to remove the currently selected layout from the list. You will not be able to use it again.


Type a descriptive title for the Internet slide show and specify the drive and folder where you want to store the Internet slide show files.

 If you want to share the slide show with others over the Internet or an intranet, be sure that the folder you select is accessible by modem or network.


Click to specify the name of the initial file, the extension for the slide show's HTML files, and whether to save the slide show files together in a separate subfolder.


Select the style of navigation buttons you want to use on Internet slide show pages.


This is the name of the currently selected button style.


Display the slide's title above the graphic of the slide.


Display the number of the slide under the slide graphic.


Display the speaker notes for the slide under the slide graphic. You must have typed speaker notes for the slide for this option to work.


Display a navigation bar to allow viewers to go through an Internet slide show more easily.


If you have chosen to advance slides automatically, select this option to loop the presentation online. The slide show will play through on its own.


Select a style for the table of contents.


If you decided to display thumbnail graphics of each slide with a table of contents, specify how large you want the thumbnails to be in relation to the page.


Select a page style for Internet slide show pages. The types of pages available depend on the graphics type you selected.


This is a description of the selected page style.


Move ahead to the next screen.


Click to select interface, startup, display, and language options.


Click to specify default folders for various types of files.


Click to create and edit toolbars, menu bars, and keyboard layouts.


Specify the folder for timed backup files. If you do not specify a backup folder, Corel Presentations saves all backup files in the folder where Corel Presentations program files are located. Original document backup files are stored in the same folder as the original file. Location of files does not affect them.


Creates a backup copy of the current document at the time interval you specify. Each new backup replaces the previous backup. Timed backup files are named ~{Prn.tmp, where n is the number of the drawing window). They are saved to the default backup directory, or in the same directory as the Corel Presentations program files.


Click to create a backup copy of the current document when you save the document. When you make changes to a document, you have two versions of the file, the one on disk and the edited one onscreen. Everytime you save, the file onscreen replaces the one on disk. When you save a document with Original document backup on, the file on disk is renamed with a .bk! extension. If you want to recover the original, you can retrieve the .bk! file. If you use Original backup, you should give files different names, not just different extensions. For example, Original backup renames both pres.1 and pres.2 to pres.bk!. Therefore, pres.bk! is the backup file only for the last file you saved.


Automatically change graphics in Windows Metafile format (usually .wmf file extensions) to WordPerfect Graphic file format (.wpg) when you import them into a slide show. This can help speed up display and make the graphics clearer.


Display the Master Gallery dialog box each time you open a new slide show. This lets you choose the master you want to use with the presentation before you begin working. If you do not select this option, the slide show will automatically use the default master. You can select a new master from the Master Gallery as you work on a slide show.


Display keystrokes next to the feature names on the menus. For example, display Ctrl+W next to Characters on the Insert menu.


Display helpful information about each menu item in a floating tip box.


Display Corel Presentations dialog boxes when you click Open, Save, and so on. These dialog boxes give you more functionality and versatility than the standard Windows file management dialog boxes.


Make selecting text easier by extending your drag to include entire words. If you want to select single letters or parts of words, do not select this option.


Corel Presentations uses video memory to display slide shows with smoother transitions. You can choose how to deploy the video memory. You can use video memory for smoother transitions without changing how the slide show looks, or you can choose to use the memory to keep slides in high resolution or truer color palettes. If DirectDraw is not installed, these options are unavailable.


Use video memory for smoother transitions while keeping slides in high resolution.


Use video memory for smoother transitions while maintaining truer color palettes.


Use video memory for smoother transitions without changing how the slide show looks.


Select the language you want for menus, dialog boxes, Help prompts, and messages.


Select the language you want to use for the Spell Checker, Thesaurus, date formats, and so on.

You will need to purchase an additional language module in order to use this option. Select the language module you have from the list, or type the name of another in the Other text box.


Select the units used for displaying and entering values in dialog boxes, and the units used on the grid and ruler.


Select this option to automatically capitalize the first letter of a sentence and the first letter of words preceded by four or more spaces.


Automatically convert two capital letters in a word to an initial capital letter and a lowercase second letter.


Automatically eliminate double spaces between words in a sentence.


Perform no end of sentence corrections.


Automatically insert two spaces instead of one after a period.


Automatically insert one space instead of two after a period.


Type the word, abbreviation, or typographical error you want QuickCorrect to automatically replace.


Add the word and correction combination to the replacement list.


Delete the selected word and correction combination from the replacement list.


This is the list of words to replace along with their replacements. Select an entry to delete it.


Let QuickCorrect replace words as you type. QuickCorrect acts as soon as you press the spacebar.


Convert double quotes to open and close double quotes.


Convert single quotes to open and close single quotes.


Use straight quotes rather than curly quotes when the quote character follows a number.


Select the character you want to use for open quotes. Press Ctrl+W to view additional characters.


Select the character you want to use for close quotes. Press Ctrl+W to view additional characters.


Select to make the SpeedLink object invisible on the slide. This is useful if the object is a rectangle or square shape that covers a bullet text line or some other text object.


Specify the path and filename of the program file (executable) that will open when you click the SpeedLink object during the slide show.


Click to launch your Web browser. The page that displays is the home page that you selected in your Web browser's Preferences settings.


Specify the Web site to display in your Internet browser. When you click the SpeedLink object during a slide show, the browser will launch and display the URL you specify.


Move back to the previous screen.


Save the entire file, including any current selections.


Save only the currently selected items in a format you specify.


Type a description for the CD clip you want to use.


Specify the number of the CD track you want to use.


Specify where in the CD track you want to begin playback; from the beginning, at a specified time, or at a specific frame.


Specify where in the CD track you want to end playback; at the end, at a specified time, or at a specific frame.


Click to hear the CD clip you specified.


Click to stop playback of a the CD clip.


Click to view an overview Help topic about this dialog box. For specific help, click the [image] button, and click any control.


Remove a SpeedLink assignment.


Select the slide that will appear when you click the SpeedLink object during a slide show.


Click to select the action that occurs when you click the SpeedLink object during a slide show.


Click to attach a sound file to the SpeedLink object.


This is the Wave sound file attached to the SpeedLink object.


This is the MIDI sound file attached to the SpeedLink object.


This is the CD track attached to the SpeedLink object.


Type speaker notes for the current slide. When you print speaker notes, the text prints indented below each slide


Click to copy the text on the slide into the speaker notes text box. All the text from the Slide Outliner appears in the speaker note for the slide. Text from text lines and areas you have created on the slide does not appear.


These are the keystroke(s) that you can press during a slide show to activate the event or action assigned to it, and the current assignments. Click a key to select it.


This is the keystroke you have clicked.


These keys already have actions assigned to them which cannot be changed.


Remove the assignment from the selected keystroke.


Select the slide that will appear when you press the selected keystroke during a slide show.


Select the action that is put into effect when you press the selected keystroke during a slide show.


Specify the location of a Web site for your Internet browser. When you press the assigned SpeedKey during a slide show, the browser will launch and display the URL you specify.


Click to launch your Web browser. The page that displays is the home page that you selected in your Web browser's Preferences settings.


Specify the path and filename of the program (executable) file that will launch when you press this SpeedKey.


Click to attach a sound file to the selected keystroke.


This is the Wave sound file assigned to this SpeedKey.


This is the MIDI sound file assigned to this SpeedKey.


This is the CD track assigned to this SpeedKey.


Select the slide that will begin a slide show. This slide displays first.


Select the version of the slide show you want to play if you have used Audience Manager to create alternative versions of this slide show for different audiences.


Select to run a slide show in a continuous loop until you press ESC.


Select a color for the highlighter. During a slide show, you can drag the highlighter (the pointer) to temporarily emphasize text and data on a slide. Highlighting disappears when you display the next slide.


Specify a width for the highlighter. During a slide show, you can drag the highlighter (the pointer) to temporarily emphasize text and data on a slide. Highlighting disappears when you display the next slide.


Play the slide show with the current settings.


Close this dialog box.


Specify the Wave sound files you want to attach to a slide. Wave audio sound files are usually stored with a .wav file extension.


Specify the MIDI sound file you want to attach to the slide. MIDI sound files are usually stored with a .mid file extension.


Select to use these options in all the slides in a slide show.


Click to hear the sound file or the CD track number you specified.


Drag the indicator to set volume levels for each sound format you are using in a slide.


Click to attach CD sound tracks to a slide.


Select the transition effect you want to use for this slide.


Select a direction for the transition effect. Not all transitions have directions.


Select the speed of the transition effect. Some transition effects do not require you to select a speed.


Advance slides using the spacebar or a mouse click.


Click to automatically advance slides with a specified amount of time between each one. The delay option you select also applies to animated bulleted lists and objects on the slide.


Use these transition options for all the slides in the slide show.


Specify how much white space you want between each main bullet level.


Specify how much white space you want between subordinate bullet levels.


Specify the amount of space you want between text lines on the same level in the bulleted list.


Click to undo any spacing changes you have made and use the default spacing in a bulleted list.


Select the font you want to use. It is usually best to use the same font for the levels of a bulleted list.


Select the font size you want to use.


Select appearance options for the text.


Enable to bold text.


Enable to apply underlining to text.


Enable to italicize text.


Select a color for the text.


Click to select fancy fills and outline options for fonts.


Specify the number of lines you want between each text line in a text object.


Type the letters, word, or phrase you want to find.


Type the letters, word, or phrase you want to use as replacement text.


Find the next occurrence of the search text.


Replace this instance of the search text with the replacement text.


Replace all instances of the search text with the replacement text.


Click to select fancy fills for boxes.


Display the box without a border.


Select the style of box you want to use.


Select a color and style for the border of the box.


Select a position for the box in relation to the text.


Displays the font, justification, and assigned bullet for each level in the bulleted list. Click the levels to make changes to their properties.


Click a level, then select a justification from the list box.


Click a level and select a bullet shape. You can also click Other and select a symbol to use as a bullet.


Sizes the text relative to other text in the same font and the other levels in the bulleted list.


Select a predefined bullet style.


Click to select a fill color for the bullets on the selected level.


Select the size of display you want to use. Zoom does not change the size of objects on a slide; it only changes your view of them.


Display the slide at 50% actual size.


Display the slide at 75% of actual size.


Display the slide at actual size.


Display the slide at 150% of actual size.


Display the slide at 200% of actual size.


Display the complete slide within a window, with minimal white space to the left and right.


Displays the slide at the same size it will appear when you play the slide show.


Display the entire slide, including margins and white space, in the window.


Specify a zoom percentage between 5% and 600%. Zoom does not change the size of objects on a slide; it only changes your view of them.


Closes the dialog box.


Displays a preview of any options you choose.


Closes this dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click this to display an overview Help topic about this dialog box. For Help on an item, click the [image]  button, and click the item.


These commands allow you to open or edit the selected object.


Use this command to export data from a chart or datasheet.


Restores the application window to fill the screen.


Reduces the application window to an icon.


Exits the application.


Lists the most recently used files. Click on a file to open it.


Displays the name of the currently selected master.


Lets you use the current master as the default for all new slide shows.


Displays the currently selected color on the color wheel, the intensity bar, and in the New color preview box.


Lets you choose colors from the color palette to create new colors.


Lets you choose color values to create new colors.


Lets you specify the amounts of red, green and blue to blend.


Lets you specify the amount of hue, lightness, and saturation.


Lets you specify the amounts of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to blend.


Lets you choose the gradient type.


Lets you specify the angle of the gradient. As the degree value increases, the gradient rotates counterclockwise in objects or on the page.


The options in this area have individual help associated with them. Click [image] and click an option for more information.


Lets you specify how much you want to move the gradient color horizontally.


Lets you specify how much you want to move the gradient color vertically.


Enable to assign the number of blending steps between the selected colors.


Lets you specify the number of blending steps between two colors.


Enable to repeat the bitmap inside the object until the object is completely filled.


Enable to repeat the bitmap inside the object in offset horizontal rows until the object is filled.


Enable to repeat the bitmap inside the object in offset vertical columns until the object is filled.


Enable to stretch or shrink the bitmap to fit inside the object.


Enable to make the bitmap smaller or larger to fit inside the object.


Enable to stack the bitmap inside the object until the object is filled.


Enable to clear the contents of the current slide.


Enable to clear the contents of all slides.


Lets you choose the type of action for the embedded or linked object.


Lets you specify the number of seconds between the end of a slide transition and the playing of the object.


Closes the dialog box.


Lets you choose a search direction. Forward searches from the current cursor position to the end of the document, and Backward searches from the current cursor position to the beginning of the document.


Enable to clear the master or the current layout.


Lets you specify a new name for an existing layout.


Click the left or right arrow button to select the layout you want to rename.


Select the layout style of the background you want to change.


Lets you choose the background that you want to assign to a layout.


Lets you specify a name for the new layout.


Opens the Insert master dialog box.


Lets you specify a new name for an existing background.


Click the left or right arrow button to select the background you want to rename.


Lets you specify a name for the new background.


Lets you choose a background category from the list box.


Lets you choose the background you want to use in the current slide show.


Displays the name of the currently selected background.


Opens the Insert background dialog box.


Enable to keep current graphic objects with the new background. Any graphics that you have added to the slide will remain current when you apply a new background.


Enable to speed up a slide show display by using a series of bitmaps instead of redrawing each slide.


Enable to save an entire slide show as a series of bitmaps for faster display during playback.


Displays the currently selected date and time format.


Lets you choose an available date/time format, or click New format to specify your own date/time format.


Enable to insert the date as a code that changes to the current date and time when you open this document.


Applies the format you chose from the Date/time formats list.


Opens the Custom date/time format dialog box. Lets you specify your own date and time format.


Enable to size the image to the page.


Enable to size the image to the selected area.


Enable to maintain a fixed image size.


Select the layout you want to assign to the new slide(s).


Displays the currently selected layout.


Lets you specify the number of slides you want to add to a slide show.


Lets you choose the type of organization chart to use.


Lets you choose a color for staff connector lines.


Lets you choose a style for staff connector lines.


Lets you choose a width for staff connector lines.


Lets you choose a color for subordinate connector lines.


Lets you choose a style for subordinate connector lines.


Lets you  choose a width for subordinate connector lines.


Enable to display text without a box around it.


Lets you choose the box shape you want to use.


Enable to display boxes with fill colors only.


Lets you choose a box border color.


Lets you choose a fill style.


Lets you customize pattern, gradient, and picture fills.


Lets you customize gradient fills.


Lets you reverse the foreground and background fill colors.


Lets you choose a foreground color.


Lets you choose a background color.


Lets you choose a fill style.


Enable to make the color transparent. Overlapping objects show through that color in the drawing window.


Displays the current texture or picture.


Opens the Open file dialog box.


Lets you choose textures or pictures as fills.


Enable to save a copy of the movie file within the slide show.


Lets you choose a bitmap special effect.


Lets you apply the bitmap special effect to the entire area.


Lets you apply the bitmap special effect to the area that you selected.


Lets you apply the bitmap special effect outside the area that you selected.


Enable to specify the amount, percent, size, and direction for each special effect.


Enable to apply the special effect to the Full image, Inside area, or Outside area.


Lets you specify the percentage of effect applied to the bitmap.


Lets you control the amount of effect applied to the bitmap.


Lets you choose the direction in which the special effect is applied.


Displays the result of the selected effect in the After preview box.


Lets you reset the bitmap in the After preview box to how it looked before you applied the special effect.


Lets you choose the shape of the bitmap brush.


Lets you specify how many pixels across the brush will cover.


Lets you specify what percentage of pixels within the brush area will change color.


Enable to ensure there are no transparent colors in the image.


Lets you specify the number of rows you want to insert. Existing rows below the insertion point move down.


Lets you specify the number of columns you want to insert. Existing columns to the right of the insertion point move right.


Lets you specify the number of rows to delete. Existing rows below the insertion point move up.


Lets you specify the number of columns to delete. Existing columns to the right of the insertion point move left.


Lets you specify the number of rows or columns to delete.


Enable to clear the data from the selected cells.


Enable to clear the date or number formatting from the selected cells.


Enable to clear both data and formatting from the selected cells.


Displays the location of the current cell. Letters represent the columns and numbers represent the rows.


Lets you edit or replace current data.


Lets you specify the column and row number of the cell to move to. For example, A1 takes you to the cell in the first row of the first column.


Lets you toggle the highlighter color display on or off in the datasheet.


Lets you highlight specific columns or rows of data in the datasheet.


Displays a row in the datasheet.


Displays a column in the datasheet.


Displays a cell in the datasheet.


 Lets you choose the kind of data to import.


Enable to switch data from columns to rows and rows to columns.


Enable to clear all the data already in the datasheet.


Enable to link the imported data to the existing chart; the chart data automatically updates every time it is opened.


Enable to begin the imported data at the selected cell instead of the top-left cell in the datasheet. Imported data overwrites any existing data in the datasheet.


Lets you specify the path and filename of the data file you want to import.


Lets you choose any of the range names listed to import them.


Lets you choose the range of data you want to import.


Lets you choose an available numeric format, or click User defined to set your own options.


Enable to adjust the number of decimal digits to the size of the cell.


Lets you specify how many digits will display after a decimal point.


Displays the numeric data type format.


Enable to display data as currency amounts.


Enable to display data in thousands.


Enable to display data as a percentage.


Enable to display data in exponential notation.


Displays the format of negative numbers.


Enable to display negative numbers preceded by a minus sign (-).


Enable to display negative numbers in parentheses.


Lets you specify the field and record delimiters for text data.


Lets you specify the codes used for encapsulated characters and codes to strip out.


Lets you choose an available date/time format.


Lets you specify your own date and time format.


Lets you specify the column width.


Enable to display row statistics for the selected cell.


Enable to display column statistics for the selected cell.


Displays the number of cells containing data in the row, column, or selected area.


Displays the minimum data value in the row, column, or selected area.


Displays the maximum data value in the row, column, or selected area.


Displays the average of all data values in the row, column, or selected area.


Displays the standard deviation. Standard deviation is calculated by finding out the difference between each data value and the average data value in a row, column, or selected area.


Displays the fit information.


Enable to apply the formula to a specific row or rows.


Enable to apply the formula to a specific column or columns.


Displays the formula that will be applied to the selected data.


Lets you specify the rows or columns to which you want to apply the selected formula.


Lets you specify the row or column in which you want the results of the formula to appear.


Lets you choose one of the available formulas.


Lets you specify how many cells before and after each cell to include in the moving average.


Lets you choose the value for "n" in a polynomial equation: y=c0+c1*+c2...+cn*xn (where n is the order of the fit).


Lets you choose a value for fit formulas to forecast future values.


Displays fit types, correlations, r-squared values, and formulas for each fit type.


Lets you choose the type of fit for which you want to display statistics.


Displays fit types, correlations, r-squared values, and formulas for each fit type.


Enable to specify a direction for the data fill.


Enable to select rows to fill cells with data from right to left.


Enable to select columns to fill cells with data from top to bottom.


Lets you specify the start value and adds the step number to it.


Lets you specify the start value and multiplies it by the step number.


Lets you specify the start value date and multiplies it by the step number, using the time units you specify.


Lets you choose the number or date to begin the data.


Lets you specify how much the start value will increase in each cell.


Enable to sort selected values in each row, or Top to bottom to sort selected values in each column.


Enable to select the order values by either ascending or descending.


Lets you specify the key row or column to use as a basis for sorting, while keeping all the values in that row or column together.


Enable to include the rows or columns you previously excluded.


Enable to exclude the rows or columns you want to keep from appearing in the chart.


Displays text and objects as outlines only, without any fill style.


Click to change the style of fill method.


Opens the Texture settings dialog box.


Enable to repeat the texture in relation to the entire drawing window.


Enable to repeat the texture within the object.


Lets you choose a line color from the color palette.


Lets you choose a line style.


Lets you choose a preset line width, or you can type a value in the Line width box.


Lets you choose a style for line joints.


Lets you choose a style for a line starting cap.


Lets you choose a style for a line ending cap.


Lets you choose the type of data chart to use.


Lets you choose the style of chart to use.


Displays the chart height, width, and depth.


Displays the chart horizontally instead of vertically. In a horizontal chart, the x-axis is vertical.


Lets you set the depth of pie slices, lines, markers, areas, and bars in the chart.


Lets you specify a value.


Opens the Table properties dialog box.


Opens a preview of the data chart with the options you have chosen before you implement the changes.


Click to display the data in each column as overlapping groups.


Lets you specify the width of 3-D bars, lines, and high/low markers.


Lets you set a size for the smallest bubble in the chart.


Lets you set the height of 3-D bars, lines, and high/low markers.


Lets you choose the pie that you want to modify.


Enable to proportionally size two or more pie charts in the current datasheet.


Enable to arrange the pie chart slices by size.


Opens the Explode slice dialog box.


Lets you set the angle of rotation.


Lets you set the tilt value for the pie chart in the chart area.


Enable to link the slice you specify in the first pie to the second pie.


Enable to display each set of data as horizontal and vertical lines.


Enable to display each set of data as solid areas.


Enable to display data on a round grid.


Enable to display data on an angular grid.


Enable to display each data series on a different y-axis.


Enable to draw an outline around each area in surface charts.


Lets you choose an outline color for surface charts.


Click to blend the range colors for a table or surface chart.


Lets you choose a color from the color palette for each range of data.


Displays the data in each column as a combined total, stacked from bottom to top.


Displays the data in each column as a percentage of the whole column.


Displays the data in each column as overlapping groups.


Displays the data in each column as clustered groups.


Displays each set of data as horizontal and vertical lines.


Displays each set of data as bars with error indicators.


Displays each set of data with top and bottom error markers.


Displays each set of data as solid areas.


Displays the pie chart as a stacked column.


Displays data as a topography.


Brings the dialog box back to full size after you click Preview to see the changes.


Scrolls through each series in the data chart.


Displays the series as a solid area, with data points defining the top.


Displays the series as one or more solid bars, one bar for each data point.


Displays the series as a line connecting the data points.


Displays the series as a line with a device marking each data point.


Displays the series as a set of graphics devices marking each data point.


Specify a size for the series marker.


Lets you choose a marker shape.


Enable to determine which y-axis to apply to the data series.


Lets you choose a line style and line color for the vertical major grid lines.


Lets you choose a line style and line color for the vertical minor grid lines.


Lets you choose a line style and line color for the horizontal major grid lines.


Lets you choose a line style and line color for the horizontal minor grid lines.


Displays each data series on a different y-axis.


Lets you choose a line style and line color for the horizontal minor grid lines.


Lets you choose a predefined ratio of major grid lines per data series, or specify how many major grid lines you want for each series.


Lets you specify a width for the frame borders.


Lets you specify a height for an elevated base underneath the chart.


Enable to display zero baseline.


Enable to display where the frames will be placed around the chart.


Enable to display right angle axes.


Lets you specify the amount of horizontal displacement.


Lets you specify the amount of vertical displacement.


Lets you reset horizontal and vertical values to the original settings.


Opens the Retrieve chart style dialog box to retrieve a previously defined and saved bulleted list style.


Opens the Save chart style dialog box to save a bulleted list style.


Displays the font face, style, and size for each level in the bulleted list.


Lets you apply the current bulleted list properties in all slides of the slide show.


Lets you choose the type of data chart to use.


Enable to fill the datasheet with correctly formatted sample data, labels, and legend titles.


Displays the chart height, width, and depth.


Opens the Bullet properties dialog box and lets you choose fill options for bullets.


Lets you choose a bar shape.


Lets you choose the type of object animation to use.


Lets you choose the direction of the shadow, or you can use the scroll bars to position the shadow around the object.


Lets you specify a horizontal offset number for the shadow.


Lets you specify a vertically offset number for the shadow.


Enable to make the shadow partially transparent.


Enable to save the sound within the slide show.


Enable to play the sound continuously throughout the slide show, or until another sound begins.


Lets you email the currently displayed slide.


Lets you email the entire slide show.


Displays the current slide layout name.


Lets you choose the layout to use.


Displays the name of the background you have selected.


Lets you choose a background from one of the background categories.


Opens the Insert background dialog box.


Click the background you want to use for the current slide.


Lets you apply the background to all slides in the slide show.


Enable to omit the current slide when you play the slide show.


Click the left or right arrow button to select a slide.


Lets you choose the slide that you want to modify.


Enable to advance animated objects before the bulleted list is displayed.


Enable to advance animated objects after the bulleted list is displayed.


Displays the icon to indicate whether or not the slide is using a mouse or time delay advance option.


Lets you choose the type of corrections and quotation marks used by QuickCorrect.


Enable to advance the first animated object manually or automatically; all remaining animated objects follow automatically with no manual trigger or time delay.


Enable to use the slide's display method (manually).


Lets you convert the selected object into a bitmap.


Enable to display a message each time you convert an object into a bitmap.


Click to resample the selected bitmap.


Enable to turn off the resample bitmap message.


Lets you specify the number of steps you want in the blend.


Lets you specify how much you want to rotate the image around each axis.


Lets you choose a predefined rotation.


Lets you specify how much you want to rotate the image around the x-axis.


Lets you specify how much you want to rotate the image around the y-axis.


Lets you specify how much you want to rotate the image around the z-axis.


Lets you set the sides of the image lighter or darker.


Lets you choose the perspective and depth of the image.


Lets you specify the depth of the image.


Lets you choose the shape you want the selected object to warp into. Click the rectangle shape at the top left to reset the object to its original shape.


Opens the Display dialog box.


Enable to display the names of the last nine files you worked on. The filenames appear at the bottom of the File menu.


Enable to make the pointer invisible while you draw objects.


Enable to display the Document selection dialog box each time you open Corel Presentations.


Enable to create a new slide show each time you open Corel Presentations.


Enable to create a new drawing each time you open Corel Presentations.


Lets you choose startup options for Corel Presentations.


Enable to save drawings, by default, in one of the two formats.


Enable to save a drawing in a format suitable for Corel WordPerfect Suite 7, Suite 8, WordPerfect Office 2000, WordPerfect Office 2002, or WordPerfect Office 11.


Enable to save a drawing in a format suitable for Corel WordPerfect 6.x, DOS, or Windows.


Enable to hear a beep when a search fails.


Lets you specify a default folder for drawing (.wpg) and slide show (.shw) files.


Lets you specify a default folder for master (.mst) files.


Lets you specify a default folder for background files.


Lets you specify a default folder for macro (.wcm) files.


Lets you specify a default directory for keyboard layout and toolbar files.


Lets you specify a default folder for sound files.


Lets you specify a default directory for texture (.bmp) files.


Lets you specify a default directory for picture (.bmp) files.


Lets you specify a default folder for movie files.


Lets you choose a toolbar, property bar, tool palette, keyboard layout, or menu bar from the list to use, edit, copy, rename, or delete.


Click to copy the currently highlighted toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar.


Click to assign a new name to the currently highlighted toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar.


Click to delete the currently highlighted toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar.


Click to choose appearance, location, and size options for the toolbar, property bar, or tool palette.


Click to create a new toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu bar.


Click to edit the currently highlighted toolbar, property bar, tool palette, keyboard layout, or menu.


Click to return the selected property bar or tool palette to its original state.


Lets you specify a name for the toolbar, menu, or keyboard layout.


Displays the name of the toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu to be copied.


Lets you specify a name for the copy of the toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu.


Displays the toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu to be renamed.


Lets you specify a new name for the toolbar, keyboard layout, or menu.


Lets you specify where in the application window you want to position the toolbar or tool palette.


Lets you specify whether you want the buttons of a toolbar, tool palette, or property bar to display as text, pictures, or text and pictures.


Lets you specify how many rows or columns of buttons the toolbar, tool palette, or property bar displays.


Click options and features in the menu bar.


Click icons on the tool palette to select graphic, chart, text, object, line, or bitmap tools.


Displays the name of open documents and other information.


Click icons on the property bar lets to change such things as font face, point size, templates, slides, layers, fill and line colors, and patterns.


Lets you create and align objects with precision.


Lets you access the commands you use most often.


Displays a thumbnail sketch of each slide in the slide show.


Lets you write an outline for your presentation.


Bitmaps are graphics formed by a series of dots called "pixels."


Lets you create, edit, and size bitmaps.


Lets you cut, copy, delete, move, or apply special effects to a selected area in the bitmap.


A grouped object is made up of other objects (drawings, text, or both).


Lets you edit the points of a drawing object, position it on the page, or change its properties.


Lets you double-click a linked or embedded object to edit it in the application or file in which it was originally created.


Displays information about the axes.


A series is a row of data from the datasheet.


A chart frame is a group of lines.


Represents value increments in a chart frame and are parallel to the x and y axes in the chart.


Lets you enter and edit data, change chart appearance, and size charts.


A tick is a small line perpendicular to an axis that marks off amounts such as dollars, distances, or numbers of objects.


Lets you drag the chart's title to position it in relation to the chart.


Lets you drag the chart's subtitle to position it in relation to the chart.


Lets you double-click the title of the axis to edit it or change its properties.


Displays the active text area or text line. You can create and edit the text, change the font, and format the text.


Displays data values as a solid area that bulges and dips like the contour of a landscape as it connects data points.


Displays the data in a box corresponding to a bar, line, or pie slice.


A chart is created with data you enter in the datasheet.


A table is a two-dimensional list displaying the datasheet data in rows and columns.


Displays an organization's structure, and the relationships of people and positions within the organization.


Displays a part of an organization chart that indicates a position or person in the organization.


Displays a text object.


Lets you move up, down, right, and left in the current drawing or slide.


Displays an embedded movie file.


A chart legend lists the colors, patterns, and symbols you are using to show which series label corresponds to which bar, line, and pie slice.


Displays selected multiple objects.


Displays an axis. There are three axes in a chart: x, primary y, and secondary y.


Lets you specify how many times wider, taller, shorter, or narrower you want the object to be.


Enable to stretch the object from its center point.


Enable to stretch a copy of the object while leaving the original unchanged.


Lets you specify how many times larger or smaller you want the object to be.


Enable to size the object around its center point.


Enable to size a copy of the object while leaving the original unchanged.


Lets you specify which slice you want to separate from the rest of the pie.


Lets you specify the distance that you want to separate the pie slice from the center of the pie chart.


Lets you specify the size of the pie chart in relation to the chart area.


Lets you specify the number of degrees to rotate the object


Lets you rotate a copy of the object while leaving the original unchanged.


Displays a slide in the slide show.


Lets you position the text in relation to the object, beginning at the first anchor point.


Displays the contoured text alone, making the object transparent.


Go To slide dialog


Displays the title of the slide to go to.


Move the slider to choose a slide to go to.


Closes this dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Shows the trace progress.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Downloads masters from the Corel Web site.


Accepts or declines the TrueDoc font waiver.


Shows the font attributes of the selected bullet level.


Displays titles on the data chart axis.


Shows the current name of the box field.


Displays the current name of the box field.


Allows you to type a new name for the box field.


Shows the difference between parent-to-child spacing and sibling-to-sibling spacing.


Shows how the maximum , minimum, and major grid value labels display in a data chart.


Previews how the major tick option you choose will display in a data chart.


Previews how the minor tick option you choose will display in the data chart.


Shows the difference between a major and a minor vertical grid line.


Shows the difference between a major and a minor horizontal grid line.


Browse to locate a sound file to include with the transition.


Lists the missing fonts and the selected fonts for substitution.


Click to substitute the missing fonts.


Click to cancel the font substitution.


Click to view an overview Help topic about this dialog box. For specific help, click the What's This button, and click any control.


Click to select the entire datasheet.


Lets you specify the number of rows or columns you want to insert.


Displays the currently selected series.


Shows the style attributes of the selected bullet level.


Changes the distance between the bullet and the text after it.


Allows you to define an outline style.


No Help available for this item.


Set the horizontal anchor.


Set the vertical anchor.


Shows the difference between a horizontal and vertical anchor.


The image window displays the possible 3D changes you can add to your TextArt.


The image window displays the possible advanced 3D features you can add to your TextArt.


Select the type of fill you would like for the selected shape.


Select the type of outline you would like for the selected shape.


Select the type of shadow you would like for the selected shape.


Select SpeedLink options.


Select Object Animation options.


Select the rotation direction for your shape.


Select the perspective you would like for your image.


Displays a variety of features or settings in your work environment.


Displays a variety of features or settings in your work environment.


Displays a variety of features or settings in your work environment.


Displays the language you select from the Interface language list box.


Displays the language you select from the Content language list box.


Displays a variety of features or settings in your work environment.


Displays a variety of features or settings in your work environment.


Displays a variety of features or settings in your work environment.


Lets you create and edit toolbars.


Lets you customize property bars.


Lets you customize tool palettes.


Lets you customize keyboards.


Lets you customize menus.


Enable to copy the color, line, and fill attributes of drawing objects to other objects or text.


Enable to copy the color, line, and fill attributes of text to other objects or text.


Enable to copy the color, line, and fill attributes of both drawing objects and text to other objects or text.


Enable to position objects relative to the upper left margin.


Enable to position objects relative to the lower left margin.


Enable to positions objects relative to the center of the page.


Enable to position objects relative to the lower right margin.


Enable to position objects relative to the upper right margin.


Enable to leave the objects and margins as is.


Enable to size margins, and maintain their original proportions, to adjust for the new page settings


Enable to stretch margins, and possibly distort their original proportions, to adjust for the new page settings.


Enable to size objects, and maintain their original proportions, to adjust for the new page settings.


Enable to stretch objects, and possibly distort their original proportions, to adjust for the new page settings.


Clears the contents of the selected slide or slide show.


Displays a title, subtitle or bulleted list. Titles and subtitles are text lines used to identify the contents of a slide. Bulleted lists are a series of text lines that are preceeded by bullets. You can make modifications to the text and properties of titles, subtitles, or bulleted lists.


Lets you choose where to position the Datasheet value for each pie slice.


Lets you choose where to position the percentage labels for each pie chart slice. All the percentage labels add up to 100%.


Lets you specify how many digits display after decimal points.


Lets you chose where to position the label of each pie slice.


Lets you choose the length of lines connecting outside labels to pie slices.


Lets you choose an orientation for labels outside the pie chart. Stacked stacks the value, percent, and label text vertically for each slice. One line lists them horizontally.


Lets you choose the direction which the legend runs, either horizontally or vertically.


Enable to position the legend at the top left hand corner of the chart.


Enable to center the legend to the left of the chart.


Enable to position the legend at the bottom left hand corner of the chart.


Enable to center the legend above the chart.


Enable to center the legend below the chart.


Enable to position the legend at the top right hand corner of the chart.


Enable to center the legend to the right of the chart.


Enable to position the legend at the bottom right hand corner of the chart


Enable to display the legend with your chart.


Enable to place the legend inside your chart.


Enable to display a title with your legend.


Lets you specify a name for the legend title.


Enable to display labels attached to each bar, marker, line, area, or slice in your chart.


Lets you choose whether labels will be positioned inside or outside their data representations.


Enable to display the title or subtitle of the chart.


Lets you specify the title or subtitle of the chart.


Enable to position the title or subtitle at the top left hand corner of your chart.


Enable to center the title or subtitle above your chart.


Enable to position the title or subtitle at the top right hand corner of your chart.


Enable to display axis labels.


Lets you specify the maximum value of the axis.


Enable to automatically read the present maximum value of the axis.


Lets you specify the minimum value of the axis.


Enable to automatically read the present minimum value of the axis.


Lets you specify how far apart major grid lines will be.


Enable to automatically choose grid values.


Enable to display values on the axis in even increments.


Enable to display the numbers on the axis exponentially.


Lets you specify a value for the label scale factor.


Enable to display a title for the axis.


Lets you specify a title for the axis


Lets you choose a horizontal or vertical orientation for the axis title.


Enable to display major ticks outside the grid line.


Enable to display major ticks inside the grid line


Enable to display major ticks overlapping the grid line on both sides


Enable to display no major tick lines at all.


Enable to display minor ticks outside the grid line.


Enable to display minor ticks inside the grid line.


Enable to display minor ticks overlapping the grid line on both sides


Enable to display no minor tick lines at all.


Type the word(s) or phrases(s) you wish to use as replacement text.


Lets you specify how far you want to skew the object. Positive numbers pull objects up or right. Negative numbers pull objects down or left.


Enable to skew the object around its center point.


Enable to skew a copy of the objects while leaving the original unchanged.


Enable to display a table of Datasheet data underneath the chart.


Enable to display divider lines between labels and data in the table.


Enable to display border lines for each cell in a table.


Enable to display the selected colors for each range in the table of cells.


Displays the name of the current slide.


Lets you choose the slide to display


Displays an active title, subtitle, or bulleted list.


Enable to compress the bitmap so it will take up less memory space.


Enable to let a web browser display the image in stages. The image will appear at once and then gradually become clearer. Interlaced images give your reader a preview of what the image is without making them wait for the entire image to transfer.


Enable to use the standard .GIF transparent color in the image. If you do not enable this option, Presentations will use the current transparent color in the bitmap editor as the transparent color for the exported .GIF.


Displays the cursor position if you choose Show Pointer Position from the View menu, or displays reveal codes for active text if you select Reveal Codes from the View menu.


Enable to display axis labels next to the grid lines and ticks on your chart.


Enable to display ticks next to labels. Grid lines without labels do not display ticks.


Enable to alternate labels up and down to make room for longer labels.


Choose or specify the number of labels to skip alternately along the x axis. If you click 1, every other label displays. If you specify 7, every eigth label displays.


Enable to separate the axes on the chart with straight lines.


Moves back to the previous axis.


Moves ahead to the next axis.


Displays the title of the current axis.


Enable to display axis labels.


Enable to displays axis titles.


Lets you choose a line style for your major grid lines.


Lets you choose whether or not to display ticks on your major grid lines.


Lets you choose a color for your major grid lines.


Lets you choose a line style for your minor grid lines.


Lets you choose whether or not to display ticks on your minor grid lines.


Lets you choose a color for your minor grid lines.


Lets you choose a fill color.


Lets you choose a color for lines.


Lets you choose a color for each range of data.


Blends the range colors for a table. Choose the starting color (at the 1-10% row) and the ending color (at the 91-100% row), then click blend.


Displays the name of the file you are inserting.


Lets you choose the format that you are converting from.


Opens the Serial Number/Pin dialog box which lets you to enter the serial number and  PIN (personal identification number) for this software.


Opens the System Info dialog box which lets you display information about your system, display, printers, Corel .EXEs and .DLLs, and system .DLLs.


Opens the Copyright dialog box which lets you display and print copyright information for this software.


Opens the License dialog box which lets you display and print license information for this software.


Displays the name of the software.


Displays build, storage location, and copyright information for this software.


Displays the name of the person the software is registered to, the serial number, and the PIN.


Lets you type in the serial number located on your proof of purchase, or if you are upgrading from a previous version, the license number from your original license certificate.


Lets you type in the Personal Identification Number which you receive when you register the product. You do not need this number to run the software, but you will need it if you call customer support.


Lets you choose the type of system information to display.


Displays system information.


Saves the system information to a text file.


Displays the copyright or license information for the software. When you installed the software, you agreed to abide by these terms and conditions.


Prints the copyright or license information.


Displays the path to the folder in which the backup file is located.


Displays the current name of the backup file.


Lets you specify a new name for the backup file.


Renames the backup file.


Displays the width and height of the slide graphics.


Lets you specify a filename for the HTML page you want to use as the initial page in your Internet slide show. Usually, this is "Index.html."; however, if you have more than one Internet slide show in the same folder,  the initial filenames should be different.


Lets you specify the extension you want to use for the rest of the HTML pages in your Internet slide show.


Enable to save the image files for your Internet slide show in their own folder. This is especially useful when you have more than one Internet slide show.


Lets you specify how many seconds each slide displays for in a self-running presentation.


Enable to continuously loop your Internet slide show. It will play over and over again until the viewer presses ESC.


Lets you specify a width, in pixels, for the graphics in your Internet slide show.


Lets you specify a width, in pixels, for the graphics in your Internet slide show.


Lets you specify a height, in pixels, for the graphics in your Internet slide show.


Deletes all items from your current drawing.


Closes this dialog box without deleting any items from your current drawing.


Displays the name of your portable slide show.


Displays the destination drive and folder for your portable slide show.


Displays the operating system used to play your portable slide show.


Displays the window size and resolution used when playing the portable slide show.


Enable to have your portable slide show repeat itself until the Esc key is pressed.


Lets you change the destination and display options for your portable slide show.


Creates your portable slide show.


Displays the name of your portable slide show.


Enable to set this drive as the destination for your portable slide show


Enable to set this drive as the destination for your portable slide show.


Enable to specify a destination for your portable slide show.


Lets you specify a destination path for your portable slide show.


Opens the Browse for Folder dialog box where you can browse to a destination for your portable slide show


Enable to create your portable slide show as an e-mail attachment which will be mailed at the end of the creation process and then deleted from your computer.


Move back to the previous Show on the Go screen.


Move ahead to the next Show on the Go dialog box screen.


Show on the Go(3)


Enable to create a portable slide show that will play on the Windows 95/NT operating system.


Enable to create a portable slide show that will play on the Windows 3.x operating system as well as the Windows 95/NT operating system. Slide shows compatible with the Windows 3.x operating system are not self-executing, cannot span disks, and do not support animation or QuickLInks.


Enable to display your portable your slide show at 640x480 pixels with 256 colors. This display is compatible with most monitor and computer settings.


Enable to display your portable slide show using the screen size and resolution settings your computer is currently using. If you choose this option, the computer used to play your slide show must have the same settings, or your slide show may have display problems.


Lets you choose a category of background images for your Internet slide show.


Lets you choose a background image for your Internet slide show.


Displays the name of the current background image.


Opens the Select Background Image where you can browse to a background image.


Downloads Masters from the Corel Web site.


The Slide Outliner lets you write an outline for your presentation. The Slide Sorter displays a thumbnail sketch of each slide in your slide show.


Data charts display a graphical representation of the data contained in your data sheet. Organization chart display an organization's structure, and the relationship of people and positions within the organization.


Lets you create and edit slides and drawings.


Lets you choose a direction for a shadow.


Lets you preview the shadow as it will appear.


Lets you adjust the height of a shadow.


Lets you adjust the width of a shadow.


Lets you specify the width of a shadow.


Lets you specify the height of a shadow.


Type a number to specify the height or width of a shadow.


Lets you select the shadow color.


Lets you select the shadow color.


Lets you create a transparent shadow by lightening the intensity of the color of the shadow.


Restores the text that is currently displayed.


Lets you display up to three previous deleting actions.


Lets you display up to three previous deleting actions.


Cancels the undelete process.


Shows how staggering will look in a data chart.


Constraining objects while drawing

You can constrain objects by pressing the SHIFT key to maintain control over mouse movement as you create objects. Constraining limits the size, angle, or shape of an object.


If there are fonts in the file that are missing on your system, the Font matching results dialog box shows the missing fonts and the fonts that Corel Presentations will substitute for them. You can click OK to proceed with the font substitution, or you can cancel opening the document.


Create text Placeholders dialog box


Enable to add a title placeholder to the slide's layout.


Enable to add a subtitle placeholder to the slide's layout.


Enable to add a bulleted list placeholder to the slide's layout.


Displays a preview of the enabled placeholder.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes the dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Displays a help topic for this dialog box.


Indicates the publishing stage you are at in the Internet Publisher wizard.


Indicates the publishing stage you are at in the Internet Publisher wizard.


Indicates the publishing stage you are at in the Internet Publisher wizard.


Indicates the publishing stage you are at in the Internet Publisher wizard.


Indicates the publishing stage you are at in the Internet Publisher wizard.


Indicates the publishing stage you are at in the Internet Publisher wizard.


Indicates the publishing stage you are at in the Internet Publisher wizard.


Indicates the publishing stage you are at in the Internet Publisher wizard.


Indicates the publishing stage you are at in the Internet Publisher wizard.


Indicates the publishing stage you are at in the Internet Publisher wizard.


Indicates the publishing stage you are at in the Internet Publisher wizard.


Indicates the publishing stage you are at in the Internet Publisher wizard.


Welcome to the Internet Publisher.


Opens the Advanced settings dialog box.


Displays the name of the file that is open.


Allows you to display a variety of menu features in your work environment.


Choose the items you want to display on the menus.


Allows you to save the file in a different format.


Allows you to save the file in a different format.


Allows you to save the file in a different format.


Allows you to save the file in a different format.


Closes the dialog box and saves any changes you made.


Closes the dialog box without saving the changes you made.


Lets you display a Help topic for about this dialog box.


Glossary

Alignment guides

Anchor handles

ANSI

Application Programming Interface

Arc

ASCII

Assignments

Axes

Axis label

Bitmap

Blur

Border

Brightness

Bullet

Bezier curve

Cell format

Center point

CGM

Chart

Class

Client application

CMYK

Color palette

Column

Command name

Comments

Complement

Conditions

Constant

Contrast

Coordinates

Cusp

Data chart

DPI

Drag

Embedded object

Emboss

Enumerations

Equalize

Extension

Event driven programming

Fill

Flyout

Font

Gallery

Global

Graphicsland

Grid lines

Handles

HLS

HTML

Image resolution

In-place editing

Link

Linked object

Local

Loops

Master

Mixed Chart

Mosaic

Node

Object

Object oriented programming

OLE

OLE Object Command

Open Document Management Application Program Interface (ODMA)

Open editing

Parameters

Paste

Pixel

Pentagon

Persistent

Polyline

Product commands

Programming commands

Property

Rain

Range

RGB

Recorded macros

Regression types

Resolution

Rotate

Row

Saturation

Segment

Separators

Server application

Sharpen

Shortcut keys

Skew

Slide editor window

Smooth

Source file

SpeedKeys

SpeedLink

Spike removal

Startup options

Stereogram

Subroutine

Thumbnail sketch

Tick

Trace contours

Uniform Resource Locator

Variable

Vector image

Wind

World Wide Web

X-axis

Y-axis

Zooming


Alignment guides

Alignment guides are nonprinting lines used to align objects. You can place alignment guides by dragging them from the rulers.


Anchor handles

The handles surrounding a selected object that let you size and shape segments of an object.


ANSI

The American National Standards Institute character set. It consists of 256 characters; the first 128 are the same as the ASCII character set.


Application Programming Interface (API)

An interface between the operating system and application programs, which includes the way the application programs interact with the operating system and the services the operating system makes available to the programs.


Arc

A segment of an ellipse or a circle shape.


ASCII

The American Standard Code for Information Interchange character set, which consists of the characters available on a standard 128-character keyboard, including nonprintable control codes such as carriage returns and page breaks.


Assignments

Assignment statements assign the value of an expression to a variable.


Axes

The horizontal x-axis or vertical y-axis lines used as reference points for plotting data charts. The axis is marked much like a ruler, which it is broken up into units using tick marks. Each tick mark indicates a value on the axis.


Axis label

The value of a tick mark on an axis of a data chart.


B


Bitmap

A bitmap is a graphic formed by a series of dots called pixels. A bitmap can also be referred to as a paint image, a raster image, or a pixel image. Scanned photographs and images created in "paint" applications are bitmaps.


Blur

The blur effect blurs the borders between colors and objects.


Border

A border is the outer edge of a window or a frame, which can be enlarged or reduced in size.


Brightness

The brightness effect lightens or darkens a bitmap image. You need to specify low brightness percentages for dark areas, or high percentages for light areas.


Bullet

A dot or other character used to differentiate or add emphasis to items in a list.


Bezier curve

A path defined by the position of the four control points that are located at the ends of the tangents of the vertices. The length and angle of the tangents describe how a path deviates from linear between its vertices.


C


Cell format

The cell format determines if the data in a data chart is a number or a date. The numeric format can consist of values such as a currency or a percentage.


Center point

The point around which an object is rotated, or the point toward which or away from which an object is sized. A center point can also be referred to as a pivot point.


CGM

Computer Graphics Metafile is a standard format for graphics images that can be shared among different applications.


Chart

A chart is a diagram that contains graphed data, lines of text, organizational structures, or a table.


Class

A class is an object type, in object-oriented programming, that has the same properties and methods.


Client application

In object linking and embedding, an application that holds a linked or embedded object.


CMYK

A color model made up of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (B). In the CMYK color model, color values are expressed as percentages. A value of 100 for any ink means that it is being applied at full saturation. CMYK is used in full-color commercial printing.


Color palette

The color palette is a set of colors displayed on a rectangular grid. These colors can be used to add color to drawings or slides.


Column

A column is a vertical set of cells in a datasheet designated by consecutive letters of the alphabet.


Command name

Indicates which feature the command activates. Some commands consist of only a command name, such as FileOpenDlg().


Comments

Comment statements contain notes and other information that do not affect macro play. Use comment statements to explain the purpose of your macro, describe its components, or to prevent a statement from playing. A comment either begins with // and ends with a  hard return [HRt], or it begins with /* and ends with */.


Complement

A complement is the opposite of a specific color. Colors that are opposite each other on the color wheel are complementary colors. For example, red and green are complementary colors, as are yellow and blue.


Conditions

Conditional statements play a statement or group of statements when a specified condition is met. A group of statements is known as a statement block. A statement block is played depending on which option the user chooses. Conditional statements include Case, If, and Switch.


Constant

A constant variable is a variable whose value cannot change at run-time. A constant can be a number, such as 25 or 3.6; a character, such as a or $; or a character string, like "this is a string."


Contrast

The contrast effect increases or decreases the contrast between colors and backgrounds. You need to specify high contrast percentages to increase contrast, or low percentages for reduce contrast.


Coordinates

The address that identifies a cell in a datasheet or a spreadsheet by its column and row. For example, a cell located in column A and row 1 would have A1 as its coordinate.


Cusp

A pointed corner where two Bezier segments meet at different angles.


D


Data chart

A chart created with data you enter in the datasheet. Data charts types include: table, scatter, high/low, surface, radar, pie, bar, line, and area charts.


DPI

A measure of a printer's resolution in dots per inch. Typical desktop laser printers print at 300 dpi, while image setters are capable of printing at resolutions of 1270 or 2540 dpi. A higher dpi creates a smoother and cleaner output.


Drag

To move the mouse while holding down the left mouse button. Releasing the button completes the action.


E


Embedded object

Information from a file created in one application (the server application) that has been inserted into a file in another application (the client application). For example, you can embed a spreadsheet created in Quattro Pro into a Corel Presentations slide show. You can edit the embedded information from within the application into which it is embedded.


Emboss

The emboss effect produces a three-dimensional effect to the edges of objects and lines.


Enumerations

Enumerations are used to set parameter values when parameter values are limited to a specific set of values.


Equalize

The equalize effect evens out the contrast between objects and backgrounds.


Extension

The characters following the period in a filename that identify the type of information in the file. For example, the .SHW extension represents a Corel Presentations slide show.


event driven programming
Event-driven programming

Event driven programming is a program that waits for an event to occur and responds to the event, instead of going through a program line by line.


F


Fill

A color, pattern, gradient, texture, or picture you can add to a closed object or a data chart series.


Flyout

A tool or menu command that displays additional tools or commands when selected. Tools or commands that have a flyout have a small arrow located in the bottom right corner of the tool button or to the right of the command name.


Font

A set of characters in a given typeface and point size. Most fonts are available in families that include different point sizes, such as 8 points, 18 points, and 36 points, and styles, such as bold and italic.


G


Gallery

A dialog box that lets you view small sketches of slide show masters and then select the one you want to use. Slide show masters are divided into several categories: 35mm, Business, Color, Design, Nature, Theme, and Printout.


Global

The Global command creates variables and arrays that pertain to the current macro and to macros called by the Run and Chain commands.


Graphicsland

A company that creates color slides from your slide show file. You can send your file to Graphicsland via modem, and they will create 35mm slides.


Grid lines

Grid lines represent value increments in a data chart frame. Grid lines appear parallel to the x axis and y axis in a data chart.


H


Handles

Small squares that appear on the corners and sides of an object's box when the object is selected. Use the square handles to resize and transform an object.


HLS

Hue, lightness, and saturation are the components of the HLS color model, a variation of HSB and an alternative to RGB. Hue determines color (yellow, orange, red, etc.), lightness determines perceived intensity (lighter or darker color), and saturation determines color depth (from dull to intense). The circular visual selector defines the hue value (0 to 360) and the saturation value (0 to 100); the vertical visual selector defines the lightness value (0 to 100).


HTML

Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) is the World Wide Web authoring standard. HTML is comprised of markup tags that define the structure and components of a publication.


I


Image resolution

Refers to the spacing of pixels in the image and is measured in pixels per inch (ppi) or dots per inch (dpi).


In-place editing

Lets you edit an OLE object without switching to a different window.


J


K


L


Local

The Local command creates local variables and arrays (they only pertain to the current macro). Variables declared in user-defined functions and procedures are local to those subroutines. When you create a variable by assigning it a value, the variable is automatically declared Local.


Loops

Loops statements play a statement or statement block a specified number of times until an expression is true or while an expression is true. The macro then exits the loop and continues to the next statement. Loop statements include For, ForNext, ForEach, Repeat, and While.


Link

A connection between a server application and your document when creating OLE objects. When you change the information in the server application, the linked information updates automatically in your document.


Linked object

Information from a source file which has been inserted into another file (the destination file) and maintains a link to the source file. Changes made to the information in the source file are automatically made to the information in the destination file.


M


Master

A slide show master consists of a set of layouts and backgrounds. A layout is a slide with predefined styles, settings, and placeholders for elements such as titles, subtitles, bulleted lists, text, data charts, and organization charts. Each layout has a page format and color scheme that is consistent with the other layouts and backgrounds that are part of the same slide show master. Backgrounds may include a border, a gradient background, and related images.


Mixed chart

A data chart that uses a combination of series types. For example, you can create a data chart with two series. One series can be represented by a bar chart and the second series with a line chart.


Mosaic

The mosaic effect transforms a bitmap image into squares of color. You can specify the size of the squares.


N


Node

Nodes are the square points at the end of lines and curve segments. You can alter the shape of a line or curve by dragging one or more of its nodes.


O


Object

In object-oriented programming, a data item with instructions for the operations to be performed on it.


Object oriented programming

Object oriented programming is a style of programming that places emphasis on creating and using objects.


OLE

Object linking and embedding (OLE) lets you combine information created in different Windows applications in one document. You can include text, charts, graphics, spreadsheets, sound clips, or video clips in your Corel Presentations slide shows and drawings.

You can link an object in order for information in your slide shows and drawings to be updated when changes are made to the source file. You can also embedded an object which inserts a copy of an object without linking it to the source file


OLE Object command

Commands for OLE objects are called methods, and they perform tasks on an OLE object in a specific OLE Automation server. A method is a command or function that performs an action on that object.


Open Document Management Application Program Interface (ODMA)

Open Document Management (ODMA) is a standard document management system maintained by the Association for Information and Image Management (AIIM). The ODMA integration in Corel Presentations allows advanced users to choose between the ODMA interface or the Corel Presentations interface for Open and Save dialog boxes.


Open editing

Open editing launches the OLE object's server application in another window where you can edit the OLE object.


P


Parameters

Parameters provide more information about the command, such as which options of a feature are active. They are always enclosed in parentheses, for example, Backup (State:On!).


Paste

To copy an item from the Clipboard to the active area.


Pentagon

A pentagon is a polygon which has five angles and five sides.


Persistent

The Persist command creates variables and arrays that pertain to any PerfectScript macro as long as PerfectScript is running.


Pixel

Pixel is an abbreviation of "picture element". Pixels are dots on a computer or television screen that combine to form an image. Computer images are created as an array of pixels, each having a specific color.


Plug-in

Plug-in is an auxiliary program that works with a major software package to enhance its capability. Plug-ins are added to Web browsers, such as Netscape, to enable them to support new types of content (audio, video, etc.).


Polyline

A polyline is a continuous line composed of one or more line segments.


Product commands

Product commands perform product tasks in a specific application. Product commands that report information (return a value) about the state of an application or feature are sometimes called system variables.


Programming commands

Programming commands work across applications. They generally control macro functions. They can specify conditions under which other macro commands or statements will operate (Case, If Else Endif, Switch EndSwitch). They can also repeat macro commands or statements a specified number of times or until certain conditions are met (For Endfor, Repeat Until, While EndWhile). They can also invoke or jump to a specified subroutine (statement block) with Call or Go.


Property

Properties control the appearance and behavior of an object.


Q


R


Rain

The rain effect produces the effect of rain by making colors run down the bitmap image. You can specify the amount of the effect you want to apply to a bitmap.


Range

Range is a rectangular region in a spreadsheet or datasheet defined by the cell in the upper-left corner and the cell in the lower-right corner, sometimes with a specific range name. When you specify a range to import into a chart, the cell coordinates for the upper-left cell and the lower-right cell should be separated by a colon. When defining a range, use the assigned row numbers and column letters. For example, A:C includes cells in columns A, B, and C.


RGB

A color mode that contains three components: red (R), green (G), and blue (B). The RGB color mode is based on the RGB color model. In the RGB color mode, a value between 0 and 255 is assigned to each channel of red, green, and blue. An RGB color with the component values 0:25:118, for example, contains no red, some green, and more blue, and results in a slightly greenish blue. Monitors, scanners, and the human eye use RGB to produce or detect color.


Recorded macros

A recorded macro includes only product commands. Some macro commands are not recordable and need to be typed in or inserted using the Macro Command Browser. When you play a recorded macro, each action is played in recorded order.


Regression types

Predicted values for one variable based on the pattern set by another variable.


Resolution

The amount of detail and information an image file contains, as well as the level of detail an input, output or display device is capable of producing. When you work with bitmaps, resolution affects both the quality of your final output and the file size.


Rotate

To turn an object around a rotation point.


Row

A set of horizontal cells in a datasheet designated by consecutive numbers.


S


Saturation

The saturation effect makes colors more or less vivid. You can specify high percentages to produce stronger colors, and low percentages to produce duller colors.


Segment

A segment is a line or curve between two nodes in a curve object.


Separators

Separators mark the parameters in a command. Semicolons separate individual parameters; parentheses enclose a series of parameters; and braces enclose a series of repeating parameters.


Server application

The server application is the application in which an OLE object is created.


Sharpen

The sharpen effect sharpens the edges between colors and objects in bitmap images. You can choose low, medium, or high sharpening.


Shortcut keys

A series of keys that perform a specific action. You can use shortcut keys to access the most commonly used features from the keyboard. For example, type CTRL+B to type bold text.

Some shortcut keys are shown on the pull-down menus next to various menu commands. You can modify existing shortcut keys or create new ones using the Keyboard Editor.


Skew

To slant an object. Skewing an object can make an object appear to be moving.


Slide Editor window

The window in which you create slides in a slide show or drawing. When Corel Presentations starts, a new Slide Editor window opens inside the application window. You can open as many as nine Slide Editor windows inside the application window.


Smooth

The smooth effect smoothes the edges between colors and objects in bitmap images. You can choose low, medium, or high smoothing.


Source file

The file that contains information being embedded or linked using Object Linking and Embedding (OLE).


SpeedKeys

Keystrokes that you assign to perform any of the following tasks in a slide show:

•	Advance items in a bulleted list one at a time.

•	Advance charts, images, or other animated objects.

•	Start and stop sound clips.

•	Stop the slide show.

•	Launch another application or a web browser.


SpeedLink

A SpeedLink is an object on a slide with an action or event attached to it.


Spike removal

The spike removal effect removes spikes and irregular spots on the edges of colors and objects in bitmap images. You can choose low, medium, or high spike removal.


Startup options

Startup switches are command that allow you to control what happens when you start Corel Presentations.


Stereogram

The stereogram effect converts a bitmap image into a black and white stereogram, which is a seemingly random pattern that reveals three-dimensional images.


Subroutine

A subroutine is a series of instructions that can be referenced and repeated when necessary.


T


Thumbnail sketch

A miniature version of a slide, chart, clipart image, or master. The Master Gallery, the Scrapbook, and the Slide Sorter use thumbnail sketches to let you view several masters, clipart images, or slides at once.


Tick

Tick marks are the short lines that separate the major divisions of the data chart axes. Ticks are grouped as either major or minor. Major tick marks usually have labels, while minor marks fall between the labels. For example, on a ruler the inch marks would be major tick marks and the fraction marks would be minor tick marks.


Trace contours

The trace contours effect traces the edges of an object and removes its color, leaving only contour lines of the object. You can choose low, medium, or high contouring.


U


Uniform Resource Locator (URL)

The unique address of a Web document. It indicates the Internet server on which the document is stored, as well as its directory and filename.


V


Variable

Variables allow you to write flexible programs and macros. You can use variables to represent data instead of entering data directly into a macro. When you execute a macro, the variables are replaced with real data, which allows the same macro to process different sets of data. A variable must have a name, known as the variable name, and a data type. A variable's data type indicates whether a variable is a character or text, an integer, or a floating-point number.


Vector image

Images are stored as algebraic equations that define the various lines and curves of pictures. They can also include bitmap information. They are created in illustration applications, such as CorelDRAW, or bitmap tracing applications, such as Corel OCR-TRACE. Vector formats are not restricted to certain color depths.

Vectors are also referred to as object-based graphics or line art.


W


Wind

The wind effect gives the effect of wind blowing colors across a bitmap image. You can specify the strength and direction of the wind effect.


World Wide Web (WWW)

The graphical component of the Internet. Text and images are displayed on Web sites using HTML coding and GIF and JPEG picture formats.


Web browser

A program used to view Web documents on the Internet and on intranets, as well as HTML documents.


X


X-axis

The x-axis shows divisions between groups of data. The x-axis is the base line on which the data is charted. It is drawn perpendicular to the y-axis at the point where the y-axis equals zero. The x-axis is the horizontal axis in vertical charts and the vertical axis in horizontal charts. The x-axis is numeric and has a scale associated with it rather than headers.


Y


Y-axis

The purpose of the y-axis is to measure the value of the data markers. The y-axis always has a numeric scale associated with it. The y-axis runs perpendicular to the x-axis, drawn at the point where the value of the x-axis is the smallest. The y-axis is the vertical axis in horizontal charts and the horizontal axis in vertical charts.


Z


Zooming

To enlarge or reduce the viewing size of an object on screen. Zooming can be used to increase the size of an object to let you edit the object with precision.


The Zoom options button lets you select a zoom option from the list.


The Selection tool lets you select, move, and resize objects using the mouse.


The Skip button lets you skip or include the selected slide.


The Decrease button decreases the size of each slide while they are viewed in the Slide Sorter.


The Increase button increases the size of each slide while they are viewed in the Slide Sorter.


The Line color button lets you select a color to apply to a line.


The Background button lets you select a background color for a selected object.


The Foreground button lets you select a background color for a selected object.


 The Context Help button lets you click an application object with a cursor, a context-sensitive Help topic about that object is displayed in a pop-up window.


 The Arrow buttons let you select a different data series.


 The Fill pattern button lets you select a fill pattern, gradient, texture, or picture for a selected object.


 The 3-D chart button lets you toggle between a 2-D and a 3-D display of a chart.


 The Action shapes button lets you create an action shape in a slide show or drawing.


 The Air brush density picker lets you choose a density for the air brush tool.


 The Apply attributes button lets you apply the copied attribute to a selected object.


 The Arrow shapes button lets you create an arrow shape in a slide show or drawing.


 The Basic shapes button lets you create a basic shape in a slide show or drawing.


 The Box fields button lets you add or remove fields from an organization chart box.


 The Orientation button lets you choose an orientation for the boxes in an organization chart.


 The Branch structure button lets you  choose a structure type for the branches in an organization chart.


 The Bitmap brush shape picker lets you choose a brush shape for the brush tool.


 The Bitmap brush size picker lets you choose a brush size for the brush tool.


 The Callout shapes button lets you create a callout shape in a slide show or drawing.


 The Connector style button lets you choose a line connector style for an organization chart.


 The Data chart gallery button lets you choose a data chart type to apply to a slide show or drawing.


 The Data chart style picker lets you choose a style to apply to a data chart.


 The Format button lets you choose a format for numbers and dates in a datasheet.


 The Formulas button lets you calculate a formula on a datasheet row or column.


 The Grids button lets you change the properties of a grid, such as the line attributes, in a data chart.


 The Labels button lets you display or hide all labels in a data chart.


 The Perspective button lets you change the angle at which you view a data chart.


 The Recalculate button lets you recalculate new data with the current formula in a datasheet.


 The Series button lets you change the series properties, such as the series type, in a data chart.


 The Sort button lets you sort the data in a datasheet in ascending or descending order.


 The Direction button lets you choose a direction for a slide transition.


 The Exclude row/column button lets you exclude rows or columns from a datasheet.


 The Flowchart shapes button lets you create a flowchart shape in a slide show or drawing.


 The Font decrease button lets you reduce the size of font in a slide show or drawing.


 The Font increase button lets you increase the size of font in a slide show or drawing.


 The Get attributes button lets you copy attributes from a selected object to apply to another object.


 The Horizontal chart button lets you toggle between a horizontal and vertical display of a data chart.


 The Import button lets you retrieve data or text and add it to a datasheet.


The Include row/column button lets you include excluded rows or columns in a datasheet.


 The Layout button lets you change the layout properties of a data chart, including the chart type and the appearance.


 The Legend button lets you add and format a legend in a data chart.


 The Line color picker lets you choose a color for a line in a slide show or drawing.


 The Line shapes button lets you create a line shape in a slide show or drawing.


 The Line style picker lets you choose a style for a line in a slide show or drawing.


 The Line width picker lets you choose a width for a line in a slide show or drawing.


 The Master Gallery button lets you choose a master to apply to a slide show.


 The Border style button lets you choose a style for the border around organization chart boxes.


 The Box properties button lets you format organization chart boxes, including the fill style and the box size.


 The Box spacing button lets you set the spacing between organization chart boxes.


 The Box style button lets you choose the style you want to apply to an organization chart box.


 The Expand/collapse button lets you collapse or expand the subordinate positions of a selected organization chart branch.


 The Maximize spacing button lets you maximize the amount of space used in an organization chart.


 The Play slide show button lets you play the current slide show and set the play setting options.


 The Range highlighter button lets you view highlighted ranges in a datasheet.


 The Reverse colors button lets you reverse the foreground and background colors of an object in a slide show or drawing.


 The Select layout button lets you choose the layout type that you want to apply to a slide.


 The Show table button lets you display datasheet information in a table within a data chart.


 The Skip slide button lets you customize a slide show for different audiences by skipping slides.


 The SpeedKeys button lets you assign tasks to keystrokes, such as displaying slides, starting and stopping sound clips, and quitting a slide show.


 The Star shapes button lets you create a star shape in a slide show or drawing.


 The Subordinates button lets you add subordinate positions to an organization chart.


 The Text box button lets you insert a text box in a slide show or drawing.


 The View datasheet button lets you display or hide a datasheet.


 The X-axis button lets you change the properties of the x-axis, such as the label font and tick display options, in a data chart.


 The Y-axis button lets you change the properties of the y-axis, such as the label font and tick display options, in a data chart.


 The Zoom branch button lets you zoom in and out of a selected organization chart branch.


 The Space picker lets you choose how you want to space selected objects evenly.


 The Align picker lets you choose how you want to align an object in correspondence to the drawing window or a selected area.


 The Flip picker lets you choose how you want to flip an object on an axis.


 The Order picker lets you arrange objects in an order you choose from the list.


 The Rotation options picker lets you choose an angle at which to rotate an object.


 The Shadow options picker lets you choose a shadow to apply to an object.


 The Justification picker lets you choose an alignment for text.


 The Subtitle properties button lets you format a subtitle in a slide show.


 The Bulleted list properties button lets you format a bulleted list in a slide show or drawing.


 The Image fill picker lets you choose an effect to apply to an object, such as Watermark, Outline, and Transparent.


 The Brightness picker lets you choose how bright you want to adjust an object.


 The Contrast picker lets you choose how you want to contrast the colors in an object.


 The Black and white picker lets you change an object to black and white.


 The Movie properties button lets you adjust a movie in a slide show, including setting it to play automatically and changing the movie file.


 The Print button lets you format a slide show or drawing for printing.


 The Undelete button lets you undo deleting in Slide Outliner.


 The Play movie button lets you play a movie file within a slide show.


 The Bold button lets you apply bolding to text.


 The Underline button lets you apply an underline to text.


 The Italic button lets you italicize text.


 The Font button lets you change the font properties, such as the size and appearance.


 The Mini preview button lets you preview the print options you choose.


 The Previous level button lets you move a slide outline up a level.


 The Next level button lets you move a slide outline down a level.


 The Edit button lets you edit an OLE object in a slide show.


 The Add new form button lets you create a page size definition.


 The Edit form button lets you edit a page size definition.


 The Delete form button lets you delete a page definition.


Using Accessibility features

Corel is committed to supporting the special needs community. We are a proud supporter of accessible software that promotes quality of life, employability, and independence for disabled persons. We are striving to enhance our products so that they allow persons with disabilities to work more easily and efficiently with our software.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	accessing Corel Presentations documentation in ASCII text format

•	customizing keyboard, toolbar, and menu features

•	modifying display and navigational features

•	adding and optimizing text

•	working with graphics

•	controlling multimedia effects on slides

•	printing and publishing slide shows

We welcome your feedback and suggestions. If you have any comments or questions about Corel products and accessibility, please send email to:

accessibilityproductmgr@corel.com


Accessing Corel Presentations documentation in ASCII text format

The documentation for WordPerfect Office is available in ASCII text format.

 How to


To access Corel Presentations documentation in ASCII text format

1	Insert the WordPerfect Office 11 CD into the CD drive.

2	On the Windows taskbar, click Start [image] Settings [image] Control panel.

3	Double-click the Add/Remove programs icon.

4	Choose WordPerfect Office 11 from the Currently installed programs list.

5	Click Change/Remove.

6	In the installation wizard, enable the Modify option.

7	Click Next.

8	Double-click WordPerfect Office 11 [image] Utilties [image] Accessible Help files.

9	Select the files and follow the instructions in the installation wizard.

The files are installed in the following location: Program files\Corel\WordPerfect Office 11\Shared\Help.

 Related topics


Customizing keyboard, toolbar, and menu features

You can customize Corel Presentations to optimize all accessible features using keyboard shortcut commands.

You can assign SpeedKeys to control the display of slides and perform tasks such as starting and stopping sound clips, launching a program, or launching an external URL on the Internet. You can use SpeedKeys to bypass certain slides by creating jumps in a slide show that take you to another slide not immediately in sequence.

Keyboard shortcuts

File menu command keyboard shortcuts

Edit menu command keyboard shortcuts

View menu command keyboard shortcuts

Insert menu command keyboard shortcuts

Format menu command keyboard shortcuts

Tools menu command keyboard shortcuts

Help menu command keyboard shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts for objects

Keyboard shortcuts for slide show controls

Keyboard shortcuts for chart controls

Keyboard shortcuts for dialog boxes

Keyboard shortcuts for selecting, moving, and deleting

Other keyboard shortcuts

Customizing keyboard shortcuts

Using speedkeys

Assigning and deleting SpeedKeys

Customizing toolbars

Customizing toolbars

Customizing tool palettes

Customizing menus

Customizing the menu bar

Customizing the property bar


Modifying display and navigational features

You can optimize Corel Presentations to magnify and customize the appearance and color of your slide show. You can circle, underline, mark objects, and emphasize points on a slide using the slide highlighter.

Corel Presentations provides Microsoft IntelliMouse users with enhanced zooming and scrolling features.

Customizing slide show presentations

Opening slide shows

Working with the Master Gallery

Saving slide shows

Viewing slide shows

Playing slide shows

Using the slide highlighter

Microsoft IntelliMouse support

Zooming by using Microsoft IntelliMouse

Scrolling by using Microsoft IntelliMouse


Adding and optimizing text

You can optimize Corel Presentations to automatically correct text using the QuickCorrect feature. QuickCorrect will fix errors such as spacing in text and common spelling errors.

Corel Presentations lets you adjust the font size and hyperlink color of Help topics.

Audience notes and speaker notes can be added to slide shows to provide extra details for both the presenter and the audience members.

Correcting text

Correcting text

Working with text

Setting text attributes

Formatting text in text objects

Applying special effects to text

Using audience notes and speaker notes

Printing slide shows and drawings


Working with graphics

You can enhance Corel Presentations slide shows with objects such as drawn shapes, bitmaps, or clipart. You can manipulate most objects directly, or through the properties dialog box for the object. You can create and work with data charts and organization charts in Corel Presentations.

Working with objects

Drawing and editing shapes

Working with bitmaps

Adjusting the intensity of objects

Working with data charts

Changing data chart properties

Working with datasheets

Working with organization charts


Controlling multimedia effects on slides

You can enhance Corel Presentations slide shows with multimedia effects such as animation, sounds, and movies. You can optimize multimedia effects with slide transitions, which control how each slide is introduced, and create a smooth visual progression for the audience. The default transition displays slides and objects at the same time, but you can choose to display them separately.

Working with sounds in slide shows

Working with movies in slide shows

Animating objects

Animating bulleted lists

Applying a slide transition


Printing and publishing slide shows

You can print slide shows and drawings in reduced and enlarged sizes, and grayscale or black and white, by specifying print settings. If you want to use the print settings again, you can save them with a name.

Corel Presentations lets you create or publish accessible HTML documents for the Internet. You can also publish to PDF.

Printing slide shows and drawings

Printing two-sided documents

Customizing printing

Configuring printer settings

Publishing slides as HTML documents

Publishing to Portable Document Format (PDF)Publishing to Portable Document Format PDF>Main


Working with bulleted lists in Corel Presentations

You can create bulleted lists in Corel Presentations to effectively communicate sequential ideas within drawings and slide shows.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating bulleted lists

•	modifying bulleted list text attributes

•	formatting bulleted lists

•	applying fills to bulleted lists

•	adding boxes to bulleted lists

•	changing line spacing in bulleted lists

•	saving and applying bulleted list styles

•	animating bulleted lists


Creating bulleted lists

You can create bulleted lists in slide shows and drawings. Keep the following points in mind when you create any type of bulleted list:

•	Express a single idea on each line.

•	Avoid using more than six items in a list.

•	Use nouns and action verbs to start sentences.

Levels can be created within these bulleted lists. As well, you can move a bulleted list item up a level.

 How to


To create a bulleted list

1	Click Insert [image] Bulleted list.

2	Click in the slide show or drawing window.

3	Type text on the bulleted line.

4	Press Enter.

If you want to create a new level within the list, press Tab.

5	Click outside the bulleted list to return to the slide show or drawing window.

 Related topics


To create a new level for an existing bulleted list item

1	Double-click a bulleted list.

2	Click at the beginning of a list item.

3	Press Tab.

 Related topics


To move an existing bulleted list item up one level

1	Double-click a bulleted list.

2	Click at the beginning of a list item.

3	Press Shift + Tab.

 Related topics


Modifying bulleted list text attributes

You can customize the appearance of text and bullets within a bulleted list, including the font size, color, and attributes of text, and the fill and outline of font.

 How to


To change the appearance of text in a bulleted list level

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Fonts tab.

4	Choose a list level from the list.

5	Choose a font from the Font face list box.

6	Type a value in the Size box.

7	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Bold

•	Underline

•	Italic

8	In the Color area, open the Foreground picker, and click a color.

9	Open the Background picker, and click a color.

 Note

•	The background color is visible only if a font fill style other than the default is selected. For information about changing the font fill, see "To change the font fill in a bulleted list level."

 Tip

•	You can also modify bulleted lists by clicking the Bulleted list properties button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To change the font fill in a bulleted list level

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Fonts tab.

4	Choose a list level from the list.

5	In the Appearance area, click Font properties.

6	In the Font properties dialog box, click the Fill tab.

7	In the Fill style area, click one of the following:

•	Pattern

•	Gradient

8	Open any of the following pickers, and click a color:

•	Foreground

•	Background

9	Click a fill style on the palette.

 Tip

•	You can also modify bulleted lists by clicking the Bulleted list properties button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To change the font outline in a bulleted list level

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Fonts tab.

4	Choose a list level from the list.

5	In the Appearance area, click Font properties.

6	In the Font properties dialog box, click the Outline tab.

7	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

8	Open the Style picker, and click a line style.

9	Open the Width picker, and click a line width.

 Tip

•	You can also modify bulleted lists by clicking the Bulleted list properties button on the property bar.

 Related topics


Formatting bulleted lists

You can change the justification of a bulleted list level.

You can also change the shape of a bullet, or use a different symbol for a bullet.

You can choose to change the bullet type for all list levels and resize a bullet.

 How to


To change the justification of a bulleted list level

1	Double-click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Bullets tab.

4	Choose a list level from the list.

5	Choose a position from the Justification list box.

 Related topics


To change the shape of a bullet

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Bullets tab.

4	Choose a list level from the list.

5	Choose a bullet shape from the Bullet shape list box.

 Related topics


To apply a different symbol to a bullet

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Bullets tab.

4	Choose a list level from the list.

5	Choose Other from the Bullet shape list box.

6	In the Symbols dialog box, click Set, and click a symbol set.

7	Click a symbol on the Symbols palette.

8	Click Insert and close.

 Related topics


To change the bullet type for all list levels

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Bullets tab.

4	Choose a bullet type from the Bullet set (all levels) list box.

 Related topics


To resize a bullet

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Bullets tab.

4	Choose a list level from the list.

5	Type a value in the Relative size box.

 Note

•	Relative bullet size is calculated in relation to the current bullet size.

 Related topics


Applying fills to bulleted lists

A variety of preset bullet styles are available in Corel Presentations, however, you can customize bulleted lists by applying a gradient fill to bullets. You can also change the settings of a pattern or gradient fill.

 How to


To apply a pattern or gradient fill to a bullet

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Bullets tab.

4	Choose a list level from the list.

5	Click Bullet properties.

6	In the Bullet properties dialog box, click one of the following:

•	Pattern

•	Gradient

7	Open the Foreground picker, and click a color.

8	Open the Background picker, and click a color.

9	Click a pattern or gradient on the palette.

 Related topics


To change the gradient fill settings of a bullet

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Bullets tab.

4	Choose a list level from the list, and click Bullet properties.

5	In the Bullet properties dialog box, click Gradient.

6	Click Gradient settings.

7	In the Gradient settings dialog box, choose a gradient from the Gradient type list box.

If applicable, type a value in the Angle box.

8	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal offset [image] lets you specify how much you want to move the gradient color horizontally

•	Vertical offset [image] lets you specify how much you want to move the gradient color vertically

9	Enable one of the following options:

•	Auto-stop blending [image] blends the gradient fill automatically

•	Fixed [image] blends the gradient fill by using a fixed number of steps that you specify in the Steps box

 Related topics


Adding boxes to bulleted lists

You can add a box around a bulleted list and fill the box with a pattern or gradient. The settings of patterns and gradients can be changed. A texture or picture can also be added to a box that you add around a bulleted list. Pattern fills fill the box with a pattern. Gradient fills fill the box with the graduation between two colors. Texture fills fill a box with a texture pattern. For example, you can fill a box with wood or oil textures. Picture fills fill a box with a single picture. Although there are many predefined fills to choose from, you can also add a custom texture or picture fill. As well, you can change the settings of a picture that you add to a box.

 How to


To add a box to a bulleted list

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Box tab.

4	In the Position area, enable one of the following options:

•	Above

•	Below

•	Above and below

•	Behind

5	In the Corner style area, enable one of the following options:

•	Rectangle

•	Rounded rectangle

•	Octagon

6	In the Frame style area, choose a frame from the Type list box.

7	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

 Related topics


To apply a pattern or gradient fill to a bulleted list box

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Box tab.

4	In the Fill style and color area, click Properties.

5	In the Object properties dialog box, click one of the following:

•	Pattern

•	Gradient

6	Open the Foreground picker, and click a color.

7	Open the Background picker, and click a color.

8	Click a pattern or gradient on the palette.

 Related topics


To change the pattern fill settings of a bulleted list box

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Box tab.

4	In the Fill style and color area, click Properties.

5	In the Object properties dialog box, click Pattern.

6	Click Pattern settings.

7	In the Transparent color area, enable one of the following options:

•	None

•	Foreground color

•	Background color

 Related topics


To change the gradient fill settings of a bulleted list box

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Box tab.

4	In the Fill style and color area, click Properties.

5	In the Object properties dialog box, click Gradient.

6	Click Gradient settings.

7	In the Gradient settings dialog box, choose a gradient from the Gradient type list box.

If applicable, type a value in the Angle box.

8	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal offset [image] lets you specify how much you want to move the gradient color horizontally

•	Vertical offset [image] lets you specify how much you want to move the gradient color vertically

9	Enable one of the following options:

•	Auto-stop blending [image] blends the gradient fill automatically

•	Fixed [image] blends the gradient fill by using the fixed number of steps you specify in the Steps box

 Related topics


To apply a texture or picture fill to a bulleted list box

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Box tab.

4	In the Fill style and color area, click Properties.

5	In the Object properties dialog box, click one of the following:

•	Texture

•	Picture

6	Choose a texture or picture from the Category list box.

7	Click a texture or picture on the palette.

 Related topics


To apply a custom texture or picture fill to a bulleted list box

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Box tab.

4	In the Fill style and color area, click Properties.

5	In the Object properties dialog box, click one of the following:

•	Texture

•	Picture

6	Click Browse.

7	Choose the drive and folder where the custom fill file is stored.

8	Type a filename in the Filename box.

9	Click Open.

 Related topics


To change the picture fill settings of a bulleted list box

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Box tab.

4	In the Fill style and color area, click Properties.

5	In the Object properties dialog box, click Picture.

6	Click Picture settings.

7	In the Picture settings dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Tile [image] fills the picture with tiles

•	Brick horizontal [image] fills the picture with horizontal rows

•	Brick vertical [image] fills the picture with vertical columns

•	Stretch/ shrink to fit area [image] stretches or shrinks the picture to fit the box

•	Scale to fit area [image] scales the picture to fit the box

 Related topics


Changing line spacing in bulleted lists

You can change the amount of line spacing in a bulleted list. Spacing can be adjusted between the text on the same level, between each main bullet level, and between subordinate bullet levels.

You can also restore the default line spacing.

 How to


To change the line spacing in a bulleted list

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Spacing tab.

4	Type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Line spacing [image] determines the amount of space between text on the same level

•	Main spacing [image] determines the amount of space between each main bullet level

•	Subordinate [image] determines the amount of space between subordinate bullet levels

 Related topics


To restore the default line spacing

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Spacing tab.

4	Click Restore standard spacing.

 Related topics


Saving and applying bulleted list styles

Corel Presentations lets you choose various attributes for bulleted lists and save them for future use. For example, you can choose the color and size of fonts or the properties of a bulleted list and save them to use in new presentations. You can also apply saved bulleted list styles to other bulleted lists.

 How to


To save a bulleted list style

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Modify any attributes.

4	Click Save style.

5	In the Save chart style dialog box, choose the drive and folder where you want to save the style.

6	Type a filename in the Filename box.

7	Click Save.

 Note

•	The file format extension of a bulleted list style file is .chs (chart styles).

 Related topics


To apply a bulleted list style

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click Load style.

4	In the Retrieve chart style dialog box, choose the drive and folder where the style is stored.

5	Type a filename in the Filename box.

6	Click Open.

 Related topics


Animating bulleted lists

You can use animation as a special effect to capture your audience's attention and reinforce the points in your presentations. For example, you can animate list items so that they move across the screen or animate them in place.

Bulleted lists inserted on an unformatted slide and bulleted lists on a bulleted list slide have different properties. If you create a bulleted list on an unformatted slide, the list is treated as an object; therefore, you can animate the entire list but not individual list items. For information about animating objects, see "Animating objects."

In Corel Presentations, you can animate each individual list item when you work with a list on a bulleted list slide. When animating list items, you can choose from a wide variety of options, such as animation type, effect, direction, and speed. For example, you can make list items bounce across the screen, fly in, curve in, or display one at a time. You can also show only Flash-enabled transitions if you are publishing a slide show using Flash. For more information about Flash, see "Publishing slides as HTML documents." As well, you can add sound to a bulleted animation.

 How to


To animate a bulleted list on a bulleted list slide

1	Click Insert [image] New slide.

2	Click the Bulleted list layout on the Layout palette, and click OK.

3	Create the bulleted list, and click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

4	Click the Bullet animation tab.

5	In the Animation type area, enable one of the following options:

•	Animate object in place

•	Animate object across screen

If you are publishing the slide show using Flash, enable the Show only Flash enabled transitions check box.

6	Choose an animation effect from the Effects list.

7	Choose an animation direction from the Direction list.

8	In the Speed area, enable one of the following options:

•	Fast

•	Medium

•	Slow

9	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Display one at a time [image] displays main level list items and subordinate level list items one at a time during a slide show

•	Highlight current bullet [image] selects one list item at a time, and greys all other list items on the slide

•	Display in reverse order [image] begins the cascade effect with the last item in the list, and progresses to the first list item

 Related topics


To apply sound to a bulleted animation

1	Click a bulleted list.

2	Click Format [image] Bulleted list properties.

3	Click the Bullet animation tab.

4	In the Sound area, click Browse.

5	In the Open file dialog box, choose the drive and folder where the sound file is stored.

6	Type a filename in the Filename box.

7	Click Open.

8	On the Bullet animation page, move the slider to adjust the volume of the sound file.

 Related topics


Creating slide shows and drawings

Corel Presentations includes comprehensive slide show tools that allow you to create professional-looking slide shows and drawings.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	using slide show views

•	opening slide shows

•	saving slide shows

•	viewing slide shows

•	undoing and redoing actions

•	working with the Slide Outliner

•	adding and removing slides

•	adding speaker notes

•	working with the Slide Sorter

•	assigning and deleting SpeedKeys

•	creating portable slide shows

•	creating and saving drawings

•	setting page size definitions and orientation

•	editing and deleting page size definitions

•	setting the page fill for slide shows and drawings

•	inserting files in slide shows and drawings

•	inserting comments in slides and drawings

•	adding document summary information to slide shows and drawings

•	manipulating Corel Presentations


Using slide show views

You can create, edit, and sort a slide show in three views.

You can use the Slide Editor to add, view, and edit the text, objects, and charts of individual slides. The Slide Editor is also used to specify slide properties for the slides in a slide show.

You can use the Slide Outliner to create an outline for a slide show. You can specify a layout, and then type the text for each slide. For more information about the Slide Outliner, see "Working with the Slide Outliner."

The Slide Sorter displays thumbnail sketches of each slide in a slide show. You can select slide properties and display detailed information about the settings used for each slide in the current slide show. For more information about sorting slides, see "Working with the Slide Sorter."

You can switch between each of these slide show views.

 How to


To switch between slide show views

•	Click View, and click one of the following:

•	Slide Editor

•	Slide Outliner

•	Slide Sorter

 Tip

•	You can also change the slide show view by clicking the Slide Editor, Slide Outliner, or Slide Sorter tab on the right side of the slide show window.

 Related topics


Opening slide shows

A slide show project is a predefined slide show that includes a prepared layout and outline. All you need to do is type in data. You can design your own slide show or start a slide show from a predefined slide show project.

You can also open an existing slide show.

 How to


To open a new blank slide show

1	Click File [image] New.

2	Choose a slide show from the Category list box.

3	Click a slide show master on the palette.

 Related topics


To open a new slide show from a predefined project

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	Choose Corel Presentations 11 from the list box.

4	Choose Corel Presentations slide show from the list.

5	Click Create.

6	In the Startup master gallery dialog box, choose a slide show from the Category list box.

7	Click a slide show master on the palette.

 Related topics


To open an existing slide show

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the slide show is saved.

3	Choose a filename.

4	Click Open.

 Note

•	If there are fonts in the file that are missing on your system, the Font matching results dialog will appear. This dialog box shows the missing fonts and the fonts with which Corel Presentations will substitute them. You can click OK to proceed with the font substitution, or you can cancel opening the document so that you can install the missing fonts on your system.

 Related topics


Saving slide shows

You can save new slide shows.

You can save your work to a new folder on your computer or with a new name. You can also save slides as graphics, which allows you to use individual slides as graphics in other slide shows, documents, and applications. You can save slides as WordPerfect graphics, or you can save them using another graphic file format. For more information about the types of graphic file formats you can save, see "Export graphic file formats."

 How to


To save a slide show for the first time

1	Click File [image] Save.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box.

4	Click Save.

 Related topics


To save a slide show to a new location or with a new name

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box.

4	Click Save.

 Related topics


To save a slide show using a different file format

1	Click File [image] Save.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

3	Choose a file type from the File type list box.

4	Type a filename in the Filename box.

5	Click Save.

 Related topics


To save a slide as a WordPerfect graphic

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

3	Choose one of the following file formats from the File type list box:

•	WordPerfect 5.1 graphics

•	WordPerfect 6.0 graphics

•	WordPerfect 7/8/9/10/11 graphics

4	Type a filename in the Filename box.

5	Click Save.

 Related topics


To save a slide to another graphic format

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

3	Choose a graphic format from the File type list box.

4	Type a filename in the Filename box.

5	Click Save.

6	In the Export dialog box, choose a predefined size for the image from the Predefined sizes list box.

If you want to specify the size of the image, type values for the width and height of the image in the Width and Height boxes.

7	Choose a resolution from the Resolution list.

8	Enable a color option.

 Note

•	If you save a slide in a graphic file format other than WordPerfect, such as a Windows Bitmap or a .Jpg file, the slide becomes a graphic image, and you can no longer edit the slide as it was created.

 Related topics


Viewing slide shows

As you create, edit, and arrange slides, it is often helpful to get a closer look or to see all of the slides at once. By changing the zoom level, you can increase or decrease the on-screen size of a slide without affecting its actual size. In addition, you can zoom to a specific area of a slide show, and you can return to the previous view. You can also switch between slides in a slide show. As well, you can view multiple slide shows at the same time; for example, you can cascade the slide show windows on top of one another, and click the one you want to display full size, or you can tile the slide show windows so that all of the slide shows are visible.

 How to


To change the zoom level

To	Do the following
Select a preset zoom level	Click View [image] Zoom. Enable a magnification level option.
Select a custom zoom level	Click View [image] Zoom. Type a zoom level in the Other box.
Zoom to the margin size, the screen size, or selected objects	Click View [image] Zoom. Enable the Margin size, Screen size, or Selected objects option.
 Tip

•	You can also zoom to the margin size, the screen size, or selected objects by clicking the Zoom options button on the toolbar and clicking Margin size, Screen size, or Selected objects.

 Related topics


To zoom to a specific area

1	Click Zoom options on the toolbar.

2	Click Zoom to area.

3	Drag the magnifying glass pointer to define the area to enlarge.

 Related topics


To return to the previous view

1	Click Zoom options on the toolbar.

2	Click Previous view.

 Related topics


To switch between slides in a slide show

1	Click Edit [image] Go to list.

2	Choose a slide from the list box at the bottom of the slide show window.

 Related topics


To view multiple slide shows simultaneously

•	Click Window, and click one of the following:

•	Cascade

•	Tile side by side

•	Tile top to bottom

 Related topics


To zoom in on slides in the Slide Sorter

1	Click View [image] Slide Sorter.

2	Click View [image] Zoom in.

 Tip

•	You can also zoom out from slides in the Slide Sorter by clicking View [image] Zoom out.

 Related topics


Undoing and redoing actions

You can undo the last 10 actions you performed in the current slide show. Corel Presentations removes the changes in the order in which they occurred. You can also redo an action you have undone. Corel Presentations remembers the same 10 actions that were undone but moves forward through the order instead of backward. When working in the Bitmap Editor, you can only undo or redo the last action you performed.

 How to


To undo an action

•	Click Edit [image] Undo.

 Related topics


To redo an action

•	Click Edit [image] Redo.

 Related topics


Working with the Slide Outliner

You create an outline for a slide show in the Slide Outliner. An outline is a numbered list that includes all the text found in every slide in a slide show. You can create an outline by choosing a slide layout and typing the text for each slide. You can type the text for slide titles, subtitles, text slides, bulleted list slides, and combination slides.

The following image shows how the Slide Outliner can be used to view and create a slide.

Importing a WordPerfect outline into a Corel Presentations slide show converts each first level paragraph number to a slide title and any second or third level paragraph numbers to text in each slide.

 How to


To create a slide show outline

1	Click View [image] Slide Outliner.

2	Type a title in the slide show, and press Enter.

3	Type a subtitle in the slide show, and press Enter.

4	Type any text in the slide show.

5	Click Insert [image] New slide.

6	In the New slide dialog box, click a slide layout on the Layout palette.

 Tips

•	If you delete text, you can restore it by clicking the Undelete button on the property bar.

•	You can move an outline down or up one level by clicking the Previous level button or the Next level button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To import a WordPerfect outline

1	Click View [image] Slide Outliner.

2	Click in the slide.

3	Click Insert [image] File.

4	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

5	Choose a filename.

6	Click Insert.

 Related topics


Adding and removing slides

You can build a slide show by adding one slide or several slides at a time. You can also delete any slides you have added.

You can clear a slide. By clearing a slide or all slides in a slide show, you remove all objects within it.

 How to


To add a slide

1	Click Insert [image] New slide.

2	Click a slide layout on the Layout palette.

3	Type a value in the Number to add box.

 Related topics


To delete a slide

1	Click a slide tab at the bottom of the slide show window.

2	Click Edit [image] Delete slide(s).

 Related topics


To clear a slide

1	Click Edit [image] Clear.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Slide

•	Entire slide show

3	Click Clear.

 Related topics


Adding speaker notes

You can use speaker notes as cue cards for slide show presentations. You can type your own notes, or you can insert the text which appears on the slides.

 How to


To create speaker notes

1	Click Format [image] Slide properties [image] Speaker notes.

2	Type text in the box.

 Related topics


To insert text from a slide

1	Click Format [image] Slide properties [image] Speaker notes.

2	Click Insert text from slide.

 Related topics


Working with the Slide Sorter

The Slide Sorter displays thumbnail sketches of each slide in a slide show. You can sort the slides in a slide show by dragging them. Once you drag a slide to a new position, the Slide Sorter reorders and renumbers each slide.

The following image shows how the Slide Sorter lets you rearrange the order of slides in a slide show.

You can also skip a slide in a slide show. For example, you may need to present a long version and a short version of the same slide show, which may require skipping some slides to create a shorter version of the slide show.

A slide show consists of a series of slides presented in succession using slide transitions. Slide transitions control how each slide is introduced, creating a smooth visual progression for the audience. The default transition displays slides and the objects on the slide at the same time, but you can choose to display them separately. You can use the Slide Sorter to apply a different transition effect to each slide, a range of slides, or apply the same transition effect to the entire slide show.

You can also turn off the transitions that you apply to slides.

 How to


To sort slides

1	Click View [image] Slide Sorter.

2	Drag a slide to a new position.

You can also
Sort a range of slides	Hold down Shift, click the first and last slide in the range of slides, and drag them to a new position.
Sort a range of nonconsecutive slides	Hold down Ctrl, click each slide, and drag them to a new position.
 Related topics


To skip a slide

1	Click Tools [image] Custom audiences.

2	Click New.

3	Type a name in the Names box.

4	Click OK.

5	Click View [image] Slide Sorter.

6	Click a slide.

7	Click the Skip button on the toolbar.

The skipped slide is greyed.

 Tips

•	You can also skip a slide by clicking the Skip button on the property bar.

•	You can also customize a slide show by choosing Custom audiences from the Custom audiences list box on the property bar.

 Related topics


To apply a slide transition

1	Click View [image] Slide Sorter.

2	Click a slide.

3	Click Format [image] Slide properties [image] Transition.

4	Choose a transition effect from the Effects list.

5	Choose a transition direction from the Direction list.

6	In the Speed area, enable one of the following options:

•	Fast

•	Medium

•	Slow

If you want to apply the slide transition to an entire slide show, enable the Apply to all slides in slide show check box.

You can also
Show only transitions with Flash™ format	Enable the Show only Flash-enabled transitions check box.
Apply sound to the slide transition	Type a file path and filename in the Sound box, and move the slider to adjust the volume of the sound.
 Tips

•	You can also apply a slide transition by choosing one from the Slide transition list box on the property bar.

•	You can also choose a transition direction by opening the Direction picker on the property bar and clicking a direction.

 Related topics


To turn off a slide transition

1	Click a slide.

2	Click Format [image] Slide properties [image] Transition.

3	Click the Transitions tab.

4	Choose Immediate from the Effects list.

 Related topics


Assigning and deleting SpeedKeys

You can assign SpeedKeys instead of using the default keys to control the display of slides and perform other tasks, such as starting and stopping sound clips, launching an Internet browser, launching a program, or quitting a slide show. You can also delete any SpeedKeys you create.

 How to


To assign a SpeedKey to display slides

1	Click Format [image] Slide properties [image] SpeedKeys.

2	Choose a keystroke from the Keystrokes list.

3	In the Key assignment for area, enable the Go to option, and choose a slide from the list box.

If you want to apply the SpeedKey action to all slides, enable the Apply to all slides in slide show check box.

 Note

•	SpeedKeys apply to all instances of the specified event in one or more slides.

 Tip

•	You can also assign a SpeedKey by clicking the SpeedKey button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To assign a SpeedKey to play or stop a sound

1	Click Format [image] Slide properties [image] SpeedKeys.

2	Choose a keystroke from the Keystrokes list.

3	In the Key assignment for area, enable the Action option, and choose one of the following from the list box:

•	Play sound

•	Stop sound

4	Click Sound.

5	In the Sound dialog box, type a filename in one of the following boxes:

•	WAVE [image] inserts a .wav file

•	MIDI [image] inserts a MIDI file

•	CD [image] inserts a CD file

If you want to apply the SpeedKey action to all slides, enable the Apply to all slides in slide show check box.

 Note

•	SpeedKeys apply to all instances of the specified event in one or more slides.

 Tip

•	You can also assign a SpeedKey by clicking the SpeedKey button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To assign a SpeedKey to browse the Internet or start an application

1	Click Format [image] Slide properties [image] SpeedKeys.

2	Choose a keystroke from the Keystrokes list.

3	In the Key assignment for area, enable the Action option, and choose one of the following from the list box:

•	Browse Internet [image] lets you browse the URL you type in the Location box

•	Launch program [image] launches the program whose path you type in the Program box

If you want to apply the SpeedKey action to all slides, enable the Apply to all slides in slide show check box.

 Tip

•	You can also assign a SpeedKey by clicking the SpeedKey button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To assign a SpeedKey to quit the slide show

1	Click Format [image] Slide properties [image] SpeedKeys.

2	Choose a keystroke from the Keystrokes list.

3	In the Key assignment for area, enable the Action option, and choose Quit show from the list box.

If you want to apply the SpeedKey action to all slides, enable the Apply to all slides in slide show check box.

 Tip

•	You can also assign a SpeedKey by clicking the SpeedKey button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To delete a SpeedKey

1	Click Format [image] Slide properties [image] SpeedKeys.

2	Choose a SpeedKey from the Keystrokes list.

3	In the Key assignment for area, enable the Unassigned option.

 Related topics


Creating portable slide shows

You can create a self-executing version of a slide show that can be played on any computer that uses the Windows operating system, even if it doesn't have Corel Presentations installed. The slide show files and the Corel Presentations application files necessary to run the slide show are copied to the disk on which you create the portable slide show.

 How to


To create a portable slide show

1	Click File [image] Show On The Go.

2	Click Create.

 Related topics


Creating and saving drawings

Corel Presentations drawings can contain data charts, bitmaps, clipart, and drawn objects. You can create drawings, and you can also create posters and banners. Drawings, unlike Corel Presentations slide shows, cannot contain transitions, animations, sound files, or movie files.

You can save Corel Presentations drawings in various file formats such as WordPerfect graphic, Windows bitmap, JPEG, and GIF. This allows you to use the drawings you create in other applications, such as WordPerfect documents, or in Web pages.

You can also save a drawing to a new location or with a new name.

 How to


To create a drawing

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	Choose Corel Presentations from the list box.

4	Choose Corel Presentations drawing from the list.

5	Click Create.

 Related topics


To create a poster or a banner

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	Choose Corel Presentations from the list box.

4	Choose Corel Presentations drawing from the list.

5	Click Create.

6	Click File [image] Page setup.

7	Click the Poster tab.

8	Click Poster size.

9	Drag to select the poster size.

Each square in the poster size table represents one page.

 Tip

•	You can also create posters from slides by saving them as drawings (.Wpg files).

 Related topics


To save a drawing for the first time

1	Click File [image] Save.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box.

4	Choose a graphic file format from the File type list box.

5	Click Save.

 Related topics


To save a drawing to a new location or with a new name

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type the filename in the Filename box.

4	Click Save.

 Related topics


Setting page size definitions and orientation

A page size definition determines how a printer formats and prints pages. For example, you can create page size definitions for envelopes and nonstandard-sized pages. You can choose from preset page size definitions, or you can create your own.

Page size definitions are matched to the printer you have selected. A definition may not be available when you change to another printer or a different computer. If the same definition is not available, Corel Presentations finds the best match for a page definition, selecting from those available with the other printer. If the match does not work, you may need to edit or re-create the definition.

 How to


To select a preset page size definition

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Page setup tab.

3	Choose a page definition from the Page definition list box.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	Portrait [image] prints text and graphics on a page whose height is greater than its width

•	Landscape [image] prints text and graphics on a page whose width is greater than its height

5	In the Apply to area, enable one of the following options:

•	Current and following pages [image] applies the page definitions to the current and following pages

•	Current page only [image] applies the page definitions to the current page only

•	Entire document [image] applies the page definitions to the entire document

 Related topics


To create a page size definition

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Page setup tab.

3	Click Add new form.

4	In the New page definition dialog box, type a name for the new page size in the Name box.

5	Choose a predefined paper size from the Type list box.

6	Type a value in all of the following boxes:

•	Width

•	Height

7	In the Printing adjustments area, choose an adjustment from any of the following list boxes, and type a value in the box beside it:

•	Vertical

•	Horizontal

8	In the Show page size for area, enable one of the following options:

•	All printers [image] lets you display page size definitions for all installed printers

•	Current printer only [image] lets you display page size definitions for the selected printer

 Tip

•	If you want to create a page size definition from a nonstandard paper size, choose User defined size from the Size list box.

 Related topics


Editing and deleting page size definitions

Corel Presentations uses a page size definition to format pages. Once you have created or selected a page size definition, you can edit it or delete it.

 How to


To edit a page size definition

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Page setup tab.

3	Click Edit form.

4	In the Edit page definition dialog box, choose a paper source from the Source list box.

5	In the Printing adjustments area, choose an adjustment from any of the following list boxes, and type a value in the box beside it:

•	Vertical

•	Horizontal

6	In the Show page size for area, enable one of the following options:

•	All printers [image] lets you display page size definitions for all installed printers

•	Current printer only [image] lets you display page size definitions for the selected printer

 Note

•	The default paper source is the source specified in the Windows printer properties for the selected printer. Choose Manual feed from the Source list box in the Edit page definition dialog box only if you put paper in the printer manually, one sheet at a time.

 Related topics


To delete a page size definition

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Page setup tab.

3	Choose a page size from the Page definition list box.

4	Click Delete form.

 Note

•	When you delete a page size definition, you can no longer use that definition; a document can print with a similar page definition, but it may not be an exact match.

 Tip

•	All printers have a nonprintable zone. If information is formatted to print in this area, it will not print. To shift information out of the nonprintable zone, you must specify printing adjustments when you define the page size.

 Related topics


Setting the page fill for slide shows and drawings

You can apply a fill (pattern, gradient, texture, or picture) to a slide or drawing page. You can also change the gradient and picture fill settings.

 How to


To apply a pattern or gradient fill to a page

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Fill tab.

3	In the Fill style area, click one of the following icons:

•	Pattern

•	Gradient

4	Open the Foreground picker, and click a color.

5	Open the Background picker, and click a color.

6	Click a pattern or gradient on the palette.

 Related topics


To change the gradient fill settings of a page

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Fill tab.

3	Click Gradient.

4	Click Gradient settings.

5	In the Gradient settings dialog box, choose a gradient from the Gradient type list box.

If applicable, type a value in the Angle box.

6	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal offset [image] lets you specify how much you want to move the gradient color horizontally

•	Vertical offset [image] lets you specify how much you want to move the gradient color vertically

7	Enable one of the following options:

•	Auto-stop blending [image] blends the gradient fill automatically

•	Fixed [image] blends the gradient fill by using a fixed number of steps that you specify in the Steps box

 Related topics


To apply a texture or picture fill to a page

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Fill tab.

3	In the Fill style area, click one of the following icons:

•	Texture

•	Picture

4	Choose a texture or picture from the Category list box.

5	Click a texture or picture on the palette.

 Related topics


To change the picture fill settings of a page

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Fill tab.

3	Click Picture.

4	Click Picture settings.

5	In the Picture settings dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Tile [image] fills the picture with tiles

•	Brick horizontal [image] fills the picture with horizontal rows

•	Brick vertical [image] fills the picture with vertical columns

•	Stretch/ shrink to fit area [image] stretches or shrinks the picture to fit the box

•	Scale to fit area [image] scales the picture to fit the box

 Related topics


Inserting files in slide shows and drawings

You can insert files in slide shows and drawings.

 How to


To insert a file

1	Click Insert [image] File.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Choose a file type from the File type list box.

4	Choose a filename.

5	Click Insert.

 Related topics


Inserting comments in slides and drawings

CorelMEMO is an electronic notepad that lets you add comments to your slides and drawings. The comments you insert are not printed on your slides or drawings.

CorelMEMO allows you to insert notes and bitmap images in any program that supports Object Linking and Embedding (OLE). You can add bitmap images which are provided with CorelMEMO, or you can include your own bitmap images. For more information about using CorelMEMO, click Help, Index while in CorelMEMO.

 How to


To insert a comment in your slide or drawing

1	Click Insert [image] Comment.

2	Type your comment in the text window.

3	Click File [image] Exit.


To edit a comment

•	Double-click the comment.

 Tip

•	You can size and position the comment in your drawing or slide as you would any other drawing object.

 Related topics


Adding document summary information to slide shows and drawings

Document summary information can include the original author's name, the name of the person who last saved the document, the title, the subject, keywords that were assigned, and other comments. It also displays the slide Master file the document uses and the revision number. You can add document summary information to any slides or drawings you create in Corel Presentations.

 How to


To add document summary information

1	Click File [image] Properties.

2	Type information in any of the following boxes:

•	Author

•	Title

•	Subject

•	Keywords

•	Comments

 Note

•	The revision number of the file updates automatically each time you open and save the document.

 Related topics


Manipulating Corel Presentations

You can minimize and restore documents in Corel Presentations, as well as Corel Presentations itself. When you have completed your tasks, you can close a document, and you can exit Corel Presentations.

 How to


To manipulate Corel Presentations

To	Do the following
Minimize a document or Corel Presentations	Click the Minimize button at the top right corner of the document window or the application window.
Restore a document or Corel Presentations	Click the Restore button at the top right corner of the document window or the application window.
Close a document	Click File [image] Close.
Exit Corel Presentations	Click File [image] Exit.
 Tips

•	You can also close a document by clicking the Close button at the top right corner of the document window.

•	You can also exit Corel Presentations by clicking the Exit button at the top right corner of the document window.

 Related topics


Customizing Corel Presentations

You can redesign your workspace in Corel Presentations.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	customizing toolbars

•	customizing the property bar

•	customizing tool palettes

•	customizing keyboard shortcuts

•	customizing the menu bar

•	setting up display features

•	customizing environment settings

•	working with video memory

•	customizing the location of slide show, drawing, and multimedia files


Customizing toolbars

For quick access to the commands, tools, and features you use most often, you can create toolbars. You can also edit toolbars by adding and removing buttons and separators, and by adding keystrokes. For example, if you type a particular word often, you can assign the word to a toolbar button, and then click the button every time you need to insert that word. As well, you can add buttons that let you start programs, open files, and run macros. You can change the location of custom toolbars in the application window, as well as the appearance of toolbar buttons; and you can copy toolbars and rename custom toolbars. When you no longer need a custom toolbar, you can delete it.

Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For information on customizing your workspace to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 How to


To create a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Toolbars tab.

4	Click Create.

5	In the Create toolbar dialog box, type a toolbar name in the Name box.

 Related topics


To add a button to a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Features tab.

7	Choose a category from the Feature categories list box.

8	Choose a feature from the Features list.

9	Click Add button.

You can also
Remove a button	Drag a button from the toolbar to the drawing or slide show window.
Add a separator	Drag a separator from the Separator window to the toolbar.
Remove a separator	Drag a separator from the toolbar to the drawing or slide show window.
Add a keystroke	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Keystrokes tab. Type keystrokes in the Type the keystrokes this button plays box. Click Add keystrokes.
 Related topics


To add a program or a file to a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Programs tab.

7	Click Add program.

8	Choose the drive and folder where the program or file is stored.

9	Choose a filename, and click Open.

 Note

•	If the application used to create the file is not running when you click the Open button, the application starts and the file opens.

 Related topics


To add a macro to a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list, and click Edit.

5	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Macros tab.

6	Click Add macro.

7	Choose the drive and folder where the macro is stored.

8	Choose a filename, and click Open.

9	Click one of the following:

•	Yes [image] saves the macro to its full path

•	No [image] saves the macro without its full path

 Related topics


To change the location of a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Options.

6	In the Location area, enable one of the following options:

•	Top [image] displays the toolbar at the top of the application window

•	Bottom [image] displays the toolbar at the bottom of the application window

•	Left [image] displays the toolbar on the left side of the application window

•	Right [image] displays the toolbar on the right side of the application window

•	Palette [image] creates a floating palette that you can move anywhere in the application window

 Related topics


To change the appearance of toolbar buttons

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Options.

6	In the Appearance area, enable one of the following options:

•	Text [image] displays only text on toolbar buttons

•	Picture [image] displays only a picture on toolbar buttons

•	Picture and text [image] displays a picture and text on toolbar buttons

7	Type a value in the Maximum number of rows/columns to show box.

 Related topics


To copy a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Copy.

6	In the Copy toolbar dialog box, type a toolbar name in the To box.

 Related topics


To rename a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Rename.

6	In the Rename toolbar dialog box, type a toolbar name in the To box.

 Note

•	You can only rename a toolbar that you created.

 Related topics


To delete a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Toolbars tab.

4	Choose a toolbar from the Available toolbars list.

5	Click Delete.

 Note

•	You can only delete a toolbar that you created.

 Related topics


Customizing the property bar

For quick access to the commands, tools, and features you use most often in the property bar, you can edit its configurations by adding and removing buttons and separators and by adding keystrokes. You can also add programs, files, and macros to the property bar. For example, if you use a particular program often, you can assign it to a property bar button, and then click the button whenever you need to start the program. To return the property bar to its original configuration, you can reset it. In addition, you can change the location of the property bar, as well as the appearance of property bar buttons.

Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For information on customizing your workspace to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 How to


To add a button to the property bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Property bars tab.

4	Choose a configuration from the Available property bars list box.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Features tab.

7	Choose a category from the Feature categories list box.

8	Choose a feature from the Features list.

9	Click Add button.

You can also
Remove a button	Drag a button from the toolbar to the drawing or slide show window.
Add a separator	Drag a separator from the Separator window to the toolbar.
Remove a separator	Drag a separator from the toolbar to the drawing or slide show window.
Add a keystroke	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Keystrokes tab. Type keystrokes in the Type the keystrokes this button plays box. Click Add keystrokes.
 Related topics


To add a program or a program file to the property bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Property bars tab.

4	Choose a configuration from the Available property bars list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Programs tab.

7	Click Add program.

8	Choose the drive and folder where the program or file is stored.

9	Choose a filename, and click Open.

 Note

•	If the application used to create the file is not running when you click the Open button, the application starts and the file opens.

 Related topics


To add a macro to the property bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Property bars tab.

4	Choose a configuration from the Available property bars list, and click Edit.

5	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Macros tab.

6	Click Add macro.

7	Choose the drive and folder where the macro is stored.

8	Choose a filename, and click Open.

9	Click one of the following:

•	Yes [image] saves the macro to its full path

•	No [image] saves the macro without its full path

 Related topics


To reset the property bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Property bars tab.

4	Choose a configuration from the Available property bars list.

5	Click Reset.

 Related topics


To change the location of the property bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Property bars tab.

4	Choose a configuration from the Available property bars list.

5	Click Options.

6	In the Location area, enable one of the following options:

•	Top [image] displays the property bar at the top of the application window.

•	Bottom [image] displays the property bar at the bottom of the application window

•	Left [image] displays the property bar at the left of the application window

•	Right [image] displays the property bar at the right of the application window

•	Palette [image] creates a floating palette that you can move anywhere on the application window

 Related topics


To change the appearance of the property bar buttons

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Property bars tab.

4	Choose a configuration from the Available property bars list.

5	Click Options.

6	In the Appearance area, enable one of the following options:

•	Text [image] displays only text on property bar buttons

•	Picture [image] displays only a picture on property bar buttons

•	Picture and text [image] displays a picture and text on property bar buttons

7	Type a value in the Maximum number of rows/columns to show box.

 Related topics


Customizing tool palettes

For quick access to the commands, tools, and features you use most often, you can customize tool palettes. You can edit tool palettes by adding and removing buttons and separators and adding keystrokes. For example, if you use a particular function often, you can assign it to a tool palette button, and then click the button every time you need to use the function. Buttons that let you start programs, open files, and run macros can also be added. After you edit a tool palette, you can reset the default settings. You can also change the location of a tool palette in the application window, and you can change the appearance of tool palettes.

Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For information on customizing your workspace to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 How to


To add a button to a tool palette

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Tool palettes tab.

4	Choose a tool palette from the Available tool palettes list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Features tab.

7	Choose a category from the Feature categories list box.

8	Choose a feature from the Features list.

9	Click Add button.

You can also
Remove a button	Drag a button from the tool palette to the drawing or slide show window.
Add a separator	Drag a separator from the Separator window to the tool palette.
Remove a separator	Drag a separator from the tool palette to the drawing or slide show window.
Add a keystroke	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Keystrokes tab. Type keystrokes in the Type the keystrokes this button plays box. Click Add keystrokes.
 Note

•	You cannot remove default buttons and separators from a tool palette.

 Related topics


To add a program to a tool palette

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Tool palettes tab.

4	Choose a tool palette from the Available tool palettes list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Programs tab.

7	Click Add Program.

8	Choose the drive and folder where the program is stored.

9	Choose a filename, and click Open.

 Note

•	If the application used to create the file is not running when you click the Open button, the application starts and the file opens.

 Related topics


To add a macro to a tool palette

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Tool palettes tab.

4	Choose a tool palette from the Available tool palettes list, and click Edit.

5	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Macros tab.

6	Click Add macro.

7	Choose the drive and folder where the macro is stored.

8	Choose a filename, and click Open.

9	Click one of the following:

•	Yes [image] saves the macro to its full path

•	No [image] saves the macro without its full path

 Related topics


To reset a tool palette

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Tool palettes tab.

4	Choose a tool palette from the Available tool palettes list.

5	Click Reset.

 Related topics


To change the location of a tool palette

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Tool palettes tab.

4	Choose a tool palette from the Available tool palettes list.

5	Click Options.

6	In the Location area, enable one of the following options:

•	Top [image] displays the tool palette at the top of the application window

•	Bottom [image] displays the tool palette at the bottom of the application window

•	Left [image] displays the tool palette at the left of the application window

•	Right [image] displays the tool palette at the right of the application window

•	Palette [image] creates a floating palette that you can move anywhere on the application window

 Related topics


To change the appearance of tool palette buttons

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Tool palettes tab.

4	Choose a tool palette from the Available tool palettes list.

5	Click Options.

6	In the Appearance area, enable one of the following options:

•	Text [image] displays only text on the tool palette buttons

•	Picture [image] displays only a picture on the tool palette buttons

•	Picture and text [image] displays a picture and text on the tool palette buttons

7	Type a value in the Maximum number of rows/columns to show box.

 Related topics


Customizing keyboard shortcuts

Shortcuts provide a faster way to perform tasks. Before you assign new shortcuts, you must create the keyboards under which you'll organize them. Keyboards are sets of shortcut preferences you can create to meet the needs of various projects and users. After you create a keyboard, you can copy and rename it. When you no longer need a custom keyboard, you can delete it.

You can assign shortcuts to features, keystrokes, programs, macros, symbols, and special characters. For example, you can assign a shortcut to a symbol and then press the shortcut whenever you need to use the symbol. You can also choose to display a shortcut on a menu. Removing an assignment you made to a shortcut, exporting a keyboard shortcut to file, and printing a keyboard shortcut report are other tasks you can perform.

Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For information on customizing your workspace to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 How to


To create a keyboard

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Keyboards tab.

4	Click Create.

5	In the Create keyboard dialog box, type a name in the Name box.

 Related topics


To copy a keyboard

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Keyboards tab.

4	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list.

5	Click Copy.

6	In the Copy keyboards dialog box, type a name in the To box.

 Related topics


To rename a keyboard

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Keyboards tab.

4	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list.

5	Click Copy.

6	In the Copy keyboards dialog box, type a name in the To box.

 Related topics


To delete a keyboard

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Keyboards tab.

4	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list.

5	Click Delete.

6	Click Yes.

 Note

•	You cannot delete the default keyboard.

 Related topics


To assign a keyboard shortcut

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Keyboards tab.

4	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Keyboard shortcuts dialog box, choose a shortcut from the Choose a shortcut key list.

7	Click the Features tab.

8	Choose a category from the Feature categories list box.

9	Choose a feature from the Assign a feature to the shortcut key list, and click Assign feature to key.

You can also
Assign a keystroke to a shortcut	In the Keyboard shortcuts dialog box, click the Keystrokes tab. Choose a shortcut from the Choose a shortcut key list. Type a keystroke in the box. Click Assign keystrokes to key.
Assign a program to a shortcut	In the Keyboard shortcuts dialog box, click the Programs tab. Choose a shortcut from the Choose a shortcut key list. Click Assign program to key. Choose the drive and folder where the program is stored. Choose a filename. Click Open.
Assign a macro to a shortcut	In the Keyboard shortcuts dialog box, click the Macros tab. Choose a shortcut from the Choose a shortcut key list. Click Assign macro to key. Choose the drive and folder where the macro is stored. Choose a filename. Click Open. Click Yes or No.
Assign a shortcut to a symbol or special character	In the Keyboard shortcuts dialog box, choose a shortcut key from the Choose a shortcut key list. Click the Keystrokes tab. Type the ASCII code for the symbol or special character in the box. Click Assign keystrokes to key.
Assign a shortcut to an alphanumeric character	In the Keyboard shortcuts dialog box, enable the Allow assignment of character keys check box.
 Note

•	If you assign a shortcut to an alphanumeric character key, the original function of the key is replaced.

 Related topics


To display a shortcut on a menu

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Keyboards tab.

4	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Keyboard shortcuts dialog box, enable the Shortcut key appears on the menu check box.

 Related topics


To remove an assigned keyboard shortcut

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Keyboards tab.

4	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Keyboard shortcuts dialog box, choose a shortcut from the Choose a shortcut key list.

7	Click Remove assignment.

 Related topics


To export a keyboard shortcut to a file

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Keyboards tab.

4	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Keyboard shortcuts dialog box, choose a shortcut from the Choose a shortcut key list.

7	Click Export file.

8	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the keyboard shortcut.

9	Type a filename in the Filename box, and click Save.

 Related topics


To print a keyboard shortcut report

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Keyboards tab.

4	Choose a keyboard from the Available keyboards list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Keyboard shortcuts dialog box, choose a shortcut from the Choose a shortcut key list.

7	Click Print report.

 Related topics


Customizing the menu bar

You can create multiple configurations of the menu bar to give you quick access to the commands, tools, and features you use most often. You can also edit menu bar configurations by adding and removing menu items and separators, and adding pull-down menus and keystrokes. Add programs, files, and macros to the menu bar by creating buttons that represent them. In addition, you can copy and rename menu bar configurations. When you no longer need a menu bar configuration, you can delete it.

Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For information on customizing your workspace to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 How to


To create a configuration of the menu bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Menus tab.

4	Click Create.

5	In the Create menu bar dialog box, type a menu name in the Name box.

 Related topics


To add an item to the menu bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Menus tab.

4	Choose a configuration from the Available menu bars list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Features tab.

7	Choose a category from the Feature categories list box.

8	Choose a feature from the Features list.

9	Click Add menu item.

You can also
Remove a menu item	Drag an item from the menu bar to the drawing or slide show window.
Add keystrokes	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Keystrokes tab. Type keystrokes in the Type the keystrokes this menu item plays box. Click Add keystrokes.
Add a pull-down menu	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Features tab. Drag a pull-down menu from the Menu window to the menu bar.
Add an item to a pull-down menu	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Features tab. Drag a feature from the Features list to the pull-down menu.
Add a separator to a pull-down menu	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Features tab. Drag a separator from the Separator window to the pull-down menu.
Remove a separator from a pull-down menu	Drag a separator from the pull-down menu to the drawing or slide show window.
 Note

•	You cannot add a menu item or a separator to a default pull-down menu.

 Related topics


To add a program to the menu bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Menus tab.

4	Choose a configuration from the Available menu bars list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Programs tab.

7	Click Add program.

8	Choose the drive and folder where the program is stored.

9	Choose a filename, and click Open.

 Note

•	If the application used to create the file is not running when you click the Open button, the application starts and the file opens.

 Related topics


To add a macro to the menu bar

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Menus tab.

4	Choose a configuration from the Available menu bars list, and click Edit.

5	In the Toolbar editor dialog box, click the Programs tab.

6	Click Add program.

7	Choose the drive and folder where the macro is stored.

8	Choose a filename, and click Open.

9	Click one of the following:

•	Yes [image] saves the macro to its full path

•	No [image] saves the macro without its full path

 Related topics


To copy a menu bar configuration

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Menus tab.

4	Choose a configuration from the Available menu bars list.

5	Click Copy.

6	In the Copy menu bar dialog box, type a menu bar name in the To box.

 Related topics


To rename a menu bar configuration

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Menus tab.

4	Choose a configuration from the Available menu bars list.

5	Click Rename.

6	In the Rename menu bar dialog box, type a menu bar name in the To box.

 Related topics


To delete a menu bar configuration

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the Menus tab.

4	Choose a configuration from the Available menu bars list.

5	Click Delete.

6	Click Yes.

 Note

•	You cannot delete the default configuration of the menu bar.

 Related topics


Setting up display features

You can display a variety of menu features in your work environment. For example, you can display hints with menu items. You can also set the units of measure used in Corel Presentations. For example, you can change the ruler's unit of measure.

 How to


To display menu features

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Shortcut keys [image] displays keystrokes next to the command names on the Menu Bar

•	Last documents opened [image] displays the last files that you worked on

•	Quick Tips [image] displays information about each menu item

 Related topics


To change the unit of measure

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	Choose a measurement type from the Units of measure list box.

 Related topics


Customizing environment settings

You can change the startup setting in Corel Presentations. For example, you can choose what type of project opens when you start Corel Presentations. When creating a new slide show, you can choose to have the Master Gallery display automatically. You can also specify the environment options by using enhanced file dialogs, changing the text dragging functionality, automatically converting graphics that are in Windows Metafile format (WMF) into the WordPerfect Graphic file format (WPG) when importing them into your slide show, changing default drawing settings, and indicating search failure. If you have a language module installed, you can also specify which environment language you want to use. You can choose the language of the text that appears in the Corel Presentations application window, including dialog box text, prompts, and the menu bar, and you can choose the writing tools language.

 How to


To change the startup document

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	Click the Startup tab.

4	In the Startup options area, enable one of the following options:

•	Display document selection (new...) dialog box

•	Create new slide show

•	Create new drawing

 Related topics


To display the Master Gallery when a new slide show is created

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	Click the Startup tab.

4	Enable the Automatically display the Master Gallery when creating a new slide show check box.

 Related topics


To use enhanced file dialogs

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	Click the Options tab.

4	Enable the Use enhanced file dialogs check box.

 Related topics


To change text dragging options

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	Click the Options tab.

4	Enable the Automatically select whole words when dragging to select text check box.

 Related topics


To automatically convert WMF files to the WPG file format

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	Click the Options tab.

4	Enable the Convert Windows metafiles (.Wmf) to WordPerfect graphic (.Wpg) format check box.

 Related topics


To change default drawing settings

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	Click the Options tab.

4	Enable the Convert Windows metafiles (.Wmf) to WordPerfect graphic (.Wpg) format check box.

5	In the Save my drawings, by default, in the following format area, enable one of the following options:

•	WPG 7/8/9/10/11 [image] WordPerfect 7/8/9/10/11 Graphic

•	WPG 2.0 [image] WordPerfect 6.0 Graphic

 Related topics


To change search failure settings

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Environment.

3	Click the Options tab.

4	In the Alert me if there is... area, enable the A search failure check box.

 Related topics


To change the language settings

To	Do the following
Change the environment language	Click Tools [image] Settings. Click Environment. Click the Language tab. Choose a language from the Interface language list box.
Change the writing tools language	Click Tools [image] Settings. Click Environment. Click the Language tab. Choose a language from the Content language list box.
 Related topics


Working with video memory

Corel Presentations uses DirectDraw technology to use video memory. DirectDraw is a plug-in included with Corel Presentations that helps manage the memory in your video card. Video memory can be used to directly render each slide, which allows you to display your slide shows with smoother transitions. If you choose to take full advantage of your video memory, you may notice changes with your screen resolution and color depending on the video memory option that you choose. The recommended option is to use video memory, but not change the screen resolution or colors. This option provides the best resolution and color depth for your slide shows.

 How to


To take advantage of video memory

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	Enable the Take full advantage of video memory for smoother transitions check box.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	Keep the screen resolution as high as possible

•	Keep the colors as true as possible

•	Use video memory, but do not change the screen resolution or colors

 Notes

•	Choosing to keep the screen resolution as high as possible may cause the color depth of your slides to decrease. For example, the color of an object embedded in your slide show may be matched to the nearest available color, which may cause the colors to appear mismatched.

•	Choosing to keep the colors as true as possible will keep the color depth of your slide show intact, but it will cause the slide show to run at a lower resolution.

 Related topics


Customizing the location of slide show, drawing, and multimedia files

You can specify the default folders for the following types of files: slide shows, masters, backgrounds, macros, and toolbars. You can also set the default folders for the following types of multimedia files: sound clips, textures, pictures, and movies. In addition, you can create a folder in which backup files for slide shows, drawings, and multimedia files are stored. You can also choose to save the backup file at timed intervals and create a backup of a file each time you save it.

 How to


To set the default file folder for slide show and drawing files

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Files.

3	Click the Slide show/drawings tab.

4	Click Browse in any of the following boxes:

•	Document folder

•	Masters folder

•	Backgrounds folder

•	Macros folder

•	Toolbars/keyboards

5	In the Browse for folder dialog box, choose a folder.

 Related topics


To set the default folder for multimedia files

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Files.

3	Click the Multimedia tab.

4	Click Browse in any of the following boxes:

•	Sound clips

•	Textures folder

•	Pictures folder

•	Movie folder

5	In the Browse for folder dialog box, choose a folder.

 Related topics


To create a backup folder for a slide show, drawing, or multimedia presentation

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Files.

3	Click the Backup tab.

4	Click Browse in the box.

5	In the Browse for folder dialog box, choose a folder.

You can also
Save a backup file at timed intervals	On the Backup page, enable the Timed document backup every check box, and type a number in the box beside it.
Create a backup of a slide show, drawing, or multimedia file each time you save	On the Backup page, enable the Save original document as a backup at each save check box.
 Related topics


Working with data charts

You can use Corel Presentations to create and update various types of data charts.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating data charts

•	sizing and moving data charts

•	updating data charts

•	adding legends to data charts

•	adding titles to data charts

•	formatting data chart titles

•	labeling data charts

•	including clipart in data charts

•	saving and retrieving data chart styles

•	formatting area charts

•	formatting bar charts

•	formatting bubble charts

•	formatting high/low charts

•	formatting line charts

•	formatting pie charts

•	formatting radar charts

•	formatting surface charts

•	formatting xy scatter charts

•	converting data charts to drawing objects


Creating data charts

You can create different types of data charts in Corel Presentations using a collection of predesigned chart templates and color schemes. You can also create any of these data charts as a three-dimensional chart. Creating a data series for a chart lets you visually represent a row of data from a datasheet, and lets you add additional data to a chart by using a secondary y-axis.

You can also create a pie chart that contains more than one pie.

You can create 11 different types of data charts.

Chart	Function
Area chart	Shows trends and the amount of change over time by plotting cumulative, rather than individual, values. The first data series in an area chart is plotted without modification. The second series is plotted using the top of the first series as the baseline. The third series is charted on top of the second, and so forth. Area charts can also display continuous, solid areas that measure the data in a datasheet.
Bar chart	Shows each value in a series as a bar. Values are plotted against the y-axis scale; the taller the bar, the greater the value. Use bar charts to display the data as bars of varying heights or lengths for easy comparison. You can create vertical or horizontal bar charts.
Bubble chart	Displays three types of data on two axes. For example, you could plot units sold (x-axis coordinate) versus gross profit (y-axis coordinate) with the bubble's radius representing the net profit.
High/low chart	Shows the high and low of values compared over time. For example, a High/Low chart could compare daily low and high values of a stock over five days; or it could show the opening, closing, and range of stock prices.
Line chart	Shows trends and the rate of change over time by connecting the data points with lines.
Mixed chart	Adds emphasis to or contrasts data. For example, mixing charts can be used to contrast a company division's performance against that of the company as a whole by using a bar chart to represent the division's performance and a line or area chart to display the company's performance.
Pie chart	Shows each value entered in a data cell in the datasheet as a slice of a circle, what proportion that slice is, and how it relates to the whole.
Radar chart	Compares data over time to show variations and trends. Radar charts plot circles for each x-axis value which are represented by a line that extends from the center of the circle to the edge, like the spokes of a wheel. Y-axis values for each series are charted on the spokes.
Scatter chart	Shows the correlation between two data series by placing a dot or marker at each point where data on the x and y axes intersect. Scatter charts are effective to present large amounts of data values, such as measuring temperature over a long period of time, where the x-axis would represent time and the y-axis would represent temperature.
Surface chart	Represents data values as a topography that bulges and dips like the contours of a landscape. For example, you can use a Surface chart to show business profits and losses as the peaks and valleys of a mountain range. The color of the topography changes as the surface rises and falls.
Table	Displays numerical data in a two-dimensional grid of rows and columns.
 How to


To create a data chart

1	Click Insert [image] Data chart.

2	Drag to define a chart area.

3	Choose a chart type from the Chart type list.

If you want to begin with a blank datasheet, disable the Use sample data check box.

4	Click a chart style.

5	Click OK.

6	Type data in the datasheet.

7	Click outside the chart to close the datasheet.

 Tips

•	You can also choose a data chart type by clicking the Data chart gallery button on the toolbar.

•	You can toggle between a horizontal and vertical display of the data chart by clicking Horizontal chart button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To create a three-dimensional data chart

1	Click Insert [image] Data chart.

2	Drag to define a chart area.

3	From the Chart type list, choose one of the following:

•	Area

•	Bar (horz)

•	Bar (vert)

•	High/low

•	Line

•	Mixed

•	Pie

•	Surface

•	XY (scatter)

4	Enable the 3-D check box.

5	Click a chart style.

6	Click OK.

7	Type data in the datasheet.

8	Click outside the chart to close the datasheet.

 Tip

•	You can also create a three-dimensional chart by clicking the 3-D chart button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To create a data series

1	Double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Series.

3	Click the arrows to select a series.

4	Click the Type/axis tab.

5	In the Series type area, enable one of the following options:

•	Area

•	Bar, and choose a bar shape from the Bar shape list

•	Line

•	Line and marker

•	Marker, click a marker shape in the Marker shape area, and type a value in the Marker size box

7	In the Axis area, enable one of the following options:

•	Primary (y1)

•	Secondary (y2)

 Note

•	It is recommended that you use no more than eight series when you create a bar chart.

 Tip

•	You can also create a data series by clicking the Series button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To create a pie chart that contains more than one pie

1	Click Insert [image] Data chart.

2	Click in the drawing window to create a full-window chart.

3	Choose Pie from the Chart type list.

4	Click a chart style.

5	Click OK.

6	In the Legend column of the datasheet, type a name for each pie slice.

All the pies in the chart will use the same Legend entries.

7	In the Labels 1 column, type a label for each slice in the first pie.

8	In the Pie 1 column, type data for each slice in the first pie.

 Note

•	You can include up to nine pies in the same pie chart.

 Tip

•	If you do not want to create a full-window chart, you can drag to define a chart area in the drawing window.

 Related topics


Sizing and moving data charts

You can change the size of a data chart proportionally, and you can stretch or shrink a data chart. You can also move a data chart to a new location in the drawing window.

 How to


To size a data chart

To	Do the following
Size a data chart proportionally	Click a data chart, and drag a corner handle inward or outward.
Stretch or shrink the data chart	Double-click a data chart, and drag a corner or side handle inward or outward.
 Related topics


To move a data chart

1	Click a data chart.

2	Drag the data chart to a new location in the drawing window.

 Related topics


Updating data charts

You can update a data chart manually or automatically to reflect the changes you have made to data or text in a datasheet. When a data chart is updated, Corel Presentations also updates changes made to column widths in tables, recalculates formulas, and corrects distorted graphics.

 How to


To update a data chart

To update a chart	Do the following
Manually	Double-click a data chart, and click View [image] Redraw.
Automatically	Double-click a data chart, and click View [image] Auto redraw.
 Related topics


Adding legends to data charts

To further identify a data chart, you can add a legend that can be displayed and positioned inside a data chart.

 How to


To add a legend to a data chart

1	Double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Legend.

3	Click the Type/position tab.

4	In the Legend type area, click one of the following:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

5	In the Position area, enable a legend position option.

You can also
Display the legend	Enable the Display legend check box.
Display the legend inside the data chart	Enable the Place legend inside chart check box.
 Tip

•	You can also add a legend to a data chart by clicking the Legend button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


Adding titles to data charts

You can add a title and subtitle in a data chart. You can also add a legend title in a data chart.

 How to


To add a data chart title

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Title.

3	Click the Title options tab.

4	Enable the Display chart title check box, and type a chart title name in the box.

5	Enable an option in the Position area.

 Related topics


To add a data chart subtitle

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Subtitle.

3	Click the Subtitle options tab

4	Enable the Display chart subtitle check box, and type a subtitle name in the box.

5	Enable an option in the Position area.

 Related topics


To add a title to a pie chart

1	Double-click a pie chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Pie titles.

3	Click the Title options tab.

4	Enable the Display pie title check box.

 Related topics


To add and format a legend title in a data chart

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Legend.

3	Click the Type/position tab.

4	Enable the Display legend title check box, and type a legend title in the box.

5	Enable an option in the Position area.

 Related topics


Formatting data chart titles

You can format a title or subtitle in a data chart. You can also format a legend title.

 How to


To format a data chart title

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Title.

3	Click the Title font tab.

4	Choose a font from the Face list.

5	Choose a font size from the Size list box.

6	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Bold

•	Underline

•	Italic

7	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

 Tip

•	You can also format a data chart title by double-clicking the title.

 Related topics


To format a data chart subtitle

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Subtitle.

3	Click the Subtitle font tab.

4	Choose a font from the Face list.

5	Choose a font size from the Size list box.

6	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Bold

•	Underline

•	Italic

7	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

 Tip

•	You can also format a data chart subtitle by double-clicking the subtitle.

 Related topics


To format a legend title

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Legend.

3	Click the Title font tab.

4	Choose a font from the Face list.

5	Choose a font size from the Size list box.

6	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Bold

•	Underline

•	Italic

7	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

 Tip

•	You can also format a legend title by double-clicking the title.

 Related topics


Labeling data charts

Adding labels to data charts lets you identify data.

You can also add labels to pie charts.

You can add x-axis and y-axis labels to data charts to show what values are being represented. X-axis labels can be added to radar charts as well.

 How to


To label a data chart

1	Double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Data labels.

3	Enable the Display data labels check box.

4	Click the Position tab.

5	Click one of the following:

•	Inside

•	Outside

 Tip

•	You can also label a data chart by clicking the Labels button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To label a pie chart

1	Double-click a pie chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Data labels.

3	Click the Position tab.

4	Choose a label position from the Value list box.

5	Choose a percentage label position from the Percent list box.

6	Type a value in the Digits box.

This value lets you specify how many digits display after decimal points.

7	Choose a label position from the Label list box.

8	Choose a leader length from the Leader list box.

9	In the Orientation area, click one of the following:

•	One line [image] lists the value, percent, and label text horizontally for each slice

•	Stacked [image] stacks the value, percent, and label text vertically for each slice

 Tip

•	You can also label a data chart by clicking the Labels button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To add x-axis labels to a data chart

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axis [image] X.

3	Click the Labels tab.

4	Enable the Display labels check box.

5	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Show ticks on labels only [image] displays value indicators beside labels only

•	Stagger [image] alternates labels above and below each other

6	If you want to skip labels alternately along the x-axis, type a value in the Number to skip box in the Skip labels area.

 Related topics


To add y-axis labels to a data chart

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axis, and click one of the following:

•	Primary y

•	Secondary y

3	Click the Scale/labels tab.

4	Enable the Display labels check box.

5	In the Maximum value box, type the maximum value of the axis.

The Automatic check box is disabled automatically when you begin typing.

6	In the Minimum value box, type the minimum value of the axis.

The Automatic check box is disabled automatically when you begin typing.

7	In the Major grid value box, type a value to control the distance between major grid lines.

The Automatic check box is disabled automatically when you begin typing.

 Note

•	You must have a data series attached to the secondary y-axis to change its properties.

 Related topics


To add x-axis labels to a radar chart

1	Double-click a radar chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axis [image] X.

3	Click the Axis options tab.

4	Enable the Display labels check box.

5	Type the maximum value of the axis in the Maximum value box.

6	Type the minimum value of the axis in the Minimum value box.

7	Type a value in the Major grid value box.

This value lets you specify the distance between major grid lines.

 Related topics


Including clipart in data charts

Adding clipart to data charts lets you illustrate, emphasize, and highlight ideas. When clipart is included in a data chart, the two objects are grouped and treated as a single object, which is useful for moving and rotating the completed chart.

This illustration shows clipart layered on a data chart.

For more information about clipart, see "Working with graphics."

 How to


To place clipart on a data chart

1	Drag a clipart image onto a data chart.

2	Drag the side and corner handles inwards or outwards to fit the image into the chart.

3	Click Edit [image] Arrange [image] Order [image] To front.

4	Hold down Ctrl, and click the clipart image and the data chart.

5	Click Edit [image] Arrange [image] Group.

 Related topics


Saving and retrieving data chart styles

You can save a data chart style so that you can use the same options and chart characteristics, such as chart type, fonts, and series color, for other charts. When saving a chart style, chart data and text are not saved. You can retrieve saved data chart styles for later use.

 How to


To save a data chart style

1	Double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Save style.

3	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the data chart style.

4	Type a filename in the Filename box.

5	Choose Chart styles from the File type list box.

6	Click Save.

 Related topics


To retrieve a data chart style

1	Double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Retrieve style.

3	Choose the drive and folder where the data chart style is located.

4	Click a filename.

5	Click Open.

 Related topics


Formatting area charts

You can format area charts to change their style and appearance.

The following illustration shows a 3-D area chart.

 How to


To change the style and appearance of an area chart

1	Double-click an area chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

3	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	3-D [image] displays the chart with height, width, and the depth you specify in the Depth box

•	Horizontal [image] displays the chart horizontally instead of vertically

4	In the Style area, click one of the following:

•	Overlap [image] displays the data in each column as overlapping groups

•	Stacked [image] displays the data in each column as a combined total, stacked from bottom to top

•	Stacked 100% [image] displays the data in each column as a percentage of the whole column

 Tip

•	You can also change the style of an area chart by opening the Data chart style picker on the property bar and clicking a style.

 Related topics


Formatting bar charts

You can format bar charts to change their style and appearance. Applying a clustered style to a bar chart displays the data in each column as clustered groups. Applying an overlapping style to a bar chart displays the data in each column as overlapping groups. Applying a stacked style to a bar chart displays the data in each column as a combined total, stacked from bottom to top. Applying a 100% stacked style to a bar chart displays the data in each column as a percentage of the whole column.

The following illustration shows a 3-D bar chart.

 How to


To apply a clustered style to a bar chart

1	Double-click a bar chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

3	In the Style area, click Cluster.

4	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	3-D [image] displays the chart with height, width, and depth

•	Horizontal [image] displays the chart horizontally instead of vertically

5	Type a value in any of the following boxes

•	Depth [image] controls the three-dimensional depth of the bars in the chart

•	Height [image] controls the height of the bars in the chart

 Tip

•	You can also change the style of a bar chart by opening the Data chart style picker on the property bar and clicking a style.

 Related topics


To apply an overlapping style to a bar chart

1	Double-click a bar chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

3	In the Style area, click Overlap.

4	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	3-D [image] displays the chart with height, width, and depth

•	Horizontal [image] displays the chart horizontally instead of vertically

5	Type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Depth [image] controls the three-dimensional depth of the bars in the chart

•	Overlap [image] controls the amount of overlap of the bars in the chart

•	Width [image] controls the width of the bars in the chart

If you enabled the Horizontal checkbox in the Appearance area, the name of the Width box changes to Height.

 Tip

•	You can also change the style of a bar chart by opening the Data chart style picker on the property bar and clicking a style.

 Related topics


To apply a stacked style to a bar chart

1	Double-click a bar chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

3	In the Style area, click Stacked.

4	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	3-D [image] displays the chart with height, width, and depth

•	Horizontal [image] displays the chart horizontally instead of vertically

5	Type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Depth [image] controls the three-dimensional depth of the bars in the chart

•	Overlap [image] controls the amount of overlap of the bars in the chart

•	Width [image] controls the width of the bars in the chart

If you enabled the Horizontal checkbox in the Appearance area, the name of the Width box changes to Height.

 Tip

•	You can also change the style of a bar chart by opening the Data chart style picker on the property bar and clicking a style.

 Related topics


To apply a 100% stacked style to a bar chart

1	Double-click a bar chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

3	In the Style area, click Stacked 100%.

4	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	3-D [image] displays the chart with height, width, and depth

•	Horizontal [image] displays the chart horizontally instead of vertically

5	Type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Depth [image] controls the three-dimensional depth of the bars in the chart

•	Overlap [image] controls the amount of overlap of the bars in the chart

•	Width [image] controls the width of the bars in the chart

If you enabled the Horizontal checkbox in the Appearance area, the name of the Width box changes to Height.

 Tip

•	You can also change the style of a bar chart by opening the Data chart style picker on the property bar and clicking a style.

 Related topics


Formatting bubble charts

You can format bubble charts to change their appearance. For example, you can change the size of the bubbles in a chart.

The following illustration shows a bubble chart with three types of data.

 How to


To change the appearance of a bubble chart

1	Double-click a bubble chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

If you want to display the chart horizontally, enable the Horizontal check box.

3	Type a value in the Size box.

The value you specify changes the size of the bubbles.

 Related topics


Formatting high/low charts

You can format high/low charts to change their style and appearance. Applying a line style to a high/low chart displays each set of data as horizontal and vertical lines. Applying a bar/error style to a high/low chart displays each set of data as bars with error indicators. Applying an error bar style to a high/low chart displays each set of data with top and bottom and error markers. Applying an area style to a high/low chart displays each set of data as a solid area.

This illustration shows a high/low chart.

 How to


To apply a line style to a high/low chart

1	Double-click a high/low chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

3	In the Style area, click Line.

4	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	3-D [image] displays the chart with height, width, and the depth you specify in the Depth box

•	Horizontal [image] displays the chart horizontally instead of vertically

5	Type a value in the Width box.

This value lets you specify the width of the bars and lines in the chart.

If you enabled the 3-D check box, type a value in the Height box to specify the height of the bars and lines.

 Tip

•	You can also change the style of a high/low chart by opening the Data chart style picker on the property bar and clicking a style.

 Related topics


To apply a bar/error style to a high/low chart

1	Double-click a high/low chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

3	In the Style area, click Bar/error.

4	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	3-D [image] displays the chart with height, width, and the depth you specify in the Depth box

•	Horizontal [image] displays the chart horizontally instead of vertically

5	Type a value in the Width box.

This value lets you specify the width of the bars and lines in the chart.

 Tip

•	You can also change the style of a high/low chart by opening the Data chart style picker and clicking a style.

 Related topics


To apply an error bar style to a high/low chart

1	Double-click a high/low chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

3	In the Style area, click Error bar.

4	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	3-D [image] displays the chart with height, width, and the depth you specify in the Depth box

•	Horizontal [image] displays the chart horizontally instead of vertically

5	Type a value in the Width box.

This value lets you specify the width of the bars and lines in the chart.

 Tip

•	You can also change the style of a high/low chart by opening the Data chart style picker and clicking a style.

 Related topics


To apply an area style to a high/low chart

1	Double-click a high/low chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

3	In the Style area, click Area.

4	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	3-D [image] displays the chart with height, width, and the depth you specify in the Depth box

•	Horizontal [image] displays the chart horizontally instead of vertically

 Tip

•	You can also change the style of a high/low chart by opening the Data chart style picker and clicking a style.

 Related topics


Formatting line charts

You can format line charts to change their style and appearance.

This illustration shows a three-dimensional line chart.

 How to


To change the style and appearance of a line chart

1	Double-click a line chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

3	In the Style area, click one of the following:

•	Overlap

•	Stacked

•	Stacked 100%

4	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	3-D [image] displays the chart with height, width, and the depth you specify in the Depth box

•	Horizontal [image] displays the chart horizontally instead of vertically

If you enabled the 3-D check box, type a value in the Height box to specify the height of the lines.

 Tip

•	You can also change the style of a line chart by opening the Data chart style picker and clicking a style.

 Related topics


Formatting pie charts

You can format existing pie charts to change their style and appearance. For example, you can explode a pie slice away from a pie chart, and you can link pie slices from different pie charts. Applying a pie style to a pie chart displays the chart in the shape of a pie. Applying a column style to a pie chart displays the chart as a stacked column.

This illustration shows a three-dimensional pie chart with data labels.

 How to


To apply a pie style to a pie chart

1	Double-click a pie chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

3	In the Style area, click Pie.

4	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	3-D [image] displays the chart with height, width, and the depth you specify in the Depth box

•	Proportional [image] sizes two or more pie charts proportionally

•	Sort slice [image] arranges pie chart slices by size

5	Type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Size [image] controls the size of the pie chart

•	Angle [image] controls the viewing angle of the pie chart

If you enabled the 3-D check box, type a value in the Tilt box to control the tilting of the pie chart.

You can also
Explode a pie slice	In the Appearance area, click Explode slice. Type a value in the Slice box. Type a value in the Distance box to specify how far from the center of the pie chart (1% to 200%) you want to move the slice.
Link pie slices	In the Specify the slice in pie 1 that will link it to pie 2 area, enable the Link pie 2 to slice check box. In the Link pie 2 to slice box, type a slice number of pie 1 to link to pie 2.
 Related topics


To apply a column style to a pie chart

1	Double-click a pie chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

3	In the Style area, click Pie.

4	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	3-D [image] displays the chart with height, width, and the depth you specify in the Depth box

•	Proportional [image] sizes two or more pie charts proportionally

•	Sort slice [image] arranges pie chart slices by size

5	Type a value in the Size box.

This value specifies the size of the pie chart.

 Related topics


Formatting radar charts

You can format radar charts to change their style and appearance. For example, you can display the data on a round grid or on an angular grid.

The following illustration shows a radar chart.

 How to


To change the layout and appearance of a radar chart

1	Double-click a radar chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

3	In the Style area, click one of the following:

•	Overlap

•	Stacked

•	Stacked 100%

4	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Line [image] displays each set of data as horizontal and vertical lines

•	Area [image] displays each set of data as solid areas

5	In the Grid area, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Radial [image] displays data on a round grid

•	Linear [image] displays data on an angular grid

If you want to display each data series with its own y-axis settings, enable the Separate y-axis check box.

 Tip

•	You can also change the style of a radar chart by opening the Data chart style picker and clicking a style.

 Related topics


Formatting surface charts

You can format surface charts to change their appearance. For example, you can change a surface chart's appearance to 3-D, and you can outlines the contours of a chart.

This illustration shows a surface chart.

 How to


To change the appearance of a surface chart

1	Double-click a surface chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

3	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	3-D [image] creates three-dimensional topography

•	Outline contours [image] creates lines between value ranges

4	Open the Outline picker, and click a color.

5	Open the 1-10% picker, and click a color.

6	Open the 91-100% picker, and click a color.

7	Click Blend range colors.

 Tip

•	You can also create a more detailed blend of colors in the range by opening each of the pickers, from 1-10% to 91-100%, and clicking a color.

 Related topics


Formatting xy scatter charts

You can format xy scatter charts to change their style and appearance.

This illustration shows an xy scatter chart.

 How to


To change the style and appearance of an xy scatter chart

1	Double-click an xy scatter chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

3	In the Style area, click a chart style.

4	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	3-D [image] displays the chart with height, width, and the depth you specify in the Depth box.

•	Horizontal [image] displays the chart horizontally instead of vertically

 Tip

•	You can also change the style of an xy scatter chart by opening the Data chart style picker and clicking a style.

 Related topics


Converting data charts to drawing objects

You can convert a data chart to a drawing object, which converts the chart to a collection of graphic objects that you can manipulate.

 How to


To convert a data chart to a drawing object

1	Click a data chart.

2	Click Edit [image] Arrange [image] Separate objects.

3	Click Separate.

 Note

•	When you convert a data chart to a drawing object, you can no longer treat it as a data chart, because it is no longer linked to the style and data in the original chart. For example, you can no longer change the data in the datasheet.

 Related topics


Working with datasheets

The datasheet is a spreadsheet that is used to enter, edit, or format the data that a data chart displays.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	manipulating datasheets

•	adding and copying data

•	removing data

•	working with datasheet cells

•	formatting datasheet cells

•	working with rows and columns

•	working with data ranges

•	using formulas and number fills

For further information about working with datasheets, see "Reference: Working with datasheets."


Manipulating datasheets

When you have finished entering data in a datasheet, you can hide the datasheet. You can also move a datasheet to a new location on the screen, and you can adjust the size of a datasheet. In addition to displaying datasheet information in a chart, it can be displayed in a table.

 How to


To hide a datasheet

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click View [image] Datasheet.

No check mark beside the Datasheet command indicates that the datasheet is hidden.

 Note

•	The datasheet displays by default.

 Tip

•	You can also view or hide a datasheet by clicking the View datasheet button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To move a datasheet

•	Drag a datasheet to a new location in the drawing window.

 Related topics


To size a datasheet

1	Point to any side or corner of a datasheet.

2	Drag to size the datasheet.

Dragging inward reduces the size of the datasheet; dragging outward increases it.

 Related topics


To display datasheet information in a table

1	Click a datasheet.

2	Click Chart [image] Layout/type.

3	Click Table.

4	In the Table properties dialog box, enable the Display table check box.

 Tip

•	You can also display datasheet information in a table by clicking the Show table button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


Adding and copying data

Entering and editing data in Corel Presentations datasheets is similar to entering data in a spreadsheet application such as Quattro Pro. The datasheet consists of cells in which you enter data. These cells display in a series of rows and columns in the datasheet.

The following illustration shows what a datasheet looks like.

You can also import spreadsheet data from files created in other applications into a data chart. If you link the imported data to a chart, any changes you make to the chart data in a spreadsheet application, such as Quattro Pro, are automatically updated in the Corel Presentations chart data every time you open the chart.

As well, you can export a datasheet data.

 How to


To enter or edit data

1	Click a cell on a datasheet.

2	Click Edit [image] Edit cell.

3	Type data in the Data box.

 Tip

•	You can also enter or edit data by typing directly in a cell.

 Related topics


To import spreadsheet data

1	Click a datasheet.

2	Click Data [image] Import.

3	Choose Spreadsheet from the Data type list box.

4	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Transpose data [image] switches data from columns to rows and rows to columns

•	Clear current data [image] deletes all the data already in the datasheet

•	Link to spreadsheet [image] links the imported data to the data chart, resulting in automatic updating of the data when the spreadsheet is changed

•	Import at current cell [image] imports data at the selected cell

5	In the Filename box, type the path and filename of the import file.

6	Type a value in the Range box to import a range of data.

 Tip

•	You can also import a predefined range of data by choosing a range from the Named ranges list.

 Related topics


To export data from a datasheet

1	Click a datasheet.

2	Click Data [image] Export.

3	Choose the drive and folder to which you want to export the data.

4	Choose a file format and delimiter type from the File type list box.

5	Type a filename in the Filename box.

6	Click Export.

 Related topics


Removing data

You can clear all of the data in a datasheet, and you can clear specific cells of data in a datasheet.

 How to


To clear all data from a datasheet

1	Click a datasheet.

2	Click Edit [image] Clear all.

 Related topics


To clear data from a cell

1	Select a cell.

2	Click Edit [image] Clear.

3	Enable the Data option.

 Related topics


Working with datasheet cells

The Corel Presentations datasheet consists of a series of cells in which you enter or edit chart data. You can select all of the cells in a datasheet.

By highlighting each area with a color in the range highlighter, you can distinguish between datasheet data and the legend and label areas in the datasheet. For information about legend and label areas, see "Working with data charts."

While editing a chart, you can move to any cell in the datasheet by specifying the column and row of the cell to which you want to move. For example, typing C4 specifies the cell at the intersection of the fourth row and the C column.

 How to


To select all cells

1	Click a datasheet.

2	Click Edit [image] Select all.

 Related topics


To highlight ranges

1	Click a datasheet.

2	Click View [image] Range highlighter.

3	Enable the View highlighted ranges check box.

4	Open the Legend picker, and click a color.

5	Open the Labels picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Data picker, and click a color.

 Related topics


To move to a cell

1	Click a datasheet.

2	Click Edit [image] Go to cell.

3	Type a column letter and a row number in the Cell box.

 Related topics


Formatting datasheet cells

All the cell data in a datasheet is either a number or a date. You can format the numbers to include percentage signs, dollar signs, and so on. You can create a new numeric data format, or you can choose a numeric format from a predefined list. The formatting you choose applies only to the selected datasheet cells. As well, you can choose date formats for the dates in data charts. You can also create a custom date format. If you want to format cells that do not contain number or date data, such as legend titles, you can choose a format that that does not apply any specific attributes to the cells. You can also clear a format from a cell.

 How to


To create a numeric data format

1	Click the datasheet.

2	Click Data [image] Format.

3	Choose Numeric from the Format type list box.

4	Choose User defined from the Numeric formats list.

5	In the Type area, enable one the following check boxes:

•	Currency

•	Thousands

•	Percent

•	Exponential

7	In the Negative numbers area, enable one of the following options:

•	Minus sign

•	Parentheses

You can also
Adjust the number of decimal digit places to the size of the cell	Enable the Floating check box.
Choose the number of decimal digit places that display in a cell	Type a value in the Digits box.
 Note

•	You can preview a numeric format in the Numeric preview preview window.

 Related topics


To format dates

1	Click a datasheet.

2	Click Data [image] Format.

3	Choose Date from the Format type list box.

4	Choose a format from the Date/time formats list.

 Related topics


To create a custom date format

1	Click a datasheet.

2	Click Data [image] Format.

3	Choose Date from the Format type list box.

4	Click Custom.

5	In the Custom date/time format dialog box, click the Day tab.

6	Choose a day code from the Day codes list.

7	Click Insert.

You can also
Create a custom month format	Click the Month tab. Choose a month code from the Month codes list. Click Insert.
Create a custom year format	Click the Year tab. Choose a year code from the Year codes list. Click Insert.
Create a custom time format	Click the Time tab. Choose a time code from the Time codes list. Click Insert.
 Notes

•	The date format you create displays in the Date/Time sample preview window at the bottom of the Custom date/time format dialog box.

•	When you enter two-digit years (dd/mm/yy) in a datasheet, 00 to 50 corresponds to the years 2000 to 2050, and 51 to 99 corresponds to the years 1951 to 1999. For example, the two-digit year 26 corresponds to the year 2026. The two-digit year 61 corresponds to the year 1961.

 Related topics


To format to cells not containing numbers or dates

1	Click a datasheet.

2	Click Data [image] Format.

3	Choose General from the Format type list box.

 Related topics


To clear a format from a cell

1	Select a cell.

2	Click Edit [image] Clear.

3	Enable the Format option.

 Related topics


Working with rows and columns

You can insert or delete rows and columns in a datasheet. When you insert a row, it is placed above the selected cell. When you insert a column, it is inserted to the left of the selected cell.

Once you have entered data in columns and rows, you can choose to exclude it. This allows you to skip data without having to delete it. The excluded cells are greyed in the datasheet.

If you decide that you need to use the data you excluded, you can include it. You can also modify the common width for all columns in a datasheet by specifying how many characters wide to make the columns.

 How to


To insert a row or column

1	Click a datasheet cell.

2	Click Edit [image] Insert.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Row

•	Column

4	Type a value in the Number to insert box.

 Related topics


To delete a row or column

1	Click a datasheet cell.

2	Click Edit [image] Delete.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Row

•	Column

4	Type a value in the Number to delete box.

 Related topics


To exclude data

1	Click a datasheet cell.

2	Click Data [image] Exclude row/col.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Row(s)

•	Column(s)

 Note

•	When you exclude rows and columns, you can still change the data they contain.

 Related topics


To include excluded data

1	Click a datasheet cell.

2	Click Data [image] Include row/col.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Row(s)

•	Column(s)

 Related topics


To modify column width

1	Click a datasheet.

2	Click Data [image] Column width.

3	Type a value in the Width box.

 Related topics


Working with data ranges

You can sort the data in the rows and columns of datasheets from top to bottom and from left to right, or in ascending or descending order. Numeric values display first, text values display second, and empty cells display last.

You can also transpose data ranges, which switches the order of the data in rows and columns. The examples in the table below show data before and after transposing.

Before	After
1 2 3	1 4 7
4 5 6	2 5 8
7 8 9	3 6 9
You can display statistics about data in a row, a column, such as the average or standard deviation of data found in a row or column.

 How to


To sort a data range within rows

1	On a datasheet, select the rows you want to sort.

2	Click Data [image] Sort.

3	In the Direction area, enable the Left to right option.

4	Type a value in the Key row box.

5	In the Order area, enable one of the following options:

•	Ascending

•	Descending

 Note

•	To sort data including the legend and labels headings, you must select the entire row or column, including the legend and labels.

 Related topics


To sort a data range within columns

1	On a datasheet, select the columns you want to sort.

2	Click Data [image] Sort.

3	In the Direction area, enable the Top to bottom option.

4	Type a value in the Key column box.

5	In the Order area, enable one of the following options:

•	Ascending

•	Descending

 Note

•	To sort data including the legend and labels headings, you must select the entire row or column, including the legend and labels.

 Related topics


To transpose a data range

1	On a datasheet, select the cells you want to transpose.

2	Click Edit [image] Cut.

3	Select the cell where you want transposed data to begin.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste transposed.

 Note

•	When you transpose data, the selection should contain the same number of rows and columns. If you select more of one than the other, the larger of the two numbers would be taken and the data would be transposed as if you had specified that number of rows and columns. If that happens, the transposed data may overwrite other data in a datasheet.

 Related topics


To display statistics about a data range

1	Click a datasheet cell.

2	Click Data [image] Statistics.

3	In the Display statistics for area, enable one of the following options:

•	Row

•	Column

 Related topics


Using formulas and number fills

You can apply formulas while working in a datasheet. You can perform several functions that are found in spreadsheet programs such as Quattro Pro. For a list of the available formulas, see "Reference: Working with datasheets." The results are reflected in the data chart. For example, you can use functions to calculate cumulative totals and averages and to project future data values.

When creating data charts in Corel Presentations, you can fit data to a curve and forecast trend lines, curves, and regression types. Forecasting allows you to predict values such as future population growth, sales potential, and future costs.

By using a 3-D chart, you can create a linear regression trend chart, which is useful for predicting such things as future costs or sales potential. A statistical function and the data plotted on a chart are used to calculate a trend line. For example, you can use a company's current sales results to forecast future sales.

You can update calculated values after you make changes in a row or column that has a formula applied to it.

The cells in a datasheet can be filled automatically. Each row in the datasheet is one of three series. The Date series begins with the start date and is multiplied by the step number. For example, if the step number is 3, and the date step is a week, the interval is 3 weeks. The Linear series begins with the start value and adds the step number to create each new number in the series. For example, if the step number is 3, the difference between each cell in the fill is 3. The Growth series begins with the start number and is multiplied by the step number to create each new number in the series. For example, if the step number is 3, the interval is a multiple of 3: 1, 3, 9, 27.

You can fill all selected datasheet cells, including multiple columns and rows.

 How to


To add a formula to rows

1	Click a cell that contains data.

2	Click Data [image] Formulas.

3	In the Use data found in the same area, enable the Row option.

4	Choose a formula from the Use the function list.

If you choose Moving average from the Use the function list, type a value in the Average before, after box.

5	In the Calculate the area, type column letters in the Column(s) box.

6	In the Place the results in area, type a column letter in the Column box.

 Tips

•	If you are working with a scatter chart, use 0 as the results row to indicate the variable row.

•	You can also add a formula to columns by enabling the Column option.

 Related topics


To add a curve fit formula to rows

1	Click a datasheet cell.

2	Click Data [image] Formulas.

3	In the Use data found in the same area, enable the Row option.

4	Choose one of the following formulas from the Use the function list:

•	Fit exponential

•	Fit log

•	Fit polynomial, and type a value in the Order of curve fit box

•	Fit power

5	In the Calculate the area, type column letters in the Column(s) box.

6	In the Place the results in area, type a column letter in the Column box.

7	Type a value in the Number to forecast box.

 Tip

•	You can also add a curve fit formula to columns by enabling the Column option.

 Related topics


To create a linear regression trend chart for rows by using a 3-D bar chart

1	Click a datasheet cell in a blank row.

2	Click Data [image] Formulas.

3	Choose Fit linear from the Use the function list.

4	In the Use data found in the same area, enable the Row option.

5	In the Calculate the area, type column letters in the Column(s) box.

6	In the Place the results in area, type a column letter in the Column box.

7	Type a value in the Number to forecast box.

This value specifies a value to predict future values. For example, if you have plotted data for each financial quarter, typing 2 forecasts data for two future quarters.

 Notes

•	You can add additional labels, a chart title, and a legend to the datasheet for the forecasting results column.

•	You can also create a linear regression trend chart for columns by enabling the Column option.

 Related topics


To recalculate formulas

•	Click Data [image] Recalculate.

 Related topics


To fill cells with numbers automatically

1	Select two or more datasheet cells.

2	Click Data [image] Fill.

3	In the Direction area, enable one of the following options:

•	Rows

•	Columns

4	In the Type area, enable one of the following options:

•	Linear

•	Growth

•	Date, and choose a date/time interval from the list box beside it

5	In the Values area, type a value for the series in the Start box.

6	In the Step box, type a value to indicate the rate of increase for the series.

 Notes

•	When you enter two-digit years (dd/mm/yy) in a datasheet, 00 to 50 corresponds to the years 2000 to 2050, and 51 to 99 corresponds to the years 1951 to 1999. For example, the two-digit year 26 corresponds to the year 2026. The two-digit year 61 corresponds to the year 1961.

•	Dates entered in a datasheet are stored as numbers. For example, if you typed 1/1/1900, the number 1 would represent that date in the datasheet.

 Tip

•	You can specify negative values if you want a descending series.

 Related topics


Reference: Working with datasheets

You can use formulas in a datasheet to calculate the data you include. You can also import different spreadsheet formats into Corel Presentations when you want to include additional information in a data sheet.

 How to


Corel Presentations import spreadsheet formats

You can import the following spreadsheet formats into Corel Presentations:

•	Corel Quattro Pro for Windows 95 (versions 7 [image] 9)

•	Corel Quattro Pro for Windows (versions 5 [image] 6)

•	Quattro Pro (versions 2 [image] 4)

•	Lotus for Windows (versions 4.0 [image] 5.0)

•	Lotus 1-2-3 (versions 2.01 [image] 3.1)

•	Microsoft Excel (versions 2.1 [image] 5.0)

•	PlanPerfect (versions 3.0 [image] 5.1)

 Related topics


Available datasheet formulas

The following table contains a list of formulas you can use.

Formula	Result
Absolute value	Takes the value of the number in each cell in a single row or column without regard to its sign. If the data is 3, -4, -2, the absolute values are 3, 4, 2.
Average	Adds all data values in a row or column, and divides that number by the number of data cells. For example, 1,2,3, 1:3, or 1...3 adds the values in rows 1 through 3 and divides them by the number of cells containing data in those rows. A:C, A..C, or A,B,C averages values in columns A through C.
Cosine	Takes the cosine of each value in one row or column. The cosine is the ratio between the adjacent side and the hypotenuse of a right triangle expressed as an angle in radians.
Cumulative total	Adds the values in a row or column, and adds that total to the next row or column, thus taking a running total of one or more rows or columns. For example, 1,2,3, 1:3, or 1...3 totals row 1, and adds that total to the totals for rows 2 and 3. A:C, A..C, or A,B,C totals columns A through C.
Difference	Subtracts one cell from the previous cell by row or by column. The difference for the first cell in a row or column will always be 0, because there is no previous cell.
Maximum	Compares cell values in a row or column with corresponding cell values in the next row(s) or column(s) to find the largest value. For example, 1,2,3 displays the largest value in rows 1 through 3, while A:C or A..C displays the largest value in columns A through C.
Minimum	Compares cell values in a row or column with corresponding cell values in the next row(s) or column(s) to find the smallest value. For example, 1,2,3 displays the smallest value in rows 1 through 3, while A:C or A..C displays the smallest value in columns A through C.
Moving average	Smoothes the curve of data by charting a moving average. Moving average adds the value of each cell to the values of the cells surrounding it, and divides by the number of cells. You specify how many cells before and after each cell to include in the moving average. For example, if you type 2, the moving average for each cell will be the average of the current cell and the two cells on each side (a total of five cells). If you type 1,2, the formula will include one cell before and two cells after the current one in the formula.
None	Deletes a formula in a row or column, leaving only the data.
Percent of total	Calculates the cell value as a percentage of all cells in a row or column. The resulting percentages are expressed as decimal numbers.
Sine	Finds the sine of each value in a row or column. A sine is the ratio between the opposite side and the hypotenuse of a right triangle built on the angle expressed as an angle in radians.
Sum	Adds all the values in two or more rows or columns. For example, 1,2,3, 1:3, or 1...3 adds all the values in rows 1 through 3, while A:C, A..C, or A,B,C adds the values in columns A through C.
 Related topics


Available datasheet fit formulas

The following table contains the fit formulas available for charts.

Fit formula	Result
Fit exponential	Fits the data in a row or column to an exponential curve: ln(y)=a+bx.
Fit linear	Fits the data in a row or column to a straight line: y=a+bx.
Fit log	Fits the data in a row or column to a logarithmic curve: y=a+b(ln(x)).
Fit polynomial	Fits the data in a row or column to polynomial curves: y=c0+c1x+c2x²+cn*xª (where a is the order of the fit). The higher the order (any number up to one less than the number of data points), the more curvature is allowed. This formula provides the most accurate and close fit for inconsistent and fluctuating data. Fit polynomial is useful for filling in the unknown y-axis data points along a curve but is not as useful for forecasting.
Fit power	Fits the data in a row or column to a power curve: ln(y)=a+b*ln(x).
 Related topics


Changing data chart properties

You can change the look of data charts in Corel Presentations.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	changing axis labels, titles, and tick options

•	changing grid properties

•	changing frame properties

•	changing data chart perspective

•	changing title, label, and legend properties

•	changing data series properties


Changing axis labels, titles, and tick options

Changing axis properties lets you customize data charts. You can change the scale for a y-axis and specify how labels appear on an axis. You can also display an axis title and change its font and its orientation. As well, you can change the tick mark options for an axis, which allows you to modify how to display the short vertical lines that separate the major divisions of an axis.

 How to


To change the y-axis scale

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axis, and click one of the following:

•	Primary y

•	Secondary y

3	Click the Scale/labels tab.

4	In the Scaling method area, enable one of the following options:

•	Linear [image] displays values in even increments

•	Logarithmic [image] increases the numbers on the axis exponentially

5	Type a value in the Label scale factor box.

 Note

•	You must have a data series attached to the secondary y-axis to change its properties. For information about data series, see "To create a data series."

 Tip

•	You can also change the y-axis scale by clicking the Y-axis button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To change axis label font properties

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axis, and click one of the following:

•	X

•	Primary y

•	Secondary y

3	Click the Label font tab.

4	Choose a font face from the Face list.

5	Choose a font size from the Size list box.

6	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

7	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Bold

•	Underline

•	Italic

 Tip

•	You can also change axis label font properties by clicking the X-axis or the Y-axis button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To display an axis title

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axis, and click one of the following:

•	X

•	Primary y

•	Secondary y

3	Click the Title options tab.

4	Enable the Display title check box.

5	Type an axis title in the Display title box.

 Tip

•	You can also display an axis title by clicking the X-axis or the Y-axis button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To change axis title font properties

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axis, and click one of the following:

•	X

•	Primary y

•	Secondary y

3	Click the Title font tab.

4	Choose a font face from the Face list.

5	Choose a font size from the Size list box.

6	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

7	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Bold

•	Underline

•	Italic

 Tip

•	You can also change axis title font properties by clicking the X-axis or the Y-axis button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To change axis title orientation

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axis, and click one of the following:

•	X

•	Primary y

•	Secondary y

3	Click the Title options tab.

4	Click one of the following icons:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

 Tip

•	You can also change axis title orientation by clicking the X-axis or the Y-axis button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To change tick display options

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axis, and click one of the following:

•	X

•	Primary y

•	Secondary y

3	Click the Tick options tab.

4	In the Display major ticks area, enable one of the following options:

•	Out [image] displays major tick marks outside the grid line

•	In [image] displays major tick marks inside the grid line

•	Both [image] displays major tick marks overlapping the grid line on both sides

•	None [image] displays no major tick marks

5	In the Display minor ticks area, enable one of the following options:

•	Out [image] displays minor tick marks outside the grid line

•	In [image] displays minor tick marks inside the grid line

•	Both [image] displays minor tick marks overlapping the grid line on both sides

•	None [image] displays no minor tick marks

 Tip

•	You can also change tick display options by clicking the X-axis or the Y-axis button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


Changing grid properties

Grid lines represent value increments in a chart and are displayed parallel to the x-axis and y-axis. You can control how grid lines display in a data chart. You can also specify the number of minor grid lines that fall between each pair of major grid lines and the number of major grid lines you want for each value increment. You can also choose the grid properties for a secondary y-axis.

The following image shows 1) tick marks, 2) minor grid lines, and 3) major grid lines.

 How to


To change grid line attributes

1	Double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Grids.

3	Click the Line attributes tab.

4	In the Vertical grids area, choose a line style from the Major grids list box.

5	Open the major grids Color picker, and click a color.

6	In the Horizontal grids area, choose a line style from the Major grids list box.

7	Open the major grids Color picker, and click a color.

 Tips

•	You can change the line attributes of minor vertical and horizontal grids by choosing a line style from the Minor grids list boxes, and opening the Color pickers and clicking a color.

•	You can also change grid line attributes by clicking the Grids button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To change the number of grid lines

1	Double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Grids.

3	Click the Line ratio tab.

4	In the Major grids area, click a predefined number of major grid lines.

5	In the Minor grids area, click a predefined number of minor grid lines.

 Tips

•	You can also specify how many major grid lines you want for each category by typing a value in the Major grids value box.

•	You can also specify how many minor grid lines you want between major grids by typing a value in the Minor grids value box.

 Related topics


To choose grid properties for a secondary y-axis

1	Double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Grids.

3	Click Secondary (Y2).

4	In the Horizontal grids area, choose a major grid from the Major grids list box.

5	Open the major grids Color picker, and click a color.

6	In the Minor grids area, choose a predefined number of grid lines.

 Tips

•	You can also change the line attributes of minor horizontal grids by choosing a line style from the Minor grids list box, and opening the Color picker and clicking a color.

•	You can also specify how many minor grid lines you want between major grids by typing a value in the Minor grids value box.

 Related topics


Changing frame properties

A chart frame consists of a group of grid lines that can enclose the back, front, left, right, top, and bottom of a data chart. You can control how the frame of a data chart displays. For example, you can select the frame's border width and base height. You can also choose a frame fill. The fill serves as a backdrop for the data chart.

 How to


To choose frame display options

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Frame.

3	Click the Display options tab.

4	Open the Border color picker, and click a color.

5	Type a value in the Border width box.

6	Type a value in the Height of base box.

7	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Front

•	Back

•	Left

•	Right

•	Top

•	Bottom

 Tip

•	If you have entered negative values in the datasheet, you can enable the Display zero baseline check box.

 Related topics


To apply a pattern or gradient fill to a frame

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Frame.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	In the Fill style area, click one of the following icons:

•	Pattern

•	Gradient

5	Open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

7	Click a fill on palette.

 Related topics


To apply a texture or picture fill to a frame

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Frame.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	In the Fill style area, click one of the following icons:

•	Texture

•	Picture

5	Choose a fill category from the Category list box.

6	Click a fill on the palette.

 Related topics


To change the picture fill settings

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart, and click one of the following:

•	Series

•	Data labels

•	Frame

•	Title

•	Subtitle

•	Legend

3	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Fill

•	Box fill

4	In the Fill style area, click Picture.

5	Click Picture settings.

6	In the Picture settings dialog box, enable a layout option.

 Related topics


Changing data chart perspective

You can adjust the viewing angle of a three-dimensional chart.

 How to


To change perspective in a three-dimensional data chart

1	Double-click a 3-D data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Perspective.

3	Type values in any of the following boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

If you want to create 45 degree angles in the chart, enable the Right angle axes check box.

 Tips

•	You can preview the angle selection by using the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to change the selection.

•	You can also change data chart perspective by clicking the Perspective button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


Changing title, label, and legend properties

A data chart can include 1) titles, 2) data labels, and 3) legends, as shown in the following image.

You can change the properties of titles, subtitles, labels, and legends by placing boxes around them, and filling the boxes with a fill pattern, gradient, texture, or picture. You can change the way title and subtitle text looks by adding a fill or an outline, or by positioning it differently in the data chart. You can also adjust the properties of label and legend text font by changing the style, size, color, and appearance.

 How to


To add a box shape to a title or subtitle, a data label, or a legend

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart, and click one of the following:

•	Title

•	Subtitle

•	Data label

•	Legend

3	Click the Box type tab.

4	Disable the No box check box.

5	Click a box shape on the palette.

If you want to add a border to the box shape, disable the No border check box, open the Border color picker, and click a color.

 Related topics


To fill title and subtitle text with a pattern or gradient

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart, and click one of the following:

•	Title

•	Subtitle

3	Click the Text fill tab.

4	In the Fill style area, click one of the following icons:

•	Pattern

•	Gradient

5	Open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

7	Click a fill on the palette.

 Related topics


To fill a title, subtitle, label, or legend box with a pattern or gradient

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart, and click one of the following:

•	Title

•	Subtitle

•	Data labels

•	Legend

3	In the Fill style area, click one of the following icons:

•	Pattern

•	Gradient

4	Open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

5	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

6	Click a fill on the palette.

 Related topics


To fill a title, subtitle, label, or legend box with a texture or picture

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart, and click one of the following:

•	Title

•	Subtitle

•	Data labels

•	Legend

3	Click the Box fill tab.

4	In the Fill style area, click one of the following icons:

•	Texture

•	Picture

5	Choose a category from the Category list box.

6	Click a fill on the palette.

 Tip

•	You can also change the picture fill settings of a box. For information about changing the picture fill settings, see "To change the picture fill settings."

 Related topics


To outline title or subtitle text

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart, and click one of the following:

•	Title

•	Subtitle

3	Click the Text outline tab.

4	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

5	Open the Style picker, and click a line style.

6	Open the Width picker, and click a preset line width.

 Tip

•	You can also specify the line width by typing a value in the Width box.

 Related topics


To change the title position

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Title.

3	Click the Title options tab.

4	In the Position area, enable an option.

 Tip

•	You can also change a subtitle position by clicking Chart, Subtitle, clicking the Subtitle options tab, and enabling an option in the Position area.

 Related topics


To change label font properties

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Data labels.

3	Click the Label font tab.

4	Choose a font from the Face list.

5	Choose a font size from the Size list box.

6	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

7	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Bold

•	Underline

•	Italic

 Related topics


To change legend text font properties

1	Double-click a data chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Legend.

3	Click the Text font tab.

4	Choose a font from the Face list.

5	Choose a font size from the Size list box.

6	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

7	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Bold

•	Underline

•	Italic

 Related topics


Changing data series properties

You can focus attention on important data series by using color, pattern, gradient, texture, or picture fills. You can also use different marker shapes and sizes to better distinguish data series. In addition, you can change the outline of a data series. For example, you can change the width of the outline.

 How to


To fill a data series with a pattern or gradient

1	Double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Series.

3	Click the arrows at the top of the dialog box to select a series.

4	Click the Fill tab.

5	In the Fill style area, click one of the following icons:

•	Pattern

•	Gradient

6	Open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

7	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

8	Click a fill on the palette.

 Related topics


To fill a data series with a texture or picture

1	Double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Series.

3	Click the arrows at the top of the dialog box to select a series.

4	Click the Fill tab.

5	In the Fill style area, click one of the following icons:

•	Texture

•	Picture

6	Choose a fill category from the Category list box.

7	Click a fill on the palette.

 Tip

•	You can also change the picture fill settings of a data series. For information about changing the picture fill settings, see "To change the picture fill settings."

 Related topics


To change data series markers

1	Double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Series.

3	Click the arrows at the top of the dialog box to select a series.

4	Click the Type/Axis tab.

5	In the Series type area, enable the Marker option.

6	In the Marker shape area, click a marker shape.

7	Type a value in the Marker size box.

 Related topics


To change data series outline properties

1	Double-click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Series.

3	Click the arrows at the top of the dialog box to select a series.

4	Click the Outline tab.

5	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Style picker, and click a line style.

7	Open the Width picker, and click a line width.

 Related topics


Internet and electronic publishing

You can use Corel Presentations to publish slides to the World Wide Web.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	publishing slides as HTML documents

•	publishing slide show text as an XML document

•	publishing to Portable Document Format (PDF)

•	sending slide shows to other applications


Publishing slides as HTML documents

You can publish Corel Presentations slide shows as HTML documents, so that you can publish them to the World Wide Web, using Corel Internet Publisher.

You must specify which graphic format to apply by converting the slide show to GIF, JPEG, or Portable Network Format (PNG) format. You can also use the Show It! plug-in or the Flash(tm) format (.Swf files) to publish a slide show in HTML format, complete with animation, transition, sound, and video support. When you use the Show It! plug-in, each slide is converted to a .Pqi file, which stores the required support.

 How to


To publish a slide show as an HTML document

1	Click File [image] Internet Publisher.

The Corel Internet Publisher wizard starts.

2	Click Next.

3	Click Layout.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	Create a new layout

•	Use an existing layout, and choose a layout from the list

5	Choose the formatting options for the slide show by following the instructions in the Internet Publisher wizard.

6	Click Finish.

If you want to save the slide show layout for future use, in the Save layout dialog box, type a filename in the box, and click Save.

You can also
Preview an existing layout	In the Internet Publisher wizard, click Layout. Choose a layout option from the list. Click View layout.
Delete an existing layout	In the Internet Publisher wizard, click Layout. Choose a layout option from the list. Click Delete layout.
 Related topics


To specify a graphic format for an HTML document

1	Click File [image] Internet Publisher.

The Corel Internet Publisher wizard starts.

2	Click Graphic type, and enable one of the following graphic format options:

•	GIF [image] Graphics Interchange Format

•	JPEG [image] Joint Photographic Experts Group, and type a value in the Compression box

•	PNG [image] Portable Network Graphic

•	Show It!

•	Flash

 Note

•	You can download the Show It! plug-in from the Corel Web site at www.corel.com. You can download the Flash(tm) plug-in from the Macromedia® Web site. You can download both plug-ins directly through Corel Internet Publisher.

•	Show It! publishes an entire slide show in HTML, complete with animation, transitions, sound, and video support. Flash also publishes the slide show in HTML with animation, transition and sound support. However, Flash does not support OLE objects, EPS objects, MIDI, CD, or compressed .Wav files, movies, a SpeedLink, or SpeedKeys. Publishing a slide show to the GIF, JPEG, or PNG format preserves graphics, but these formats do not support animation, transitions, or video.

 Related topics


Publishing slide show text as an XML document

You can publish Corel Presentations slide show text as an XML document so that you can reuse the text, including the text found in organizational charts. The text inserted on a slide background or layout layer is not published to XML. As well, the text formatting is not preserved.

The XML document generated by Corel Presentations is based on the Corel Presentations DTD (prxml1_0.dtd). The DTD is stored in the X:\Program Files\Corel\WordPerfect Office 11\XML\DTD\PR DTD 1.0 folder, where "X" indicates the drive where you installed WordPerfect Office. For more information about the DTD, see "Corel Presentations DTD."

 How to


To publish slide show text as an XML document

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] XML.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the XML document.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box.

4	Click Save.

 Related topics


Publishing to Portable Document Format (PDF)

Publishing a slide show as an electronic document in Portable Document Format (PDF) preserves the typography, images, graphics, color, and formatting of the original publication. PDF also allows you flexibility to specify text formatting, color model, and compression options. PDF files are platform-independent and can be edited by Windows and Macintosh users with the Adobe Acrobat Writer, and they can be viewed, shared, and printed using the Adobe Acrobat Reader. The Adobe Acrobat Reader is included with Corel Presentations and can be installed from the WordPerfect Office CD.

You can specify text formatting options by publishing a PDF document as text only, excluding graphics, or by publishing text in graphic format. Publishing text in graphic format reduces the possibility of font variances on printers or different computer systems, but it also increases the complexity, and possibly the size, of a PDF file. For example, you can embed up to base 14 Windows fonts used in the original document and convert TrueType fonts to Type 1 fonts when you publish to PDF.

You can reduce the size of a PDF file by compressing its bitmaps with JPEG (*.jpg), Lempel-Ziv-Welch (*.lzw), or ZIP (*.zip) compression. JPEG compression can significantly compress files and results in some data loss, but not enough to significantly affect the final result of your work. Lempel-Ziv-Welch and ZIP are lossless compression techniques that compress files without data loss. Essentially, they provide a higher quality resolution at a lower compression factor.

You can also format the document information in PDF format.

You can apply color models to optimize a PDF file for specific mediums. For example, CMYK produces the best results in color processing, RGB is used for publishing to the World Wide Web, and grayscale produces the smallest PDF of the three methods.

You can also include imbedded files in a PDF file.

 How to


To install Adobe Acrobat Reader

1	Insert the WordPerfect Office CD into the CD drive.

The WordPerfect Office Setup wizard starts.

2	In the Setup wizard, click Adobe Acrobat Reader setup.

3	Follow the instructions in the Adobe Acrobat Reader setup program.

 Related topics


To publish a slide show to PDF

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] PDF.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Type a file path and filename in the Filename box.

4	In the Export range area, enable one of the following options:

•	Full document

•	Current view

•	Selection

•	Slides, and type a number in the box beside it

•	Speakers notes, and type a number in the box beside it

•	Audience notes, and type a number in the box beside it

•	Handouts, and type a number in the box beside it

5	Choose a compatible PDF application from the Compatibility list box.

6	Type the author's name in the Author box.

7	Type any keywords in the Keywords box.

8	Choose a PDF style from the PDF style list box.

 Related topics


To specify text formatting options in PDF

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click the Objects tab.

3	In the Text and fonts area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Export all text as curves

•	Embed fonts in document, and type a value in the Under % of charset box

•	Embed base 14 fonts

•	Convert True Type to Type 1

•	Subset fonts, and type a value in the Under % of charset box

 Note

•	If you enable the Export all text as curves check box, you cannot enable any font check boxes.

 Related topics


To compress bitmaps in PDF

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click the Objects tab.

3	Choose a compression type from the Compression type list box.

If you want to compress text and line art, enable the Compress text and line art check box.

 Tip

•	You can change the quality level of the JPEG compression type by moving the Quality factor slider.

 Related topics


To format the document information in PDF

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click the Document tab.

3	In the Bookmarks area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Include hyperlinks

•	Generate bookmarks

•	Generate thumbnails

4	In the On start, display area, enable one of the following options:

•	Page only

•	Full screen

If you enabled the Generate bookmarks check box or the Generate thumbnails check box, you can also enable the Bookmarks option or the Thumbnails option.

5	In the Permissions area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Allow printing

•	Allow document changes

•	Allow notes and form field changes

•	Allow copying text/graphics

You can also
Apply password protection to opening a document	Type a password in the Open document box. Retype the password in the Confirm box.
Apply password protection to changing a document	Type a password in the Change security box. Retype the password in the Confirm box.
 Related topics


To apply color model formatting in PDF

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	Choose a color model from the Output all objects as list box.

 Related topics


To include embedded files in a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	Enable the Embedded files check box.

4	Click Browse.

5	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

6	Type a filename in the Filename box.

7	Click Open.

 Related topics


Sending slide shows to other applications

Using your email program, you can email a slide show. You can also send slide shows and speaker notes to the installed WordPerfect application, choosing page layout and speaker note positions prior to sending the slide show.

 How to


To email a slide show

1	Click File [image] Send to [image] Mail.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Current slide only

•	Entire slide show

3	Click OK.

4	Select a profile by using your email client, or set email options according to your email system.

5	Send the email.

 Note

•	If you do not have an email program properly installed on your computer, you cannot email slide shows.

 Related topics


To send a slide show to WordPerfect

1	Click File [image] Send to [image] WordPerfect.

2	In the Page layout area, enable one of the following options:

•	One slide per page

•	Multiple slides per page

•	Outline

3	In the Page options area, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Header information, and type text in the box beside it

•	Page numbering

4	In the Notes options area, enable one of the following options:

•	Include speaker notes from the slide show

•	Make a place for me to type notes

•	Print lines for audience notes

5	Click Finish.

 Note

•	If you do not have WordPerfect installed on your computer, you cannot send a slide show to it.

 Related topics


Corel Presentations DTD

The following table describes the elements and attributes contained in the Corel Presentations DTD (prxml1_0.dtd). It also describes the slide show text that is stored within the elements.

Element/Attribute	Description	Contains
Slideshow (element)	The Slideshow element is the root element and has one child named Slides.
Slides (element)	The Slides element is a child of Slideshow and is the parent of TitleSlide and Slide.
TitleSlide (element)	The TitleSlide element is a child of Slides and is the parent of BulletedList and TextBlock.	The TitleSlide element contains all the text elements inserted in a title slide.
Slide (element)	The Slide element is a child of Slides and is the parent of BulletedList and TextBlock.	The Slide element contains all the text elements inserted in a slide.
BulletedList (element)	The BulletedList element is a child of TitleSlide, Slide, and SubList.	The BulletedList element contains bulleted list text. A bulleted list can contain different levels. See the SubList element.
SubList (element)	The SubList element is a child of the BulletedList element. It can also be parent to the BulletedList element. This enables bulleted list levels.	The SubList element contains bulleted list level text.
TextBlock (element)	The TextBlock element is a child of TitleSlide and Slide.	The TextBlock element contains text contained in slide text boxes, title boxes, and subtitle boxes. This includes paragraphs of text.
TITLE (attribute)	TITLE identifies the content type of TextBlock.	Determines the text contained in the TextBlock element is title text.
SUBTITLE (attribute)	SUBTITLE identifies the content type of TextBlock.	Determines the text contained in the TextBlock element is subtitle text.
BODY (attribute)	BODY identifies the content type of TextBlock.	Determines the text contained in the TextBlock element is body text.
Text (element)	The Text element is a child of TextBlock, BulletedList, and Sublist.	The Text element contains slide text box text that consists of a single paragraph.
Para (element)	The Para element is a child of TextBlock, BulletedList, and Sublist.	The Para element contains slide text box text that consists of multiple paragraphs.
 Note

•	The text found in organization charts is contained in TextBlock elements.

 Related topics


Working with bitmaps in Corel Presentations

You can create bitmaps and add them to slide shows and drawings.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	scanning bitmaps

•	creating and saving bitmaps

•	modifying bitmaps

•	enhancing bitmaps

•	using special effects

•	converting bitmaps and vector objects

•	resampling bitmaps


Scanning bitmaps

You can scan an image into Corel Presentations. To do so, you must have a scanner with a 32-bit TWAIN-compatible driver (Twain_32.dll) installed. TWAIN is a program that allows you to scan an image directly into an application. You can refer to the manufacturer's manual for detailed feature and configuration information.

 How to


To install a scanner

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Select image source.

2	Choose an image scanner.

3	Click Select.

 Related topics


To scan a bitmap

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Acquire image.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Page bounded [image] scales down the image to fit within the page boundaries

•	Area bounded [image] scales the image to fit within a defined area

•	Fixed size [image] scales the image to match both the width and height of a defined area

 Note

•	Consult your scanner software documentation for instructions on manipulating the image.

 Related topics


Creating and saving bitmaps

You can create new, original bitmaps using the Bitmap Editor. You can also save a new bitmap.

You can save an existing bitmap in another bitmap format.

 How to


To create a bitmap

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Bitmap.

2	Drag to define the bitmap frame.

3	Use the bitmap tools in the Bitmap Editor to create a bitmap.

4	Click File [image] Close Bitmap Editor.

 Related topics


To save a bitmap

1	Click a bitmap.

2	Click File [image] Save.

3	Enable the Selected items option.

4	Click OK.

5	In the Save as dialog box, choose the drive and folder where you want to save the bitmap.

6	Type a filename in the Filename box.

7	Click Save.

 Note

•	.Wpg (WordPerfect graphic) is the default bitmap format.

 Related topics


To save a bitmap to another bitmap format

1	Click a bitmap.

2	Click File [image] Save as.

3	Enable the Selected items option.

4	Click OK.

5	In the Save dialog box, choose the drive and folder where you want to save the bitmap.

6	Type a name in the Filename box.

7	Choose a graphic type from the File type list box.

8	In the Export dialog box, choose a predefined size from the Predefined sizes list box.

If you want to specify the size of the bitmap, type values for the width and height of the image in the Width and Height boxes.

You can also
Choose a unit of measure	Choose a unit of measure from the Units of measure list box.
Choose a resolution	Choose a resolution from the Resolution list box.
Specify a color option	Enable a color option.
Display a .gif file in stages in a Web browser	Enable the Interlaced check box.
Apply the standard transparent color to a .gif file	Enable the No transparency check box.
Compress a .bmp file so it will take up less memory space	Enable the Compressed check box.
 Related topics


Modifying bitmaps

Modifying bitmaps in Corel Presentations can be done with precision. You can refine small details, make drastic changes, and intensify effects on the bitmap as a whole. You can select a specific area of the bitmap to modify.

You can size the frame around the graphic, which is useful if you want to eliminate white space around a bitmap.

The following illustration shows the sizing of a frame around a bitmap by dragging a handle.

Zooming in on a bitmap lets you perform editing tasks at a precise level of magnification. You can then zoom out to view the entire image and the changes that you have made.

The following illustration shows that you can view bitmaps in 1) full size, 2) actual size, and 3) zoomed view.

You can also remove a bitmap from a document and erase parts of a bitmap.

 How to


To select an area of a bitmap

1	Double-click a bitmap.

2	Click Edit [image] Select area.

3	Drag to select an area of the bitmap.

 Related topics


To size the frame around a bitmap

To	Do the following
Size the frame around a bitmap	Double-click the bitmap, and drag the side or corner handles to resize the frame.
Size the frame around a rotated or skewed bitmap	Click Tools [image] Convert to bitmap. Click OK. Double-click the bitmap, and drag the side or corner handles to resize the frame.
 Note

•	Increasing the size of the frame around a bitmap does not alter the bitmap itself; however, moving any part of the bitmap outside of the resized frame will delete that part when you close the Bitmap Editor window and return to the drawing window.

 Related topics


To zoom a bitmap

1	Double-click a bitmap.

2	Click View [image] Zoom.

 Note

•	A check mark beside Zoom indicates that the bitmap is zoomed.

 Related topics


To remove a bitmap

1	Double-click a bitmap.

2	Click Edit [image] Clear.

 Related topics


To erase parts of a bitmap

1	Double-click a bitmap.

2	Click Insert [image] Eraser.

3	Click Format [image] Brush.

4	In the Brush attributes dialog box, choose a brush shape from the Brush shape list box.

5	Type a value in the Brush width box.

6	Drag to erase any part of the bitmap.

 Note

•	When you erase parts of a bitmap, they are replaced with the transparent color that you specify. For information about selecting a transparent color, see "To select a transparent color for a bitmap."

 Tip

•	You can also erase a selected area of a bitmap by clicking Edit [image] Select area, dragging to select an area of a bitmap, and clicking Edit [image] Erase selection.

 Related topics


Enhancing bitmaps

While you can create original artwork for slides and drawings, you can also enhance bitmaps that you have inserted into a slide show or drawing from an external source.

You can air brush a bitmap, which sprays a selected fill color in a bitmap area. You can also paint a specific area of a bitmap.

You can fill the complete area of a bitmap.

You can copy and apply a unique color in a bitmap as well as selectively replace a color in a bitmap. In addition, you can select or disable a transparent color for a bitmap.

You can selectively replace a color in a bitmap. You can also set a transparent color for a bitmap and disable a transparent color.

 How to


To air brush a bitmap

1	Double-click a bitmap.

2	Click Insert [image] Air brush.

3	Click Format [image] Brush.

4	In the Brush attributes dialog box, choose a brush shape from the Brush shape list box.

5	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Brush width

•	Air brush density

6	Click OK.

7	Open the Foreground fill picker on the tool palette, and click a color.

8	Open the Background fill picker on the tool palette, and click a color.

 Tips

•	You can also choose a brush shape by opening the Bitmap brush shape picker on the property bar and clicking a brush shape.

•	You can also adjust the air brush density by opening the Air brush density picker on the property bar and clicking a number.

 Related topics


To paint a specific area of a bitmap

1	Double-click a bitmap.

2	Click Insert [image] Paint brush.

3	Click Format [image] Brush.

4	In the Brush attributes dialog box, choose a brush shape from the Brush shape list box.

5	Type a value in the Brush width box.

6	Click OK.

7	Open the Fill Pattern picker on the tool palette, and click a pattern.

8	Open the following pickers on the tool palette, and click a color:

•	Foreground fill

•	Background fill

9	Click the bitmap.

 Tips

•	You can also choose a brush shape by opening the Bitmap brush shape picker on the property bar and clicking a brush shape.

•	You can also adjust the brush width by opening the Bitmap brush size picker on the property bar and clicking a number.

 Related topics


To paint the complete area of a bitmap

1	Double-click a bitmap.

2	Click Insert [image] Flood fill.

3	Open the Fill pattern picker on the tool palette, and click a pattern.

4	Open the Foreground fill picker on the tool palette, and click a color.

5	Open the Background fill picker on the tool palette, and click a color.

6	Click the bitmap.

 Note

•	The Flood fill tool replaces only the colored regions of a bitmap. A colored region is a group of connecting pixels that share the same color.

 Related topics


To copy and apply a unique color in a bitmap

1	Double-click a bitmap.

2	Click Insert [image] Pickup color.

3	Click a color in the bitmap.

The color you choose displays in the Foreground fill picker on the tool palette.

4	Use one of the following tools to apply the copied color to bitmap:

•	Paint brush

•	Air brush

•	Flood fill

 Note

•	Some colors are a blend of different color pixels. The color you pick up depends on what pixel the pointer is on when you click the bitmap.

 Related topics


To selectively replace a color in a bitmap

1	Double-click a bitmap.

2	Click Insert [image] Selective replace.

3	Click Format [image] Brush.

4	In the Brush attributes dialog box, choose a brush shape from the Brush shape list box.

5	Type a value in the Brush width box, and click OK.

6	Click Insert [image] Pickup color.

7	Click a color in the bitmap.

The color you choose displays in the Foreground fill picker on the tool palette.

8	Open the Background fill picker on the tool palette, and click a color.

9	Click the bitmap where you want to replace the color.

 Tips

•	You can also choose a brush shape by opening the Bitmap brush shape picker on the property bar and clicking a brush shape.

•	You can also adjust the brush width by opening the Bitmap brush size picker on the property bar and clicking a number.

 Related topics


To select a transparent color for a bitmap

1	Double-click a bitmap.

2	Right-click, and click Edit.

3	Click Format [image] Set transparent color.

4	Disable the No transparent color check box.

5	Click a color on the palette.

 Related topics


To disable a transparent color on a bitmap

1	Double-click a bitmap.

2	Click Format [image] Set transparent color.

3	Enable the No transparent color check box.

 Related topics


Using special effects

Corel Presentations includes a variety of special effects that you can add to bitmaps.

You can apply the following special effects to enhance an entire bitmap or a specific area that you have selected; Blur, Brightness, Contrast, Emboss, Equalize, Mosaic, Rain, Saturation, Sharpen, Smooth, Spike removal, Stereogram, Trace contours, and Wind.

 How to


To apply a special effect to a bitmap

1	Double-click a bitmap.

2	Click Edit [image] Select area.

3	Drag to select an area of the bitmap.

4	Click Tools [image] Special effects.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Full image [image] applies the special effect to the entire bitmap

•	Inside area [image] applies the special effect inside the selected area

•	Outside area [image] applies the special effect outside the selected area

6	Choose a special effect from the Effects list.

If you want to preview the effect, click Apply and view the effect in the After preview window.

 Note

•	If you increase the Mosaic effect by more than 10%, the bitmap will disappear.

 Related topics


Converting bitmaps and vector objects

Corel Presentations uses two types of graphic formats: bitmap and vector. Bitmaps are made of individual dots, called pixels, that are arranged and colored differently to form a pattern. Increasing the size of a bitmap increases individual pixels, which makes lines and shapes appear jagged. Reducing the size of a bitmap distorts the original image because pixels are removed to reduce the image size. Because a bitmap is a collection of pixels, you cannot change the size, shape, or location of individual pixels. You can, however, apply effects to the entire image.

Vector objects, such as clipart images, are a series of points joined by lines. Graphical elements in a vector file are self-contained entities with properties, such as color, shape, outline, size, and position on the screen, included in its definition. You can move and change the properties of a vector object repeatedly, while maintaining its original clarity and crispness and without affecting other objects in the image.

You can convert bitmap images to vector graphics and vector images into bitmap images.

 How to


To convert a vector object to a bitmap

1	Click a vector object.

2	Click Tools [image] Convert to bitmap.

3	Click Convert.

 Related topics


To convert a bitmap to a vector object

1	Click a bitmap.

2	Click Tools [image] Trace bitmap.

 Note

•	Converting complex bitmaps, such as photographs and grayscale images, is not recommended.

{bmct TIcon.bmp) Tip

•	You can also convert a bitmap to a vector object by right-clicking the bitmap and clicking Trace bitmap.

 Related topics


Resampling bitmaps

You can resample, or change the resolution of, bitmaps to improve print quality or reduce memory and file size requirements when you are editing, printing, or saving. For example, you can insert a small bitmap, enlarge it, and then resample it to refine its appearance. The print quality of a bitmap that you have enlarged and resampled will always be high. However, in some cases, sizing a bitmap smaller and resampling it will adversely affect the print quality.

 How to


To resample a bitmap

1	Click a bitmap.

2	Drag the handles to resize the bitmap.

3	Click Tools [image] Resample bitmap.

4	Click Resample.

 Related topics


Inserting equations, symbols, dates, and times into slide shows and drawings

Corel Presentations lets you insert equations, symbols, and the date and time into the slide shows and drawings you create.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	inserting equations

•	inserting symbols

•	inserting dates and times


Inserting equations

You can insert equations into slide shows and drawings. Once the equation is inserted, it is treated as an object. For more information about inserting equations, see "Using Equation Editor."

 How to


To insert an equation

1	Click Insert [image] Equation.

2	Create your equation in the Equation Editor dialog box.

3	Click File [image] Exit and return to.

 Related topics


Inserting symbols

You can insert symbols that are not available on your keyboard, such as phonetic symbols in other alphabets, into slide show and drawing text objects. For information about text objects, see "Working with text in slide shows and drawings."

 How to


To insert a symbol

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Click in the text.

3	Click Insert [image] Symbol.

4	Choose a symbol type or a character set from the Set list box.

5	Choose a symbol from the Symbols list.

6	Click one of the following:

•	Insert [image] inserts the symbol and leaves the Symbols dialog box open

•	Insert and close [image] inserts the symbol and closes the Symbols dialog box

 Related topics


Inserting dates and times

You can insert a number of different date and time formats into a slide show or drawing text object. For information about text objects, see "Working with text in slide shows and drawings." You can also create a custom date and time format to insert.

 How to


To insert the date and time

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Click in the text.

3	Click Insert [image] Date/time.

4	Choose a format from the Date/time formats list.

If you want to keep the date current, enable the Keep the inserted date current check box.

5	Click Insert.

 Related topics


To create a custom date/time format

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Click Insert [image] Date/time.

3	Click New format.

4	Select the text in the Edit date/time format box, and press DELETE.

5	Click the Year tab, choose a code from the Year codes list, and click Insert.

6	Click the Month tab, choose a code from the Month codes list, and click Insert.

7	Click the Day tab, choose a code from the Day codes list, and click Insert.

8	Click the Time tab, choose a code from the Time codes list, and click Insert.

 Related topics


Working with the Master Gallery

A master is a set of layouts and backgrounds. A layout is a slide with preset placeholders for objects such as titles, subtitles, bulleted lists, text, data charts, and organization charts. Each layout has a page format and color scheme that is consistent with the other layouts and backgrounds that are part of a master. A background can include a border, a gradient background, and other related images. Corel Presentations provides a selection of masters to work with in the Master Gallery.

Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For information about customizing a slide show to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

In this section, you'll learn about

•	applying masters to slides

•	applying backgrounds and layouts to slides

•	creating slide show layouts and backgrounds

•	editing, renaming, and deleting the background layer of slides

•	applying different colors and fills to the background layer of slides

•	editing, renaming, and deleting the layout layer of slides

•	adding new masters to the Master Gallery

For more information about working with the Master Gallery, see "Reference: Working with the Master Gallery."


Applying masters to slides

Corel Presentations provides a collection of masters in the Master Gallery. Each master is a set of professionally designed slide backgrounds and layouts that include preset objects, such as titles, bulleted lists, and charts. Choosing a preset layout allows you to concentrate on the content of the slide show, rather than on the format.

The following image shows the Master Gallery.

The masters in the Master Gallery are grouped into categories. You can use a master provided with Corel Presentations in the Master Gallery.

You can also import a master from another location on your computer.

 How to


To use a master in the Master Gallery

1	Click Format [image] Master Gallery.

2	Choose a slide show category from the Category list box.

3	Click a master on the Selected style palette.

 Tip

•	You can also choose a master from the Master Gallery by clicking the Master Gallery button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To import a master from another location

1	Click Format [image] Master Gallery.

2	Click Browse.

3	Choose the drive and folder where the master is stored.

4	Choose a filename.

5	Click Insert.

 Related topics


Applying backgrounds and layouts to slides

When you add a new slide to a slide show, you can apply preset backgrounds and layouts from the Background Gallery and the Layout Gallery. For example, if you want a slideshow with a grayscale or black-and-white look, you can choose one of the printout masters available in the Master Gallery category list.

 How to


To apply a background to a slide

1	Click Format [image] Background Gallery.

2	Click the Appearance tab.

3	In the Backgrounds area, choose a background category from the Category list box.

4	Click a background on the Background palette.

If you want to apply the background to all slides in the slide show, enable the Apply selected background to all slides in slide show check box.

 Note

•	You can add up to 30 different backgrounds to a slide show.

 Tip

•	You can also apply a background that is not in the Category list box by clicking the Browse button and choosing the drive and folder where the background is stored. For example, you can apply clipart as a background.

 Related topics


To apply a layout to a slide

1	Click Format [image] Layout Gallery.

2	Click the Appearance tab.

3	Click a layout on the Layouts palette.

 Note

•	You can add up to 30 different layouts to a slide show.

 Tip

•	You can also apply a layout to a slide by opening the Select layout picker and clicking a layout.

 Related topics


Creating slide show layouts and backgrounds

Creating new slide show layouts and backgrounds is an alternative to applying preset formats. The layout layer of a slide can consist of titles, subtitles, bulleted lists, data charts, and organization charts.

 How to


To create a slide show layout

1	Click Edit [image] Layout layer.

2	Click Insert [image] New layout.

3	Type a layout name in the Name box.

4	Click OK.

5	Insert any objects into the layout.

 Note

•	When you insert a text object, such as a text box or a text line, into a slide show layout, you must type placeholder text in it.

 Related topics


To create a slide show background

1	Click Edit [image] Background layer.

2	Click Insert [image] New background.

3	Type a background name in the Name box.

4	Click OK.

5	Insert any objects into the background.

 Related topics


Editing, renaming, and deleting the background layer of slides

You can customize any of the masters from the Master Gallery by editing the background layers, which determine the overall color and size of slides. You can also rename and delete a background layer.

 How to


To edit the background layer of a slide

1	Click Edit [image] Background layer.

2	Click Format [image] Background Gallery.

3	Choose a background category from the Category list box.

4	Click a background on the palette.

If you want to change the background layer without affecting the objects within it, enable the Keep current graphic objects with the new background check box.

 Related topics


To rename the background layer of a slide

1	Click Edit [image] Background layer.

2	Click Edit [image] Rename background.

3	Type a background name in the Name box.

 Related topics


To delete the background layer of a slide

1	Click Edit [image] Background layer.

2	Click Edit [image] Delete background.

 Related topics


Applying different colors and fills to the background layer of slides

Create a different look for the background layer of slides by changing the color or adding fills. You can apply a pattern, gradient, texture, or picture fill to a background layer. In addition, you can change the settings of gradient and picture fills.

 How to


To change the background layer color of a slide

1	Click Edit [image] Background layer.

2	Click File [image] Page setup.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Open the Foreground picker, and click a color.

5	Open the Background picker, and click a color.

 Related topics


To fill the background layer of a slide with a pattern

1	Click Edit [image] Background layer.

2	Click File [image] Page setup.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	In the Fill style area, click Pattern.

5	Click a fill on the palette.

You can also
Fill the background layer of a slide with a gradient	In the Fill style area, click Gradient, and click a fill on the palette.
Fill the background layer of a slide with a texture	In the Fill style area, click Texture, choose a category from the Category list box, and click a fill on the palette.
Fill the background layer of a slide with a picture	In the Fill style area, click Picture, choose a category from the Category list box, and click a fill on the palette.
 Related topics


To change gradient settings

1	Click Edit [image] Background layer.

2	Click File [image] Page setup.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	In the Fill Style area, click Gradient.

5	Click Gradient settings.

6	In the Gradient settings dialog box, choose one of the following gradient types from the Gradient type list box:

•	Linear [image] blends the color bands around curved lines

•	Circular [image] blends the color around curved lines

•	Rectangular [image] blends the color around straight lines

7	Type a value in the Angle box.

8	In the Gradient color position area, type values in the Horizontal offset box and the Vertical offset box.

9	In the Blending area, enable one of the following options:

•	Auto-step blending [image] assigns the number of blending steps between the selected colors

•	Fixed [image] blends between two colors by the number of steps you specify in the box

 Related topics


To change picture settings

1	Click Edit [image] Background layer.

2	Click File [image] Page setup.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	In the Fill style area, click Picture.

5	Click Picture settings.

6	In the Picture settings dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Tile [image] repeats the bitmap until the background is filled

•	Brick horizontal [image] repeats the bitmap in offset horizontal rows

•	Brick vertical [image] repeats the bitmap in offset vertical columns

•	Stretch/shrink to fit area [image] stretches or shrinks the bitmap; the bitmap might not retain its original proportions

•	Scale to fit area [image] makes the bitmap smaller or larger to fit to an area, keeping the original proportions

 Related topics


Editing, renaming, and deleting the layout layer of slides

The layout layer of a slide determines the placement of title, subtitle, and chart placeholders. You can edit the contents of a layout layer, rename the layout layer, and assign a specific background to a specific kind of layout. As well, you can reapply a layout. You can also delete a layout layer.

 How to


To edit the layout layer of a slide

1	Click Edit [image] Layout layer.

2	Click a tab at the bottom of the slide show window.

3	Edit the contents of the layout layer.

 Related topics


To rename the layout layer of a slide

1	Click Edit [image] Layout layer.

2	Click Edit [image] Rename layout.

3	Type a name in the Name box.

 Related topics


To assign a background to a layout

1	Click Edit [image] Layout layer.

2	Click Format [image] Assign background.

3	In the Layout is using background area, choose a layout.

4	Choose a background from the Available backgrounds list box.

 Related topics


To reapply a layout

1	Click Edit [image] Layout layer.

2	Click Format [image] Reapply layout.

 Note

•	You can reapply a layout only in the slide layer.

 Related topics


To delete a layout layer from a slide

1	Click Edit [image] Layout layer.

2	Click Edit [image] Delete layout.

 Related topics


Adding new masters to the Master Gallery

Once you have changed the background and layout layers of a slide, you can save your changes as a new master and add it to the Master Gallery. The next time you create a slide show, the master will display in the Master Gallery under the category you specify.

 How to


To add a master to the Master Gallery

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose X:\Program Files\Corel\Wordperfect Office 11\Programs\Masters from the Save in list box, where X represents the drive on which Corel Presentations is stored.

3	Double-click one of the following Master category folders:

•	35mm

•	Business

•	Color

•	Design

•	Nature

•	Printout

•	Theme

4	Choose one of the following file formats from the File type list box:

•	Presentations Master 3.0

•	Presentations Master 7/8/9/10/11

5	Type a filename in the Filename box.

 Note

•	You can overwrite an existing master; however, you will need to reinstall Corel Presentations in order to retrieve the original master.

 Related topics


Reference: Working with the Master Gallery

Layouts are preset page designs with backgrounds that you can apply to slides. The preset layouts included in Corel Presentations are listed in the following table.

Use a	To
Title layout	Introduce your subject or to serve as a divider between subjects.
Bulleted list layout	Summarize and reinforce major points.
Text layout	Display sentences or paragraphs of text on a slide.
Organization chart layout	Show the structure of positions and span of control in a business, department, agency, group, division, or office.
Data chart layout	Display percentages, trends, market shares, and relational information.
Combination layout	Display a bulleted list and a data chart on a slide.
 How to


For more information Help topics


Fill tab/gradient settings dialog box


For more information, click one of the following:

•	To change gradient fill settings

•	To change gradient fill settings of a title or subtitle box

•	To change the gradient fill settings of a bulleted list box

•	To change the gradient fill settings of a page

•	To change the gradient fill settings of a bullet


Fill tab/picture settings dialog box


For more information, click one of the following:

•	To change the picture fill settings

•	To change the picture fill settings of a bulleted list box

•	To change the picture fill settings of a page

•	To change the picture fill settings of a title or subtitle box


For more information, see the following:

Working with the Slide Outliner

Opening slide shows

To apply a slide transition

Working with sounds in slide shows

Working with movies in slide shows

Customizing Corel Presentations

Playing slide shows


For more information, see the following:

Working with titles and subtitles in Corel Presentations

Working with bulleted lists in Corel Presentations

Working with text in slide shows and drawings


 For more information, see the following:

Working with objects in slide shows and drawings

Using OLE


For more information, see the following:

Welcome to Corel Versions


For more information, see the following:

Using the dictionary

Using the thesaurus

Using the spelling checker and Grammatik


Adding multimedia effects to slide shows

You can add sounds and movies to slide shows in Corel Presentations.

Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For information on customizing your slide show to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

In this section, you'll learn about

•	working with sounds in slide shows

•	working with movies in slide shows


Working with sounds in slide shows

Once you have correctly installed and set up sound hardware on your computer, you can add Wave (.Wav) and Midi (.Mid) sound files to slides. You can add an entire CD track or only sections of a track to slides by choosing specific starting and stopping points.

You can also change the sound properties; for example, you can adjust the volume.

If you have a microphone and an internal sound card that supports digital audio or an external sound device that supports digital audio, you can also record any sound and add it to your slides. For more information about recording and saving sounds, see the online Help for the Microsoft Sound Recorder.

Should you decide that you no longer want the sound file included in a slide show, you can turn it off or remove it.

 How to


To insert a Wave and MIDI sound file into a slide

1	Click Insert [image] Sound.

2	Click Browse beside one of the following boxes:

•	Wave

•	MIDI

3	Choose the drive and folder where the sound file is stored.

4	Type a filename in the Filename box.

5	Click Open.

 Note

•	You can only play one .mid and one .wav file at the same time. You cannot play two sound files of the same type simultaneously.

 Tip

•	To get the best results from the MIDI sound files that are included with Corel Presentations, make sure that your system is set up correctly for your sound card.

 Related topics


To add an entire CD track to a slide

1	Click Insert [image] Sound.

2	Click Browse beside the CD box.

3	In the Slide CD [image] Audio dialog box, type a track description in the Description box.

4	Type the number of the CD track in the Track box.

 Related topics


To add part of a CD track to a slide

1	Click Insert [image] Sound.

2	Click Browse beside the CD box.

3	In the Slide CD [image] Audio dialog box, type a description in the Description box.

4	Type the number of the CD track in the Track box.

5	Disable the From beginning check box.

6	In the Start location area, type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Minutes

•	Seconds

•	Frames

7	Disable the To end check box.

8	In the End location area, type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Minutes

•	Seconds

•	Frames

 Related topics


To add a sound to all the slides in a slide show

1	Click Insert [image] Sound.

2	Enable the Apply to all slides in slide show check box.

You can also
Play a sound continuously during a slide show	Enable the Loop sound check box.
Adjust the volume	Move the slider to the left to decrease the volume, or move it to the right to increase the volume.
Save a sound within a slide show	Enable the Save within slide show document check box.
 Note

•	Saving the file in the slide show increases the slide show file size, but also ensures that the sound will be available for playback. Use this option if you want to create a portable slide show. For information about creating a portable slide show, see "Creating portable slide shows."

 Related topics


To record a sound file

1	Click Format [image] Slide properties [image] Sound.

2	Click Record.

3	In the Sound dialog box, click Record.

4	Click Stop when you finish recording.

 Related topics


To turn off a sound file

1	Click Insert [image] Sound.

2	Click Browse beside any of the following boxes:

•	Wave

•	MIDI

3	Locate one of the following files:

•	Noteoff.wav [image] turns off a Wave file

•	@Noteoff.mid [image] turns off a Midi file

You can also	Click Insert [image] Sound, and...
Remove a WAVE file	Click Insert [image] Sound. Delete the file path in the Wave box.
Remove a MIDI file	Click Insert [image] Sound. Delete the file path in the MIDI box.
 Related topics


Working with movies in slide shows

You can add movies to slide shows in a variety of formats, including Animated GIF (.gif), Moving Pictures Experts Group (.mpeg), Audio Video Interleaved (.avi), and QuickTime (.mov and .qt).

Once you have added a movie to a slide show, you can change the movie file. You can also set the movie to play automatically, and you can delete a movie file from a slide show.

 How to


To add a movie file to a slide show

1	Click Insert [image] Movie.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

If you want to save the movie within the slide show, enable the Save movie within slide show document check box.

3	Choose a file type from the File type list box.

4	Type a filename in the Filename box.

5	Click Insert.

 Notes

•	To insert .mov and .mpeg movie files into Corel Presentations slide shows, you must install the required MCI driver.

•	Inserting a movie file into a slide show greatly increases the file size of the slide show.

 Tip

•	You can play a movie within the slide show by clicking View [image] Play movie or by clicking the Play movie button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To insert an animated GIF into a slide show

1	Click Insert [image] Animated GIF.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

If you want to save the movie within the slide show, enable the Save movie within slide show document check box.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box.

4	Click Insert.

 Note

•	An animated GIF displays correctly in Show It!, QuickPlay, or Show on the Go.

•	You can also play an animated GIF by double-clicking the GIF, or by right-clicking the GIF and clicking Play movie.

 Related topics


To change the movie file in a slide show

1	Right-click a movie, and click Movie properties.

2	Click Browse beside the Movie name box.

3	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

4	Choose a file type from the File type list box.

5	Type a filename in the Filename box.

6	Click Insert.

You can also
Apply a movie border to the slide show	Choose a border type from the Movie border list box.
Display the control panel while playing a slide show	Enable the Display control panel when playing show check box.
Save the movie file within the slide show	Enable the Save movie within slide show document check box.
Play the movie continuously	Enable the Loop the movie for continuous play check box.
 Tip

•	You can also change the movie file in a slide show by clicking the Movie properties button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To set a movie to play automatically

1	Right-click a movie, and click Movie properties.

2	Enable the Play movie check box.

3	Type a value in the Seconds after slide transition box.

You can also
Hide the movie when it is not playing	Enable the Hide movie while not playing check box.
Set the movie to play only when clicked	Enable the Play movie when clicked check box.
 Tip

•	You can also set a movie to play automatically by clicking the Movie properties button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To delete a movie from a slide

1	Click a movie.

2	Click Edit [image] Delete.

 Related topics


Using OLE

OLE is a standard method used to share formatted, editable information between Windows applications. You can link or embed objects in a slide or drawing.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	linking and embedding objects

•	editing OLE objects

•	working with OLE play settings

For more information about using OLE, see "Reference: Using OLE."


Linking and embedding objects

In slide shows and drawings, you can link and embed text, charts, graphics, spreadsheets, sound clips, movie clips, or any file created by an OLE-compliant application installed on your system. When you do this, the application where the object was created is the server application, and Corel Presentations is the client application.

When you link an object, you link to an existing file source in the server application. The server application is used to create and edit the OLE object. The data for a linked object remains in the server application file. If changes are made to the source file, the OLE object updates to reflect the change. Because the object resides in the source file, any changes made to the object in the server application are automatically reflected in your document. A single source file can be linked to objects in many different documents, allowing you to keep many documents updated by editing a single file. However, links are not maintained when files are carried outside the file system in which they were created. Changing the relative path between OLE objects could break a link. There are different ways to insert a linked object. You can also view a list of the OLE links that are found in slide shows and drawings.

When you embed an object, you place a copy of the OLE object in a document without a link to the original object, allowing you to edit the object copy without altering the original. The data for an embedded object is stored in the client application file. Embedding an object is useful if, for example, you want to use the information in one document only. When you create a new object by launching a server application from Corel Presentations, the object is embedded. You can create embedded objects or embed existing objects.

The application used to create an OLE object and the application in which you want to place an OLE object must both support OLE functionality. Corel Presentations supports most OLE features, but other applications may not. If you are uncertain about an application's OLE compatibility, refer to its documentation.

 How to


To insert a linked object using the Insert menu

1	Click Insert [image] Object.

2	Enable the Create from file option.

3	Click Browse.

4	In the Browse dialog box, choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

5	Type a filename in the Filename box.

6	Click Insert.

7	Enable the Link check box.

If you want to display the OLE link as an icon, enable the Display as icon check box.

 Note

•	Links are updated automatically unless you specify manual updating. For information about specifying manual updating, see "To change the update settings of an OLE link."

 Related topics


To insert a linked object using the Paste special command

1	Open the file in the OLE compliant application in which it was created.

2	Select the object or data.

3	Click Edit [image] Copy.

4	Open the Corel Presentations slide show or drawing.

5	Click Edit [image] Paste special.

6	Enable the Paste link option.

7	Choose the file type from the As list.

 Note

•	Links are updated automatically unless you specify manual updating. For information about specifying manual updating, see "To change the update settings of an OLE link."

 Related topics


To list the OLE links inserted into the current slide show

•	Click Edit [image] Links.

 Related topics


To create an embedded object with an OLE server application

1	Click Insert [image] Object.

2	Enable the Create new option.

3	Choose an object type from the Object type list.

If you want to display the embedded object as an icon, enable the Display as icon check box.

4	Click OK.

5	Create the embedded object.

6	Close the application to return to the drawing or slide show.

 Related topics


To embed an object from an existing file

1	Click Insert [image] Object.

2	Enable the Create from file option.

3	Click Browse.

4	In the Browse dialog box, choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

5	Type a filename in the Filename box.

6	Click Insert.

If you want to display the embedded object as an icon, enable the Display as icon check box.

 Related topics


Editing OLE objects

You can edit embedded OLE objects using in-place editing and open editing. You can edit linked objects using the open editing method.

In-place editing allows you to edit an object without switching to a different window. The client application, in this case, Corel Presentations, adopts the functions of the server application. Buttons and menus temporarily change to work specifically with that object. When you finish editing the object, the client application's original menus are restored.

Open editing lets you launch an OLE object's server application in another window where you can edit the object's data. When you exit the server application, the OLE object is automatically updated in the document with the changes you made. Open editing provides you with more workspace, which is particularly useful when you are working with small or complex objects. It also allows you to save your drawing as a file directly from the server application.

You can also modify OLE links by changing the source of a linked object to update its location of a file that has been moved or by changing the content of the linked object. As well, you can change the update settings of an OLE link to update the link in a Corel Presentations file automatically or to allow you to update the changes manually.

If you do not want to update a linked OLE object, you can break the OLE link to its server application. Once the OLE link is broken, it becomes an embedded object and the link cannot be restored. The embedded object is displayed as it was at the time the link was broken.

 How to


To edit embedded OLE objects by using in-place editing

1	Double-click an OLE object.

2	Edit the object.

3	Click outside the OLE object.

 Note

•	The server application must be installed on your computer to use in-place editing and the application must support this OLE feature.

 Tip

•	You can also edit an OLE object by clicking the OLE object and clicking the Edit button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To edit OLE objects using open editing

1	Right-click an OLE object.

2	Click Object [image] Open.

3	Edit the object in the server application.

4	Click File [image] Exit.

 Note

•	You can save the object directly in the server application.

 Related topics


To edit a linked OLE object

1	Click a linked object.

2	Click Edit [image] Links.

3	Choose a link from the Links list.

4	Click Open source.

5	Edit the object in the server application.

6	Click File [image] Exit.

 Note

•	You can save the object directly in the server application.

 Related topics


To change the link source

1	Click Edit [image] Links.

2	Choose a link from the Links list.

3	Click Change source.

4	In the Change source dialog box, choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

5	Type a filename in the Filename box.

6	Click Open.

 Related topics


To change the update settings of an OLE link

1	Click Edit [image] Links.

2	Choose a link from the Links list.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Automatic [image] updates the link automatically if changes are made to the source file

•	Manual [image] lets you manually update a link when changes are made to the source file

 Related topics


To update a manual link

1	Click Edit [image] Links.

2	Choose a link from the Links list.

3	Click Update now.

 Related topics


To break a link

1	Click Edit [image] Links.

2	Choose a link from the Links list.

3	Click Break link.

 Related topics


Working with OLE play settings

You can assign certain actions, such as play, open, or edit, to an OLE object. The action is performed on the OLE object when you play a slide show. For example, you can assign the play action to a video clip you want to show during a slide show. You can set a designated action to initiate in one of three ways: with a mouse click, automatically following a slide transition, or automatically after a designated number of seconds following a slide transition.

 How to


To apply OLE play settings to an OLE object

1	Click an OLE object.

2	Click Edit [image] OLE play settings.

3	Choose one of the following from the Action list box:

•	Play [image] plays the OLE object during a slide show

•	Open [image] opens the server application in which the OLE object was created during a slide show

•	Edit [image] activates in-place editing or open editing during a slide show

4	Enable the Begin the action when the transition ends check box.

5	Type a value in the Delay action box.

This value represents the number of seconds the action is delayed after a slide transition ends.

 Tips

•	You can make the OLE object disappear after it is finished playing by enabling the Hide OLE object while it's not playing check box.

•	You can improve the display of actions when applying OLE play settings to slide shows by not taking full advantage of video memory settings. For information about video memory settings, see "Working with video memory."

 Related topics


Reference: Using OLE

You may encounter problems with OLE linking. The following table lists an example of a possible problem, the cause, and a solution.

Problem	Cause	Solution
I cannot set up an OLE link. I selected the information in the other application, but the Paste link menu command is dimmed in the Corel Presentations Edit menu.	The source application is not an OLE server.	Use the Windows Object Packager utility to create an OLE package to embed in the drawing or slide. See the Windows documentation for information about creating and embedding an OLE package.


Working with objects in slide shows and drawings

All of the elements that you add to slides, including text, clipart, shapes, charts, and bitmaps, are treated as objects in Corel Presentations.

In this section you'll learn about

•	inserting objects

•	selecting objects

•	copying and pasting objects and object attributes

•	resizing objects

•	flipping, rotating, and skewing objects

•	arranging objects

•	blending objects

•	molding objects

•	creating 3-D objects

•	applying color and outlines to objects

•	applying fills to objects

•	adding shadows to objects

•	adjusting the intensity of objects

•	applying effects to objects

•	creating SpeedLink objects

•	animating objects


Inserting objects

You can enhance slide shows and drawings by inserting objects from the Scrapbook, the WordPerfect Office CD, or from a file. You can also create other objects, such as shapes. For information about drawing shapes, see "Drawing and editing shapes in slide shows and drawings."

 How to


To insert an object from the Scrapbook

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart.

2	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Clipart [image] vector graphics

•	Photos [image] bitmaps

3	Choose a category from the list.

4	Click a graphic on the palette.

5	Click Insert.

6	Click Close.

 Tip

•	You can also insert clipart from a CD through Scrapbook by inserting a CD into the CD drive.

 Related topics


To insert an object from a file

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From file.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Choose a file.

4	Click Insert.

 Related topics


Selecting objects

You must select an object before you can arrange, edit, or move it. You can select one object, or you can select multiple objects simultaneously. You can also optimize Corel Presentations so that any object you draw is automatically selected.

As well, if you have an object that is composed of many groups of small objects, such as a clipart image, you can display the selected objects in the Selected Object Viewer.

 How to


To select an object

To select	Do the following
An object	Click an object using the Selection tool.
Multiple objects	Hold down Ctrl, and click the objects using the Selection tool.
All objects in a window or slide	Click Edit [image] Select [image] All.
Objects automatically when they are created	Click View [image] Auto select.
 Note

•	A check mark beside the Auto select menu command indicates that it is enabled.

 Related topics


To display or hide the Selected Object Viewer

•	Click View [image] Selected Object Viewer.

A check mark beside the Selected Object Viewer menu command indicates that it is displayed.

 Related topics


Copying and pasting objects and object attributes

You can copy an object into another slide or drawing. You can also copy the color, line style, fill style, and shadow style attributes of one object to another object.

 How to


To copy an object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Edit, and click one of the following:

•	Cut [image] removes the object from the drawing or slide show window

•	Copy [image] leaves the original object in the drawing or slide show window

 Related topics


To paste an object

•	Click Edit [image] Paste.

 Note

•	You can paste only one object at a time.

•	You must first copy an object before you can paste it. For information about copying objects, see "To copy an object."

 Related topics


To copy object attributes

1	Click an object whose attributes you want to copy.

2	Click Format [image] Object properties [image] Get attributes.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Drawing objects

•	Text

•	Drawing objects and text

4	Click OK.

5	Click an object to which you want to copy attributes.

6	Click Format [image] Object properties [image] Apply attributes.

 Tips

•	You can also copy object attributes by clicking the Get attributes button on the toolbar.

•	You can also apply copied attributes by clicking the Apply attributes button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


Resizing objects

You can resize objects in slides or drawings by sizing and stretching them. You can size an object while keeping its original proportions intact, and stretching an object lets you extend it horizontally or vertically.

 How to


To size an object proportionately

1	Click an object.

2	Drag a corner handle until the object is the size you want.

 Tip

•	You can also size an object proportionately by holding down Alt while dragging any handle until the object is the size you want.

 Related topics


To stretch an object

1	Click an object.

2	Drag a side handle until you achieve the effect you want.

 Related topics


Flipping, rotating, and skewing objects

You can flip, rotate, and skew objects in the drawing window. Flipping lets you mirror an object left to right or top to bottom. For example, you can copy an object, position it opposite to the original object, and create a mirror image. Rotating lets you reposition the object, and skewing lets you distort the horizontal or vertical dimensions of the object.

 How to


To flip an object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Edit [image] Arrange [image] Flip, and click one of the following:

•	Left/right [image] flips the selected object around a vertical axis

•	Top/bottom [image] flips the selected object around a horizontal axis

 Tip

•	You can also flip an object by opening the Flip picker on the property bar and clicking a direction.

 Related topics


To rotate an object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Edit [image] Arrange [image] Rotate.

3	Drag a corner rotation handle.

You can also
Rotate an object automatically	Right-click a rotation handle. In the Rotate dialog box, type a value in the Degrees box.
Rotate a copy of an object	Right-click a rotation handle. In the Rotate dialog box, enable the Rotate a copy of the object check box.
 Tip

•	You can also rotate an object by opening the Rotation options picker on the property bar and clicking a rotation angle.

 Related topics


To skew an object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Edit [image] Arrange [image] Rotate.

3	Drag a side rotation handle.

 Related topics


Arranging objects

You can arrange the layering of objects on slides. As well, you can combine and group objects. Combined objects are treated as one object, but they adopt the attributes of the first selected object in the combination. Grouped objects are also treated as one object, but the individual objects in the group retain their original attributes.

You can also separate the layering of any of the combined or grouped objects on slides.

You can align a single object relative to the drawing page margins and multiple objects in relation to one another.

As well, you can evenly space three or more objects in relation to each other.

 How to


To arrange objects

1	Click an object.

2	Click Edit [image] Arrange [image] Order, and click one of the following:

•	To front

•	To back

•	Forward one

•	Back one

 Tip

•	You can also arrange the order of objects by opening the Order picker on the property bar and clicking a direction.

 Related topics


To combine objects

1	Hold down Ctrl, and click the objects you want to combine.

2	Click Edit [image] Arrange [image] Combine.

 Note

•	You cannot combine bitmaps, text, or charts.

 Related topics


To group objects

1	Hold down Shift, and click the objects you want to group.

2	Click Edit [image] Arrange [image] Group.

 Note

•	If you group an object that contains a SpeedLink or animation, these features will be removed.

 Related topics


To separate objects

1	Click a grouped object.

2	Click Edit [image] Arrange [image] Separate objects.

 Related topics


To align an object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Edit [image] Arrange [image] Align objects, and click one of the following:

•	Left [image] aligns the left edge of the selected object with the left edge of the drawing window or selection area

•	Right [image] aligns the right edge of the selected object with the right edge of the drawing window or selection area

•	Top [image] aligns the top of the selected object with the top of the drawing window or selection area

•	Bottom [image] aligns the bottom of the selected object with the bottom of the drawing window or selected area

•	Center left/right [image] moves the selected object left or right to the center of the selected area

•	Center top/bottom [image] moves the selected object up or down to the center of the selected area

•	Center both [image] moves the selected object to the center of the selected area

 Tips

•	You can align two or more objects at the same time by holding down Shift while clicking objects.

•	You can also align an object by opening the Align picker on the property bar and clicking a direction.

 Related topics


To space objects

1	Hold down SHIFT, and click three or more objects.

2	Click Edit [image] Arrange [image] Space evenly, and click one of the following:

•	Left/right [image] spaces objects horizontally

•	Top/bottom [image] spaces objects vertically

 Tip

•	You can also space objects evenly by opening the Space picker on the property bar and clicking a direction.

 Related topics


Blending objects

Blending is a special effect that you can apply to any two objects. When you blend two objects, you create a "progression," composed of the two objects and a series of intermediate objects (stacked one on top of another and offset) along a path between them. The intermediate objects display a smooth transition between the shapes and colors of the two original objects. For example, blending a red pentagon and a blue star creates intermediate shapes that follow a transition from pentagon to star, as well as from red to blue.

 How to


To blend objects

1	Hold down SHIFT, and click the objects you wan to blend.

2	Click Tools [image] Blend.

3	In the Number of objects between images box, type the number of intermediate objects you want to display.

 Note

•	Intermediate objects are separate objects that you can edit individually.

 Related topics


Molding objects

You can mold an object into one of several preset shapes, such as a pennant, crescent, or bow tie.

 How to


To mold an object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Tools [image] QuickWarp.

3	Click a shape on the palette.

 Related topics


Creating 3-D objects

Adding perspective to the objects in your slides and drawings creates a 3-D effect. When you add perspective, you are implementing another dimension to your object, thereby creating the illusion of distance and depth. You can also change the rotation and perspective of an already three-dimensional object by adjusting its viewing angle.

 How to


To add perspective to an object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Tools [image] Quick3-D.

3	Click the Perspective tab.

4	Click one of the following perspectives:

•	Linear

•	Parallel

•	Inverse

5	Type a value in the Depth box.

6	In the Color adjustment area, move the slider to the left or right to change the color brightness.

 Related topics


To manipulate the angle of a 3-D object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Tools [image] Quick3-D.

3	Click the Rotation tab.

4	Click a rotation on the Rotation palette.

5	Type a value in any of the following boxes to specify how much to rotate the image around the x-axis, y-axis, or z-axis:

•	X

•	Y

•	Z

 Related topics


Applying color and outlines to objects

You can apply colors to objects. You can also apply custom outlines to objects, using color, width, and angle selections.

 How to


To apply a custom color to an object

1	Click an object.

2	Click one of the following buttons on the tool palette:

•	Foreground fill

•	Background fill

3	Click More.

4	In the Select color dialog box, choose a color model from the Color model list box.

5	Click a color on the color wheel.

6	Click a color on the color swatch.

 Tip

•	You can also choose a color by typing values in the Red, Green, and Blue boxes in the Color values area.

 Related topics


To outline an object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Format [image] Object properties [image] Outline.

3	In the Outline style area, open the Color picker, and click a color.

4	Open the Style picker, and click a line style.

5	Open the Width picker, and click a line width.

If you want to specify the line width, type a value in the box beside the Width picker.

6	Open the Joints picker, and click a line angle.

 Tips

•	You can also choose an outline color by opening the Line color picker on the tool palette and clicking a color.

•	You can also change the line style or width by opening the Line style picker or the Line width picker on the tool palette and clicking a line style or a line width.

 Related topics


Applying fills to objects

Every object with a fill pattern has two colors [image] a background color and a pattern color [image] that you can customize. Pattern fills consist of two colors arranged to form a design. A gradient fill allows you to create a color blend, by progressively changing the transparency as it progresses from one color to another.

You can apply pattern and gradient fills to objects. You can also fill an object with texture and picture images. You can use any bitmap as a fill. Texture fills fill a designated area with a preset pattern that you select. For example, you can fill a rectangle with wood or oil textures. Picture fills fill a designated area with a single picture. You can change the settings of texture and picture fills to change the way the fills are applied to objects.

 How to


To apply a pattern or gradient fill to an object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Format [image] Object properties [image] Fill.

3	In the Fill style area, click one of the following:

•	Pattern

•	Gradient

4	Open the Foreground picker, and click a color.

5	Open the Background picker, and click a color.

6	Click a fill on the palette.

 Tip

•	You can also apply a pattern or gradient fill to an object by clicking the Fill pattern button on the tool palette.

 Related topics


To apply a texture or picture fill to an object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Format [image] Object properties [image] Fill.

3	In the Fill style area, click one of the following:

•	Texture

•	Picture

4	Choose a fill category from the Category list box.

5	Click a fill on the palette.

 Tip

•	You can also apply a texture or picture fill to an object by clicking the Fill pattern button on the tool palette.

 Related topics


To change texture fill settings

1	Click an object.

2	Click Format [image] Object properties [image] Fill.

3	In the Fill style area, click Texture.

4	Click Texture settings.

5	In the Texture settings dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Anchor the texture to the page

•	Anchor the texture to the object

6	In the Fill method area, click one of the following:

•	Winding [image] fills the enclosed areas, including overlapping areas

•	Alternating [image] fills every second enclosed area

 Related topics


To change picture fill settings

1	Click an object.

2	Click Format [image] Object properties [image] Fill.

3	In the Fill style area, click Picture.

4	Click Picture settings.

5	In the Picture settings dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Tile [image] repeats the graphic until the background is completely filled

•	Brick horizontal [image] repeats the graphic in offset horizontal rows

•	Brick vertical [image] repeats the graphic in offset vertical columns

•	Stretch/shrink to fit area [image] stretches or shrinks the graphic, not necessarily keeping the original proportions

•	Scale to fit area [image] makes the bitmap smaller or larger to fit to an area, keeping the original proportions

6	In the Fill method area, click one of the following:

•	Winding [image] fills the enclosed areas, including overlapping areas

•	Alternating [image] fills every second enclosed area

 Related topics


Adding shadows to objects

You can apply shadow properties to any object in slides or drawings.

 How to


To apply a shadow to an object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Format [image] Object properties [image] Shadow.

3	Click a shadow on the Direction of shadow palette.

If you want to specify the direction of the shadow, type values in the following boxes:

•	Side-to-side offset

•	Up-and-down offset

4	Open the Shadow color picker, and click a color.

If you want to remove the transparency from the shadow, disable the Use transparent shadow check box.

 Tips

•	You can also specify the direction of the shadow by moving the sliders in the Shadow preview window.

•	You can also apply a shadow to an object by opening the Shadow options picker on the property bar and clicking a shadow option.

 Related topics


Adjusting the intensity of objects

Adjusting the intensity of objects lets you adjust the brightness and contrast of an object and change colors to black and white with preset percentage values.

 How to


To adjust the intensity of an object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Tools [image] Image tools, and click one of the following:

•	Brightness [image] lightens or darkens a graphic

•	Contrast [image] increases or decreases the contrast between colors and backgrounds

•	Black and white [image] converts a colored graphic to black and white

3	Click a preset percentage value.

 Tip

•	You can also adjust the intensity of an object by opening the Brightness, Contrast, or Black and white picker on the property bar and clicking a percentage.

 Related topics


Applying effects to objects

Applying effects to objects creates a different look in a slide show or drawing. There are many effects to choose from, including watermarking, inverting colors, and outlining every part of the object.

 How to


To apply an effect to an object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Tools [image] Image tools [image], and click one of the following:

•	Watermark [image] lightens the colors of a selected object so that it looks like a watermark

•	Grayscale [image] changes the color attributes of a selected object to shades of gray

•	Invert colors [image] inverts the colors of the selected object

•	Silhouette [image] changes the color of the selected object to black

•	Outline [image] displays the selected object as a line drawing

•	Coloring book [image] displays the selected object as a coloring book

•	Outline all [image] displays the selected object with everything outlined

•	Transparent [image] displays the selected object with no fill, so objects behind it are visible

 Tip

•	You can also apply an effect to an object by opening the Image fill picker on the property bar and clicking an image tool.

 Related topics


Creating SpeedLink objects

You can create SpeedLink objects for slide shows, which allows you to do such things as optimize an object to launch a Web browser and go to a specific Web address or FTP site, open an application, such as WordPerfect or Quattro Pro, play a sound file, and move to another part of the slide show. You can also remove a SpeedLink from an object.

 How to


To create a SpeedLink object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Format [image] Object properties [image] SpeedLink.

3	Type a name in the SpeedLink name box.

If you want to make the SpeedLink object invisible, enable the Invisible while playing or printing slides check box.

4	In the Link assignment area, enable one of the following options:

•	Go to [image] from a list box, lets you choose a slide that displays when you click the SpeedLink object during a slide show

•	Action [image] from a list box, lets you choose the action that occurs when you click the SpeedLink object during a slide show

 Note

•	The cursor displays when you position it where the SpeedLink is located, even if the SpeedLink is invisible.

 Related topics


To remove a SpeedLink from an object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Format [image] Object properties [image] SpeedLink.

3	Enable the Unassigned option.

 Related topics


Animating objects

Objects or multiple objects can have animation effects applied to them. For example, you can choose the direction and speed of an animation effect, and you can animate an object in its place or across the slide.

When you animate multiple objects, you can specify the order in which the objects are displayed.

You can also apply sound to object animations.

 How to


To animate an object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Format [image] Object properties [image] Object animation.

3	In the Animation type area, enable one of the following options:

•	Animate object in place [image] animates the object in place on the slide

•	Animate object across screen [image] animates the object by moving it across the slide

If you want to show animation in Flash format, enable the Show only Flash-enabled transitions check box.

4	Choose an animation effect from the Effects list.

5	Choose an animation direction from the Direction list.

6	In the Speed area, enable one of the following options:

•	Fast

•	Medium

•	Slow

 Note

•	Enable the Show only Flash-enabled transitions check box if you intend to publish the slide show to the Internet using Flash format. For information about using Flash format, see "Publishing slides as HTML documents."

 Tip

•	If you want to animate multiple objects, hold down Shift, and click the objects.

 Related topics


To change the display sequence of an animated object

1	Click an object.

2	Click Format [image] Object properties [image] Object animation.

3	Choose a number from the Display sequence list box.

 Related topics


To apply sound to an object animation

1	Click an object.

2	Click Format [image] Object properties [image] Object animation.

3	In the Sound area, click Browse.

4	In the Open file dialog box, choose the drive and folder where the sound file is stored.

5	Type a filename in the Filename box.

6	Click Open.

7	On the Object animation page, move the slider to adjust the volume of the sound file.

 Related topics


Working with organization charts

Organization charts can be used to show an organization's structure or the relationships of people and positions. For example, you can use organization charts to create family trees, show a chain of command, diagram a process, or illustrate a workflow.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating and saving organization charts

•	adding and editing text in organization charts

•	working with organization chart box fields

•	selecting organization chart branches and levels

•	adding and replacing positions in organization charts

•	viewing organization charts

•	formatting organization chart boxes

•	changing organization chart branch structures and orientation

•	changing box connector line properties in organization charts

•	copying organization charts


Creating and saving organization charts

Before you begin creating an organization chart, here are some suggestions for presenting information effectively:

•	Try to avoid showing too much information on one chart; break up large, complex charts into separate ones.

•	Try to start each box the same way, for example, with either a position title or a person's name.

There are many different pre-defined organization chart layouts to choose from when you create an organization chart. The layout determines the structure and orientation of an organization chart. You can save an organization chart style so that you can use the same box options and attributes, font properties, and other chart characteristics for other organization charts.

The following illustration shows an organization chart.

 How to


To create an organization chart

1	Click Insert [image] Organization chart.

2	Drag diagonally to define a chart area.

3	Click a chart layout.

 Related topics


To save an organization chart style

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Save style.

3	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the chart style.

4	Type a filename in the Filename box.

5	Click Save.

 Note

•	The filename extension of a chart style file is (.chs).

 Related topics


Adding and editing text in organization charts

You can type text in each of the boxes in an organization chart and include names, titles, and other information. You can also edit this text.

If you no longer want to include text in a chart box, you can clear it.

 How to


To add text to an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Double-click one of the following fields in a box:

•	Name

•	Title

3	Type the text in the field.

 Tip

•	You can change the font of text in an organization chart by clicking the Font button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To edit text in an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a box.

2	Click Edit [image] Edit text.

3	Edit the text.

 Related topics


To clear text from an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a box.

3	Click Edit [image] Clear text only.

 Related topics


Working with organization chart box fields

You can add fields to a box. For example, adding fields lets you add additional information, such as telephone numbers, Fax numbers, or department names, to any position in an organization chart.

You can also rename the placeholder text in box fields, move box fields, and delete box fields.

 How to


To add a box field to an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a box.

3	Click Format [image] Box fields.

4	Type the name of the field in the Add new field box.

5	Click Add.

 Note

•	You can add a maximum of eight fields to each box.

 Related topics


To rename a box field

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a box.

3	Click Format [image] Box fields.

4	Click Rename.

5	In the Rename box field dialog box, type a name in the To box.

 Related topics


To move a box field

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a box.

3	Click Format [image] Box fields.

4	Choose a field from the Current fields list.

5	Click one of the following:

•	Move up

•	Move down

 Related topics


To delete a box field

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a box.

3	Click Format [image] Box fields.

4	Choose a field from the Current fields list.

5	Click Delete.

 Related topics


Selecting organization chart branches and levels

You can select a branch or all of the branches in an organization chart. You can also select organization chart levels, specifying how many of the organization chart levels you want to select, which is helpful if you want to apply a change to many positions at once; for example, if you want to change all manager and subordinate box frame borders to double lines.

 How to


To select an organization chart branch

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a subordinate box.

3	Click Edit [image] Select [image] Branch.

 Note

•	In organization charts, manager positions are represented by the highest boxes in the chart, subordinate and staff positions by the next level of boxes, and co-worker positions by the lowest level of boxes.

 Related topics


To select all branches in an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click Edit [image] Select [image] All.

 Related topics


To select a level in an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click Edit [image] Select [image] Levels.

3	Type a value in the Starting level box.

4	Type a value in the Number of levels box.

 Related topics


Adding and replacing positions in organization charts

In organization charts, manager positions are represented by the highest boxes in the chart, subordinate and staff positions by the next level of boxes, and co-worker positions by the lowest level of boxes. You can add staff and subordinate positions to an organization chart, and you can add co-worker positions to a chart. You can also add managers.

You can replace managers in an organization chart. When you replace a manager with a subordinate, the contents of the subordinate box replace all previous information in the manager box.

 How to


To add a staff or subordinate position to an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a box.

3	Click Insert, and click one of the following:

•	Staff

•	Subordinate(s)

4	Type a value in the Number to insert box.

 Tip

•	You can also add a subordinate position to an organization chart by opening the Subordinate picker on the property bar and clicking a number.

 Related topics


To add a co-worker position to an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a box.

3	Click Insert [image] Co-workers.

4	Type a value in the Number of co-workers to insert box.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Left [image] adds a co-worker position to the left of the selected box

•	Right [image] adds a co-worker position to the right of the selected box

 Related topics


To add a manager position to an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a box.

3	Click Insert [image] Manager.

 Related topics


To replace a manager position with a subordinate position

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a manager position box.

3	Click Edit [image] Replace manager.

 Related topics


Viewing organization charts

You can view a selected branch of an organization chart or the entire organization chart. You can also display or hide subordinate positions in an organization chart. Hiding subordinate positions is useful when an organization chart is large or complex.

 How to


To view an organization chart

To view	Do the following
A branch of an organization chart	Double-click an organization chart. Click a subordinate box. Click View [image] Zoom to branch.
An entire organization chart	Double-click an organization chart, and click View [image] Zoom to chart.
 Note

•	In organization charts, manager positions are represented by the highest boxes in the chart, subordinate and staff positions by the next level of boxes, and co-worker positions by the lowest level of boxes.

 Tip

•	You can also view an organization chart branch by clicking the Zoom branch button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To display or hide a subordinate position

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a subordinate position box.

3	Click View, and click one of the following:

•	Expand subordinates [image] displays subordinate positions

•	Collapse subordinates [image] hides subordinate positions

 Tip

•	You can also expand or collapse subordinates by clicking the Collapse/expand button on the property bar.

 Related topics


Formatting organization chart boxes

You can automatically size boxes relative to their text or the other boxes in the chart, or you can manually adjust the size of the selected boxes. You can also change a box type. Adding a border and a fill to a box is also possible. In addition, the spacing between a manager and a subordinate box, and the amount of spacing between sibling boxes can be adjusted. You can remove box attributes, branch structure, and branch orientation from an organization chart.

 How to


To size a box automatically in an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a box.

3	Click Format [image] Box properties.

4	Click the Box size tab.

5	In the AutoSize to area, enable one of the following options:

•	Largest box in branch

•	Largest box in level

•	Largest box in chart

•	Autosize to fit text within box

 Related topics


To size a box manually in an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a box.

3	Click Format [image] Box properties.

4	Click the Box size tab.

5	Enable the Manually adjust box size to percent of current text option.

6	Move any of the following sliders:

•	Vertical size

•	Horizontal size

 Related topics


To change a box type in an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a box.

3	Click Format [image] Box properties.

4	Click the Box type tab.

5	Click a box shape on the palette.

 Tip

•	You can also change a box type by opening the Box style picker on the property bar and clicking a box style.

 Related topics


To add a border to a box in an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a box.

3	Click Format [image] Box properties.

4	Click the Box type tab.

5	Disable the No border check box.

6	Open the Border color picker, and click a color.

 Tip

•	You can choose a border style for a box by opening the Border style picker on the property bar and clicking a border style.

 Related topics


To add a pattern or gradient fill to a box in an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a box.

3	Click Format [image] Box properties.

4	Click the Fill tab.

5	In the Fill style area, click one of the following:

•	Pattern

•	Gradient

6	Click a pattern or gradient fill on the palette.

 Related topics


To add a texture or picture fill to a box in an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a box.

3	Click Format [image] Box properties.

4	Click the Fill tab.

5	In the Fill style area, click one of the following:

•	Texture

•	Picture

6	Choose a category from the Category list box.

7	Click a texture or picture fill on the palette.

 Related topics


To adjust the spacing between boxes in an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a manager or subordinate box.

3	Click Format [image] Box spacing.

4	Move any of the following sliders:

•	Parent to child [image] sets the amount of spacing between manager and subordinate positions

•	Sibling to sibling [image] sets the amount of spacing between co-worker positions

 Notes

•	You should use closer spacing between manager and subordinate boxes when you are working with a tall, thin chart.

•	You should use closer spacing between coworker boxes when you are working with a wide, flat chart.

 Tip

•	You can eliminate excessive white space around the boxes by enabling the Maximize spacing check box, or by clicking the Maximize spacing button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To clear the box attributes, branch structure, and branch orientation from an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click Edit [image] Clear all.

 Related topics


To delete a box from an organization chart

1	Click an organization chart box.

2	Click Edit [image] Delete.

 Tip

•	You can also reverse a deleting action by clicking Edit [image] Undelete.

 Related topics


Changing organization chart branch structures and orientation

1) a multiple structure, 2) a single structure, 3) a staggered structure, 4) a left/top structure, and 5) a right/bottom structure.Changing how the branches are structured allows you to create a different look for the organization chart. For example, you can change the branches to stagger the boxes.

The following illustration shows examples of 1) a multiple structure, 2) a single structure, 3) a staggered structure, 4) a left/top structure, and 5) a right/bottom structure.

1) top-to-bottom orientation, 2) left-to-right orientation, 3) right-to-left orientation, and 4) bottom-to-top orientation.By changing the branch orientation, you can change the arrangement of boxes. For example, top-to-bottom orientation lets you have one box at the top of the organization chart, but bottom-to-top orientation lets you have many boxes at the top.

The following illustration shows examples of 1) top-to-bottom orientation, 2) left-to-right orientation, 3) right-to-left orientation, and 4) bottom-to-top orientation.

 How to


To change a branch structure in an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a manager or subordinate box.

3	Click Format [image] Branch structure.

4	Click the Structure tab.

5	Click one of the following:

•	Single

•	Staggered

•	Left/top

•	Right/bottom

•	Multiple, and type a value in the Columns box

6	Click Close.

 Related topics


To change a branch orientation in an organization chart

1	Click a manager or subordinate box.

2	Click Format [image] Orientation.

3	Click the Orientation tab.

4	Click one of the following:

•	Top to bottom

•	Left to right

•	Right to left

•	Bottom to top

5	Click Close.

 Related topics


Changing box connector line properties in organization charts

You can change the angle.

You can change the line color, style, and width of connecting lines between positions in an organization chart.

 How to


To change the angle of a connector

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Drag to select a connector.

3	Click Format [image] Connectors.

4	In the Connector type area, enable one of the following options:

•	Direct [image] connects the boxes with straight lines

•	Right angles [image] connects the boxes with right-angled lines

 Tip

•	You can also change the angle of a connector by clicking the Connector style button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To change the appearance of a staff connector

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Drag to select a connector.

3	Click Format [image] Connectors.

4	Enable the Show staff connectors check box.

5	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Line style picker, and click a line style.

7	Type a value in the Staff line width box.

 Related topics


To change the appearance of a subordinate connector

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Drag to select a connector.

3	Click Format [image] Connectors.

4	Enable the Show subordinate connectors check box.

5	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Line style picker, and click a line style.

7	Type a value in the Subordinate line width box.

 Related topics


Copying organization charts

You can copy the color, line style, fill attributes, and font properties in a box and apply them to another box.

There are many different pre-defined organization chart layouts to choose from when you create an organization chart. The layout determines the structure and orientation of an organization chart. You can copy an organization chart style that you have previously saved and apply it to an organization chart. For information about saving an organization chart style, see "Creating and saving organization charts."

In addition, you can import an outline into a Corel Presentations organization chart. You can also export an outline.

 How to


To copy the attributes of a box in an organization chart

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click a box whose attributes you want to copy.

3	Click Format [image] Get attributes.

4	Click a box to which you wan to copy attributes.

5	Click Format [image] Apply attributes.

 Related topics


To copy an organization chart style

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Retrieve style.

3	Choose the drive and folder where the chart style is stored.

4	Choose a file.

5	Click Open.

 Note

•	You must have saved a chart style first to be able to copy it.

 Related topics


To import an organization chart outline

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Import outline.

3	Choose the drive and folder where the organization chart outline is stored.

4	Choose a file.

5	Click Insert.

 Related topics


To export an organization chart outline

1	Double-click an organization chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Export.

3	Choose the drive and folder where you want to export the organization chart outline.

4	Type a filename in the Filename box.

5	Click Export.

 Note

•	A chart outline is automatically exported in the WordPerfect file format (.wpd).

 Related topics


Playing slide shows

Once you create a slide show, different options are available to play it in Corel Presentations.

Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For information on customizing your slide show to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

In this section, you'll learn about

•	playing slide shows and portable slide shows

•	speeding up slide shows

•	using the slide highlighter


Playing slide shows and portable slide shows

There are different ways to play slide shows in Corel Presentations. You can play a slide show by manually controlling the display of each slide. A slide show can also be played automatically, with each slide displayed in succession and where you can control the time delay between the display of each slide.

To check the appearance, transition, sound, and so on of a slide without playing the entire slide show, you can use QuickPlay.

You can also play portable slide shows, which play on any computer that uses the Windows operating system, even if it doesn't have Corel Presentations installed. For information about creating portable slide shows, see "Creating portable slide shows."

 How to


To play slide shows manually

1	Click View [image] Play slide show.

2	Choose a slide from the Beginning slide list box.

If you want to play the slide show continuously, enable the Repeat slide show until you press "ESC" check box.

3	Click Play.

4	Click in the slide show window to advance to the next slide or animation.

If you want to return to the previous slide or animation, right-click the slide show window, and click Previous slide.

 Tips

•	You can also play a slide show by clicking the Play slide show button on the toolbar.

•	You can also return to the previous slide or animation by pressing the Page up key.

 Related topics


To play a slide show automatically

1	Click Format [image] Slide properties [image] Display sequence.

2	In the Display next slide area, enable the After a delay of option.

3	Type a value in the Seconds box.

4	Enable the Apply to all slides in slide show check box.

 Notes

•	The time delay begins the second the first slide displays on the screen.

•	Time delays also apply to animated images. For example, if you set a two-second time delay for a slide, the first animated object automatically displays two seconds after the slide appears. The next animated object follows two seconds later, and so on. Two seconds after the last animated object displays, the show advances to the next slide.

 Tip

•	You can also apply a different time delay to each slide in a slide show by selecting an individual slide.

 Related topics


To play a slide show by using QuickPlay

1	Click a tab on the bottom of the slide show window.

2	Click the QuickPlay tab on the side of the slide show window.

3	Press Esc to stop playing the slide show.

 Note

•	When QuickPlay reaches the end of the show, it returns to the slide show window.

 Related topics


To play a portable slide show

1	Insert a disk containing a slide show into the floppy disk drive.

2	Click Start on the Windows taskbar, and click Run.

3	In the Open box, type the path and filename of the portable slide show.

 Related topics


Speeding up slide shows

You can speed up the display of a slide show by creating a QuickShow. When you create a QuickShow, each slide in the slide show is saved as a bitmap for quicker display. Slides from a QuickShow file display on the screen with the delay time you apply. For information about delay times, see "To play a slide show automatically."

 How to


To speed up a slide show display

1	Click View [image] Play slide show.

2	Click Create QuickShow.

3	Enable the Use QuickShow file check box.

 Notes

•	If you change any part of a slide show, you must re-create the QuickShow file.

•	QuickShow files use more memory than regular slide show files, creating a larger file.

 Related topics


Using the slide highlighter

During a slide show, you can emphasize points by using the slide Highlighter to circle, underline, and mark objects on a slide. The highlighting remains on the screen until the show advances to the next slide. You can erase the highlighting at any time.

 How to


To use the slide highlighter while playing a slide show

1	Click View [image] Play slide show.

2	Open the Highlighter color picker, and click a color.

3	Open the Width picker, and click a highlighter width.

4	Click Play.

5	As the slide show plays, drag to highlight areas of each slide.

 Related topics


To erase highlighting on the current slide

•	Right-click a slide, and click Erase highlighter.

 Related topics


Moving between Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations

You can convert Microsoft PowerPoint files to the Corel Presentations file format, open Microsoft PowerPoint files in Corel Presentations, and save Corel Presentations slide shows as Microsoft PowerPoint files.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	comparing Corel Presentations and Microsoft PowerPoint menu features

•	comparing Corel Presentations and Microsoft PowerPoint keyboard shortcuts

For more information about moving between Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations, see "Reference: Moving between Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations." at the end of this section.


Comparing Corel Presentations and Microsoft PowerPoint menu features

This topic describes the nine categories of menu features in Microsoft PowerPoint 97 and the equivalent Corel Presentations menu features.

For a complete list of all the file formats that can be imported into and exported from Corel Presentations, see "Import graphic file formats," "Export graphic file formats," and "Import and export text file formats."

 How to


Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations File menu features

The following table lists the File menu features found in Microsoft PowerPoint and the equivalent Corel Presentations File menu features.

Microsoft PowerPoint 97 feature	Corel Presentations feature
File [image] New	File [image] New
File [image] Open	File [image] Open
File [image] Close	File [image] Close
File [image] Save	File [image] Save
File [image] Save as	File [image] Save as
File [image] Save as HTML	File [image] Internet Publisher
File [image] Pack and go	File [image] Show On The Go
File [image] Page setup	File [image] Page setup
File [image] Page setup [image] Slides sized for	File [image] Page setup
File [image] Page setup [image] Slides sized for [image] Letter	File [image] Page setup [image] Letter
File [image] Page setup [image] Slides sized for [image] A4	File [image] Page setup [image] A4
File [image] Page setup [image] Slides sized for [image] Custom	File [image] Page setup [image] Add new form
File [image] Page setup [image] Width	File [image] Page setup [image] Margins [image] Left [image] Right
File [image] Page setup [image] Height	File [image] Page setup [image] Margins [image] Top [image] Bottom
File [image] Page setup [image] Orientation	File [image] Page setup [image] Margins
File [image] Page setup [image] Orientation	File [image] Page setup [image] Portrait
File [image] Page setup [image] Orientation	File [image] Page setup [image] Landscape
File [image] Print	File [image] Print
File [image] Send to	File [image] Send to
File [image] Properties	File [image] Properties
File [image] Exit	File [image] Exit
 Related topics


Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations Edit menu features

The following table lists the Edit menu features in Microsoft PowerPoint and the equivalent Corel Presentations Edit menu features.

Microsoft PowerPoint 97 feature	Corel Presentations feature
Edit [image] Undo	Edit [image] Undo
Edit [image] Repeat	Edit [image] Redo
Edit [image] Cut	Edit [image] Cut
Edit [image] Copy	Edit [image] Copy
Edit [image] Paste	Edit [image] Paste
Edit [image] Paste special	Edit [image] Paste special
Edit [image] Clear	Edit [image] Clear
Edit [image] Select all	Edit [image] Select [image] All
Edit [image] Delete slide	Edit [image] Delete slide(s)
Edit [image] Find	Edit [image] Find and replace
Edit [image] Replace	Edit [image] Find and replace
Edit [image] Links	Edit [image] Links
 Related topics


Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations View menu features

The following table lists the View menu features in Microsoft PowerPoint and the equivalent Corel Presentations View menu features.

Microsoft PowerPoint 97 feature	Corel Presentations feature
View [image] Slide	View [image] Slide Editor
View [image] Outline	View [image] Slide Outliner
View [image] Slide Sorter	View [image] Slide Sorter
View [image] Slide show	View [image] Play slide show
View [image] Master [image] Notes master	Format [image] Slide properties [image] Speaker notes
View [image] Speaker notes	Format [image] Slide properties [image] Speaker notes
View [image] Toolbars	View [image] Toolbars
View [image] Toolbars [image] Standard	View [image] Toolbars [image] Toolbar
View [image] Toolbars [image] Customize	Tools [image] Settings [image] Customize
View [image] Ruler	View [image] Ruler
View [image] Guides	View [image] Grid/guides/snap [image] Display guides
View [image] Header and footer [image] Slide [image] Include on slide [image] Date and time	Tools [image] Macro [image] Play [image] headfoot.wcm
View [image] Zoom	View [image] Zoom
View [image] Zoom [image] Zoom to [image] Fit	View [image] Zoom [image] Full page
View [image] Zoom [image] Zoom to [image] 400%	View [image] Zoom [image] Other
View [image] Zoom [image] Zoom to [image] 200%	View [image] Zoom [image] 200%
View [image] Zoom [image] Zoom to [image] 100%	View [image] Zoom [image] 100%
View [image] Zoom [image] Zoom to [image] 66%	View [image] Zoom [image] Other
View [image] Zoom [image] Zoom to [image] 50%	View [image] Zoom [image] 50%
View [image] Zoom [image] Zoom to [image] 33%	View [image] Zoom [image] Other
View [image] Zoom [image] Zoom to [image] Percent	View [image] Zoom [image] Other
 Related topics


Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations Insert menu features

The following table lists the Insert menu features in Microsoft PowerPoint and the equivalent Corel Presentations Insert menu features.

Microsoft PowerPoint 97 feature	Corel Presentations feature
Insert [image] New slide	Insert [image] New slide
Insert [image] New slide [image] Title slide	Insert [image] New slide [image] Title
Insert [image] New slide [image] Bulleted list	Insert [image] New slide [image] Bulleted list
Insert [image] New slide [image] Text and chart	Insert [image] New slide [image] Combination
Insert [image] New slide [image] Chart and text	Insert [image] New slide [image] Combination
Insert [image] New slide [image] Organization chart	Insert [image] New slide [image] Organization chart
Insert [image] New slide [image] Chart	Insert [image] New slide [image] Data chart
Insert [image] New slide [image] Blank	Insert [image] New slide [image] None
Insert [image] Date and time	Insert [image] Date/time
Insert [image] Date and time [image] week day,	Insert [image] Date/time
Insert [image] Date and time [image] Day [image] Month [image] year	Insert [image] Date/time
Insert [image] Date and time [image] Month [image] Day [image] Year	Insert [image] Date/time
Insert [image] Date and time [image] Time: seconds	Insert [image] Date/time
Insert [image] Date and time [image] Update automatically (insert as field)	Insert [image] Date/time [image] Keep the inserted date current
Insert [image] Tab	Format [image] Paragraph [image] Indent
Insert [image] Symbol	Insert [image] Symbol
Insert [image] Comment	Insert [image] Comment
Insert [image] Slide from outline	Insert [image] File
Insert [image] Picture	Insert [image] Graphics
Insert [image] Picture [image] Clipart	Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart
Insert [image] Picture [image] Clipart [image] Clipart	Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart [image] Clipart
Insert [image] Picture [image] Clipart [image] Pictures	Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart [image] Photos
Insert [image] Picture [image] Clipart [image] Sounds	Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart [image] Sounds
Insert [image] Picture [image] Clipart [image] Videos	Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart [image] Movies
Insert [image] Picture [image] From file	Insert [image] Graphics [image] From file
Insert [image] Picture [image] Auto shapes	Insert [image] Shape
Insert [image] Picture [image] Organization chart	Insert [image] Organization chart
Insert [image] Picture [image] WordArt	Insert [image] Graphics [image] TextArt
Insert [image] Picture [image] From scanner	Insert [image] Graphics [image] Acquire image
Insert [image] Text box	Insert [image] Text box
Insert [image] Movies and sounds	Insert [image] Movies
	Insert [image] Sounds
Insert [image] Movies and sounds [image] Movie from gallery	Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart [image] Movie
Insert [image] Movies and sounds [image] Movie from file	Insert [image] Movie
Insert [image] Movies and sounds [image] Sound from gallery	Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart [image] Sounds
Insert [image] Movies and sounds [image] Sound from file	Insert [image] Sound
Insert [image] Movies and sounds [image] Play CD audio track	Insert [image] Sound [image] CD
Insert [image] Movies and sounds [image] Record sound	Insert [image] Sound [image] Record
Insert [image] Chart	Insert [image] Data chart
Insert [image] Object	Insert [image] Object
Insert [image] Object [image] Object type	Insert [image] Object [image] Object type
Insert [image] Object [image] Object type [image] all registered programs	Insert [image] Object [image] Object type
Insert [image] Hyperlink	Format [image] Object properties [image] Speedlink
Insert [image] Hyperlink [image] Link to file or URL	Format [image] Object properties [image] Action [image] Browse Internet
 Related topics


Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations Format menu features

The following table lists the Format menu features in Microsoft PowerPoint and the equivalent Corel Presentations Format menu features.

Microsoft PowerPoint 97 feature	Corel Presentations feature
Format [image] Font	Format [image] Font
Format [image] Font [image] Font [image] List of installed fonts	Format [image] Font [image] Face
Format [image] Font [image] Effects	Format [image] Font [image] Appearance
Format [image] Font [image] Effects [image] Underline	Format [image] Font [image] Appearance [image] Underline
Format [image] Font [image] Effects [image] Shadow	Format [image] Font [image] Shadow tab
Format [image] Font [image] Font style [image] Bold	Format [image] Font [image] Appearance [image] Bold
Format [image] Font [image] Font style [image] Italic	Format [image] Font [image] Appearance [image] Italic
Format [image] Font [image] Font style [image] Bold italic	Format [image] Font [image] Appearance [image] Bold/italic
Format [image] Font [image] Size	Format [image] Font [image] Size
Format [image] Font [image] Size [image] Available font sizes	Format [image] Font [image] Size
Format [image] Font [image] Color [image] More colors	Format [image] Font [image] Color [image] More
Format [image] Bullet	Format [image] Bulleted list properties [image] Bullets [image] Bullet shape
Format [image] Bullet [image] Color	Format [image] Bulleted list properties [image] Bullets [image] Color
Format [image] Bullet [image] Color [image] More colors	Format [image] Bulleted list properties [image] Bullets [image] Color [image] More
Format [image] Bullet [image] Size	Format [image] Bulleted list properties [image] Bullets [image] Relative size
Format [image] Alignment	Format [image] Justification
Format [image] Alignment [image] Right	Format [image] Justification [image] Right
Format [image] Alignment [image] Left	Format [image] Justification [image] Left
Format [image] Alignment [image] Center	Format [image] Justification [image] Center
Format [image] Alignment [image] Justify	Format [image] Justification [image] Auto
Format [image] Line spacing	Format [image] Line [image] Spacing
Format [image] Line spacing [image] Line spacing	Format [image] Line [image] Spacing
Format [image] Slide layout	Format [image] Layout Gallery
Format [image] Slide layout [image] Title slide	Format [image] Layout Gallery [image] Title
Format [image] Slide layout [image] Bulleted list	Format [image] Layout Gallery [image] Bulleted list
Format [image] Slide layout [image] Chart and text	Format [image] Layout Gallery [image] Combination
Format [image] Slide layout [image] Organization chart	Format [image] Layout Gallery [image] Organization chart
Format [image] Slide layout [image] Chart	Format [image] Layout Gallery [image] Data chart
Format [image] Slide layout [image] Blank	Format [image] Layout Gallery [image] None
Format [image] Background	Format [image] Background Gallery
Format [image] Apply design	Format [image] Master Gallery
Format [image] Apply design [image] Available PowerPoint designs	Format [image] Master Gallery
Format [image] Color and lines	Format [image] Object properties
Format [image] Color and lines [image] Fill [image] Color	Format [image] Object properties [image] Fill
Format [image] Color and lines [image] Line [image] Color	Format [image] Object properties [image] Line [image] Color
Format [image] Color and lines [image] Line [image] Dashed	Format [image] Object properties [image] Line [image] Style
Format [image] Color and lines [image] Line [image] Style	Format [image] Object properties [image] Line [image] Width
Format [image] Color and lines [image] Line [image] Weight	Format [image] Object properties [image] Line [image] Width
Format [image] Color and lines [image] Arrows [image] Begin	Format [image] Object properties [image] Line [image] Starting cap
Format [image] Color and lines [image] Arrows [image] End	Format [image] Object properties [image] Line [image] Ending cap
Format [image] AutoShape	Edit [image] Arrange
Format [image] AutoShape [image] Size [image] Size and rotate [image] Rotation	Edit [image] Arrange [image] Rotate
Format [image] Picture [image] Image control [image] Color	Tools [image] Image tools
Format [image] Picture [image] Image control [image] Color [image] Grayscale	Tools [image] Image tools [image] Gray scale
Format [image] Picture [image] Image control [image] Color [image] Black and white	Tools [image] Image tools  Black and white
Format  Picture  Image control  Color  Watermark	Tools  Image tools  Watermark
Format  Picture  Image control  Color  Brightness	Tools  Image tools  Brightness
Format  Picture  Image control  Color  Contrast	Tools  Image tools  Contrast
 Related topics


Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations Tool menu features

The following table lists the Tool menu features in Microsoft PowerPoint and the equivalent Corel Presentations Tool menu features.

Microsoft PowerPoint 97 feature	Corel Presentations feature
Tools [image] Spelling	Tools [image] Spell Checker
Tools [image] Spelling [image] Change to	Tools [image] Spell Checker [image] Replace with
Tools [image] Style checker	Tools [image] Grammatik
Tools [image] Style checker [image] Check for [image] Spelling	Tools [image] Grammatik, Options [image] Checking styles [image] Spelling Plus
Tools [image] Style checker [image] Check for [image] Visual clarity	Tools [image] Grammatik [image] Options [image] Analysis and readability
Tools [image] Style checker [image] Check for [image] Visual clarity [image] Legibility	Tools [image] Grammatik [image] Options [image] Analysis [image] Readability
Tools [image] Language	Tools [image] Grammatik [image] Options [image] Language
Tools [image] Language [image] Mark selected text as	Tools [image] Grammatik [image] Options [image] Language [image] Language
Tools [image] AutoCorrect	Tools [image] QuickCorrect
Tools [image] AutoCorrect [image] Correct two initial capitals	Tools [image] QuickCorrect [image] Options [image] Correct two irregular capitals
Tools [image] AutoCorrect [image] Capitalize first letter of sentence	Tools [image] QuickCorrect [image] Format As-You-Go [image] Capitalize next letter after end-of-sentence punctuation
Tools [image] AutoCorrect [image] Replace text as you type	Tools [image] QuickCorrect
Tools [image] AutoCorrect [image] Replace text as you type [image] Replace	Tools [image] QuickCorrect [image] Replace
Tools [image] AutoCorrect [image] Replace text as you type [image] With	Tools [image] QuickCorrect [image] With
Tools [image] AutoClipArt	Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart
Tools [image] Macro	Tools [image] Macro
Tools [image] Macro [image] Macros	Tools [image] Macro [image] Play
Tools [image] Macro [image] Record new macro	Tools [image] Macro [image] Record
Tools [image] Customize	Tools [image] Settings [image] Customize
Tools [image] Customize [image] Toolbars	Tools [image] Settings [image] Customize [image] Toolbars
Tools [image] Customize [image] Commands	Tools [image] Settings [image] Customize [image] Menus
Tools [image] Customize [image] Commands [image] File	Tools [image] Settings [image] Customize [image] Menus [image] Edit
Tools [image] Customize [image] Commands [image] Edit	Tools [image] Settings [image] Customize [image] Menus [image] Edit
Tools [image] Customize [image] Commands [image] View	Tools [image] Settings [image] Customize [image] Menus [image] Edit
Tools [image] Customize [image] Commands [image] Insert	Tools [image] Settings [image] Customize [image] Menus [image] Edit
Tools [image] Customize [image] Commands [image] Format	Tools [image] Settings [image] Customize [image] Menus [image] Edit
Tools [image] Customize [image] Commands [image] Tools	Tools [image] Settings [image] Customize [image] Menus [image] Edit
Tools [image] Customize [image] Commands [image] Windows Help	Tools [image] Settings [image] Customize [image] Menus [image] Edit
Tools [image] Customize [image] Options	Tools [image] Settings [image] Display
Tools [image] Customize [image] Options [image] Show screen tips	Tools [image] Settings [image] Display [image] Quicktips
Tools [image] Options	Tools [image] Settings [image] Display
Tools [image] Options [image] View	Tools [image] Settings [image] Environment
Tools [image] Options [image] View [image] Show [image] Startup dialog	Tools [image] Settings [image] Environment [image] Startup options [image] Display document selection (New...) dialog box
Tools [image] Options [image] View [image] Show [image] New slide dialog	Tools [image] Settings [image] Environment [image] Startup options [image] Display document
Tools [image] Options [image] General [image] User Information [image] Name	File [image] Properties [image] Author
Tools [image] Options [image] Edit [image] Text [image] Replace straight quotes	Tools [image] Quick Correct [image] Select quotation marks
Tools [image] Options [image] Print	File [image] Print
Tools [image] Options [image] Print [image] Printing Options [image] Print True Type fonts as graphics	File [image] Print [image] Advanced [image] Print text as graphics
Tools [image] Options [image] Print [image] Options for current document only [image] Use the following default printer settings [image] Print what [image] Slides	File [image] Print  Print range  Slides
Tools  Options  Print  Options for current document only  Use the following default printer settings  Print what  Handouts	File  Print  Print range  Handouts
Tools  Options  Print  Options for current document only	File  Print  Print range  Speaker notes
Use the following default printer settings  Print what  Notes page	File  Print  Print range  Audience notes
Tools  Options  Print  Options for current document only  Use the following default printer settings  Print what  Black and white	File  Print  Advanced  Adjust image to print black and white
Tools  Options  Print  Options for current document only  Use the following default printer settings  Print what  Scale to fit paper	File  Print  Layout  Fit to output page
Tools  Options  Save	File  Settings  Files
Tools  Options  Save  Save options  Fill text search information	File  Save  Advanced  Content search criteria  Match all word forms
Tools  Options  Save  Save Options  Save AutoRecover info every _ minutes	Tools  Settings  Files  Backup  Timed document backup every _ minutes
Tools  Options  Save  Save options  Save PowerPoint files as  Microsoft PowerPoint 97 Presentation	File  Save as  File type  PowerPoint
Tools  Options  Save  Save options  Save PowerPoint files as  Microsoft PowerPoint 95 and 97 Presentation	File  Save as  File type  PowerPoint
Tools  Options  Save  Save options  Save PowerPoint files as  Microsoft PowerPoint 95 Presentation	File  Save as  File type  PowerPoint
Tools  Options  Advanced  File locations  Default file location	Tools  Settings  Files  Slide show/drawings document folder
 Related topics


Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations Slide show menu features

The following table lists the slide show menu features in Microsoft PowerPoint and the equivalent Corel Presentations slide show menu features.

Microsoft PowerPoint 97 feature	Corel Presentations feature
Slide show [image] View show	View [image] Play slide show
Slide show [image] Set up show [image] Show type [image] Loop continuously until ESC	View [image] Play slide show [image] Repeat slide show until you press ESC
Slide show [image] Set up show [image] Slides [image] Custom show	View [image] Play slide show [image] Audience
Slide show [image] Set up show [image] Advance slides [image] Manually	Format [image] Slide properties [image] Display sequence [image] Manually
Slide show [image] Set up show [image] Advance slides [image] Using timings [image] If present	Format [image] Slide properties [image] Display sequence after a delay of _ seconds
Slide show [image] Action buttons	Insert shape [image] Action shapes
Slide show [image] Action buttons [image] Custom	Insert [image] Shape [image] Action shapes [image] Custom
Slide show [image] Action buttons [image] Home	Insert [image] Shape [image] Action shapes [image] Home
Slide show [image] Action buttons [image] Help	Insert [image] Shape [image] Action shapes [image] Help
Slide show [image] Action buttons [image] Information	Insert [image] Shape [image] Action shapes [image] Information
Slide show [image] Action buttons [image] Back of previous	Insert [image] Shape [image] Action shapes [image] Back
Slide show [image] Action buttons [image] Forward of next	Insert [image] Shape [image] Action shapes [image] Forward
Slide show [image] Action buttons [image] Beginning	Insert [image] Shape [image] Action shapes [image] Beginning
Slide show [image] Action buttons [image] End	Insert [image] Shape [image] Action shapes [image] End
Slide show [image] Action buttons [image] Return	Insert [image] Shape [image] Action shapes [image] Return
Slide show [image] Action buttons [image] Document	Insert [image] Shape [image] Action shapes [image] Document
Slide show [image] Action buttons [image] Sound	Insert [image] Shape [image] Action shapes [image] Sound
Slide show [image] Action buttons [image] Movie	Insert [image] Shape [image] Action shapes [image] Movie
Slide show [image] Action settings...	Format [image] Object properties [image] SpeedLink
Slide show [image] Action settings [image] Mouse click [image] Action on click [image] None	Format [image] Object properties [image] SpeedLink [image] Link assignment [image] Unassigned
Slide show [image] Action settings [image] Mouse click [image] Action on click [image] Hyperlink to	Format [image] Object properties [image] SpeedLink [image] Link assignment [image] Go to
Slide show [image] Action settings [image] Mouse click [image] Action on click [image] Run program	Format [image] Object properties [image] SpeedLink [image] Link assignment [image] Action [image] Launch program
Slide show [image] Action settings [image] Mouse click [image] Action on click [image] Play sound	Format [image] Object properties [image] SpeedLink [image] Link assignment [image] Action [image] Play sound
Slide show [image] Preset animation	Format [image] Object properties [image] Object animation
Slide show [image] Preset animation [image] Off	Format [image] Object properties [image] Object animation [image] Effects [image] None
Slide show [image] Preset animation [image] Drive-in	Format [image] Object properties [image] Object animation [image] Animate object across screen [image] Fly in [image] Right to left
Slide show [image] Preset animation [image] Flying	Format [image] Object properties [image] Object animation [image] Animate object across screen [image] Fly in [image] Left to right
Slide show [image] Preset animation [image] camera	Format [image] Object properties [image] Object animation [image] Animate object in place [image] Effects [image] Photo lens out
Slide show [image] Preset animation [image] Drop in	Format [image] Object properties [image] Object animation [image] Animate object across screen [image] Fly in [image] Top to bottom
Slide show [image] Preset animation [image] Fly from top	Format [image] Object properties [image] Object animation [image] Animate object across screen [image] Fly in [image] Top to bottom
Slide show [image] Preset animation [image] Wipe right	Format [image] Object properties [image] Object animation [image] Animate object in place [image] Sweep [image] Left to right
Slide show [image] Preset animation [image] Dissolve	Format [image] Object properties [image] Object animation [image] Animate object in place [image] Dissolve
Slide show [image] Preset animation [image] Split vertical out	Format [image] Object properties [image] Object animation [image] Animate object in place [image] Sweep open
Slide show [image] Preset animation [image] Appear	Format [image] Object properties [image] Object animation [image] Animate object in place [image] Immediate
Slide show [image] Slide transition	Format [image] Slide properties [image] Transition
Slide show [image] Slide transition [image] Effect [image] Blinds horizontal	Format [image] Slide Properties [image] Transition  Effects  Blinds  Direction  Horizontal
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Blinds vertical	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Blinds  Direction  Vertical
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Box in	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Stretch to center
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Box out	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Stretch from center
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Cover down	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Push away  Direction  Top to bottom
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Cover left	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Push away  Direction  Right to left
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Cover right	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Push away  Direction  Left to right
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Cover up	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Push away  Direction  Bottom to top
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Cover left-down	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Push away  Direction  Left and down
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Cover left-up	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Push away  Direction  Left and up
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Cover right-down	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Push away  Direction  Right and down
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Cover right-up	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Push away  Direction  Right and up
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Cut	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Immediate
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Dissolve	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Dissolve
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Fade through black	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Fade
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Split horizontal in	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Slide in close  Direction  Horizontal
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Split horizontal out	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Slide out open  Direction  Horizontal
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Split vertical in	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Slide in close  Direction  Vertical
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Split vertical out	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Slide out open  Direction  Vertical
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Wipe down	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Slide in  Direction  Top to bottom
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Wipe left	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Slide in  Direction  Right to left
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Wipe right	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Slide in  Direction  Left to right
Slide show  Slide transition  Effect  Wipe up	Format  Slide properties  Transition  Effects  Slide in  Direction  Bottom to top
Slide show  Slide transition  Sound  Other sound...	Format  Slide properties  Sound
Slide show  Hide slide	Format  Slide properties  Do not include this slide (skip)
Slide show  Custom shows	Tools  Custom audiences
 Related topics


Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations Window menu features

The following table lists the Window menu features in Microsoft PowerPoint and the equivalent Corel Presentations Window menu features.

Microsoft PowerPoint 97 feature	Corel Presentations feature
Window [image] Arrange all	Window [image] Tile top to bottom; Window [image] Tile side by side
Window [image] Cascade	Window [image] Cascade
Window [image] List of open slide shows	Window [image] List of open slide shows
 Related topics


Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations Help menu features

The following table lists the Help menu features in Microsoft PowerPoint and the equivalent Corel Presentations Help menu features.

Microsoft PowerPoint 97 feature	Corel Presentations feature
Help [image] Microsoft PowerPoint Help	Help [image] Microsoft PowerPoint Help
Help [image] Contents and index	Help [image] Help topics
Help [image] Microsoft on the Web	Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Corel Web Site
Help [image] Microsoft on the Web [image] Links to different MS sites	Help [image] Corel on the Web
Help [image] About Microsoft PowerPoint	Help [image] About Corel Presentations
 Related topics


Comparing Corel Presentations and Microsoft PowerPoint keyboard shortcuts

This topic describes five categories of Microsoft PowerPoint keyboard shortcuts and the equivalent Corel Presentations keyboard shortcuts.

 How to


Keyboard shortcuts for deleting and copying text

The following table lists the Corel Presentations keyboard shortcuts for deleting and copying text and the equivalent Microsoft PowerPoint keyboard shortcuts.

Microsoft PowerPoint keyboard shortcut	What it does	Corel Presentations keyboard shortcut
Backspace	Deletes one character to the left	Backspace
Ctrl + Backspace	Deletes one word to the left	Ctrl + Backspace
Delete	Deletes one character to the right	Delete
Ctrl + Delete	Deletes one word to the right	Ctrl + Delete
Ctrl + X	Moves the object to the Clipboard	Ctrl + X
Ctrl + C	Copies the selected object	Ctrl + C
Ctrl + V	Inserts object from the Clipboard	Ctrl + V
Ctrl + Z	Undoes the last action	Ctrl + Z
 Related topics


Keyboard shortcuts for selecting text and objects

The following table lists the Corel Presentations keyboard shortcuts for selecting text and objects and the equivalent Microsoft PowerPoint keyboard shortcuts.

Microsoft PowerPoint 97 keyboard shortcut	What it does	Corel Presentations keyboard shortcut
Shift + Right arrow key	Selects one character to the right	Shift + Right arrow key
Shift + Left arrow key	Selects one character to the left	Shift + Left arrow key
Ctrl + Shift + Right arrow key	Selects to the end of a word	Ctrl + Shift + Right arrow key
Ctrl + Shift + Left arrow key	Selects to the beginning of a word	Ctrl + Shift + Left arrow key
Ctrl + A	Selects all objects	Ctrl + A
 Related topics


Keyboard shortcuts for working in dialog boxes

The following table lists the Corel Presentations keyboard shortcuts for working in dialog boxes and the equivalent Microsoft PowerPoint keyboard shortcuts.

Microsoft PowerPoint 97 keyboard shortcut	What it does	Corel Presentations keyboard shortcut
Ctrl + Tab	Moves to the next tab in a dialog box	Ctrl + Tab
Ctrl + Shift + Tab	Switches to the previous tab in a dialog box	Ctrl + Shift + Tab
Tab	Moves to the next option in a dialog box	Tab
Shift + Tab	Moves to the previous option or option group	Shift + Tab
Alt + Down arrow key	Opens a selected list box	Alt + Down arrow key
Esc	Closes a selected list box	Esc
 Related topics


Keyboard shortcuts for controlling slide shows

The following table lists the Corel Presentations keyboard shortcuts for slide show controls and the equivalent Microsoft PowerPoint keyboard shortcuts.

Microsoft PowerPoint 97 keyboard shortcut	What it does	Corel Presentations keyboard shortcut
Enter or Spacebar	Advances to the next slide	Enter or Spacebar
P or Backspace	Returns to the previous slide	Page up
<number> + Enter	Goes to slide <number>	Ctrl + G
Esc	Ends a slide show	Esc
E	Erases on-screen annotations	Ctrl + E
 Related topics


Keyboard shortcuts for moving around in text

The following table lists the Corel Presentations keyboard shortcuts for moving around in text and the equivalent Microsoft PowerPoint keyboard shortcuts.

Microsoft PowerPoint 97 keyboard shortcut	What it does	Corel Presentations keyboard shortcut
Left arrow key	Moves one character to the left	Left arrow key
Right arrow key	Moves one character to the right	Right arrow key
Up arrow key	Moves one line up	Up arrow key
Down arrow key	Moves one line down	Down arrow key
Ctrl + Left arrow key	Moves one word to the left	Ctrl + Left arrow key
Ctrl + Right arrow key	Moves one word to the right	Ctrl + Right arrow key
End	Moves to the end of a line	End
Home	Moves to the beginning of a line	Home
Ctrl + End	Moves to the end of a text box	Ctrl + End
Ctrl + Home	Moves to the beginning of a text box	Ctrl + Home
 Related topics


Reference: Moving between Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations

Because Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations share basic formatting features and many of the same menu options, you can create Microsoft PowerPoint files and then easily import files into Corel Presentations.

The following Microsoft PowerPoint file formats can be opened in Corel Presentations:

•	Microsoft PowerPoint 2.0

•	Microsoft PowerPoint 3.0

•	Microsoft PowerPoint 4.0

•	Microsoft PowerPoint 7.0 (Microsoft Office 95)

•	Microsoft PowerPoint 97

You can save Corel Presentations files in the following Microsoft PowerPoint file format:

•	Microsoft PowerPoint 7.0 (Microsoft Office 95)

Despite similarities, Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations are distinguished by some differences in terminology, tools, and technology. Therefore, a conversion must take place to use a Microsoft PowerPoint file in Corel Presentations. Occasionally, some information in a file may not be displayed in the same way after the conversion process. For more information, see "Microsoft PowerPoint opening notes," and "Microsoft PowerPoint saving notes."


Printing in Corel Presentations

Extensive printing options designed for both desktop and commercial printing are available in Corel Presentations.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	printing slide shows and drawings

•	printing two-sided documents

•	adjusting the position and size of slides or drawings for printing

•	customizing printing

•	configuring printer settings


Printing slide shows and drawings

Before printing a slide show or drawing, you can preview the job to see how it will look when printed.

You can print an entire slide show or drawing, a range of slides or pages, a specific slide or page, or selected objects on a slide or page. You can also print handouts, speaker notes, and audience notes. If you print to a file on a disk rather than to a printer, you can print the file from a computer even if Corel Presentations is not installed on the computer.

The following illustration shows 1) how you can use speaker notes as cue cards and 2) how you can use audience notes to create handouts.

Once you've submitted a print job, you can view its status, including its name and source, the printer it was sent to, when it was submitted, when printing started, and when it completed. If you print to a network printer, you can pause or cancel print jobs without affecting other jobs on the list.

 How to


To preview a print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click Preview.

If you are printing a slide show, click the preview window to view each slide consecutively.

 Note

•	The preview window closes automatically when you click the drawing or the last slide in the slide show.

 Tip

•	You can also close the preview window by pressing ESC.

•	You can also preview a print job by clicking the Mini preview button in the Print dialog box.

 Related topics


To print a slide show or drawing

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	In the Destination area, choose a printer from the Name list box.

4	Type a value in the Number of copies box.

5	Click Print.

You can also
Print the current page or slide only	In the Print range area, enable the Current view option.
Print a specific object in a slide or drawing	In the Print range area, enable the Selected objects option.
Print a range of slides	In the Print range area, enable the Slides option, and type a slide range in the box beside it.
Print handouts	In the Print range area, enable the Handouts option, and type a slide range in the box below it. Type a value in the Number of slides per page box.
Print speaker notes	In the Print range area, enable the Speaker notes option, and type a slide range in the box below it. Type a value in the Number of slides per page box.
Print audience notes	In the Print range area, enable the Audience notes option, and type a slide range in the box below it. Type a value in the Number of slides per page box.
Print to a file	In the Destination area, enable the Print to file check box. Click Print. In the Print to file dialog box, choose the drive and folder where you want to print the file. Type a filename in the Filename box. Click Save.
 Note

•	When printing speaker notes, the font size may vary to accommodate the amount of text you are printing. For example, the more text that is added to the speaker notes box the smaller the font is when you print speaker notes. If there is too much text in the speaker notes box, not all of it will print.

 Tip

•	You can also print a slide show or drawing by clicking the Print button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To view print status

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Main tab.

3	In the Destination area, choose a printer from the Name list box.

4	Click Status.

You can also
Pause printing	In the Print history and status dialog box, choose a document from the list, and click Document [image] Pause printing.
Cancel printing	In the Print history and status dialog box, choose a document from the list, and click Document [image] Cancel printing.
 Note

•	Print jobs display in the Print history and status dialog box in the order they were sent.

 Related topics


Printing two-sided documents

If your printer is capable, you can print two-sided slide shows automatically. If it is not capable, you can perform this function manually.

 How to


To print a two-sided document automatically

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	In the Automatic (printer supports two-sided printing) area, enable one of the following options:

•	Book (side to side)

•	Tablet (top to bottom)

4	Click Print.

 Note

•	You cannot use two-sided printing when you print a single slide or drawing.

 Related topics


To print a two-sided document manually

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	In the Manual (two steps) area, enable one of the following options:

•	Step 1: print odd pages

•	Step 2: print even pages

If you are printing the second side of the document, enable the option not used for the first side of the document.

4	Click Print.

5	When printing is complete, turn the pages over and reload them in the paper tray.

6	Repeat steps 1 to 4.

 Note

•	You cannot use two-sided printing when you print a single slide or drawing.

 Related topics


Adjusting the position and size of slides or drawings for printing

You can print a slide or drawing as it appears in the document. However, you can also  increase or reduce the size of a slide or drawing.

You can scale slides and drawings to fit a variety of page sizes. Slides and drawings can also be tiled, for producing such items as large posters.

 How to


To print a slide or drawing in actual size

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Enable the As in document option.

4	Click Print.

 Related topics


To increase or reduce a slide or drawing to fit an output page

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Enable the Fit to output page option.

4	Click Output page.

5	In the Layout dialog box, choose a page definition from the list.

6	In the Orientation area, enable one of the following options:

•	Portrait

•	Landscape

7	In the Margins area, type values in the following boxes:

•	Left

•	Right

•	Top

•	Bottom

8	Click OK.

9	Click Print.

 Related topics


To print a slide or drawing to scale

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Enable the Scaling/tiling option.

4	In the Size area, type a value in the Width box.

If you do not want to maintain the aspect ratio, disable the Maintain aspect ratio check box, and type a value in the Length box.

5	Click Print.

 Related topics


To print tiled slides or drawings

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Enable the Scaling/tiling option.

4	Enable the Print tiled pages check box.

5	In the # of tiles area, type a value in the following boxes:

•	Row

•	Column

If the Maintain aspect ratio check box is enabled, you cannot type a value in the Column box.

6	Click Print.

 Related topics


Customizing printing

Several options are available for customized printing. You can print file information on a slide show or drawing, which includes the information at the bottom of the printed page. In addition, you can show crop/fold marks when you print a slide show or drawing, so that you can clearly identify the edges of the printed area for such things as using a paper cutter. You can also change the image to print in color, to include the background, and to print black and white or grayscale. As well, you can print text as graphics, and you can print the title and number of a slide. You can also send a file to Graphicsland, which is a slide imaging service that creates such things as professional-looking slides, transparencies, and posters.

 How to


To print file information

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	In the details area, enable the Print file information check box.

 Related topics


To show crop/fold marks

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Enable the Show crop/fold marks check box.

 Related topics


To adjust the advanced print options

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Print in color

•	Print background

•	Adjust image to print black and white

•	Print text as graphics

•	Print slide title

•	Print slide number

 Related topics


To send a file to Graphicsland

1	Click File [image] Send to [image] Graphicsland.

2	Follow the instructions on the screen.

 Note

•	There is a charge for Graphicsland services.

 Related topics


Configuring printer settings

You can configure and save settings for a printer. The settings remain effective until they are changed or until you quit Corel Presentations. You can save customized print settings for future print jobs. You can also create named print settings after editing them.

 How to


To replace default print settings

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Change any settings in the Print dialog box.

3	Click the Main tab.

4	Click Edit settings.

5	In the Named settings dialog box, choose Default from the Name for current settings list box.

6	Click Replace.

You can also
Retrieve the default settings	In the Named settings dialog box, choose Default from the Name for current settings list box. Click Retrieve.
Restore the default settings	In the Named settings dialog box, choose Default from the Name for current settings list box. Click Restore.
 Notes

•	You can retrieve default settings if you have not replaced the default settings.

•	You can restore default settings if you have replaced the default settings.

 Related topics


To create a named print setting

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Change any settings in the Print dialog box.

3	Click the Main tab.

4	Click Edit settings.

5	In the Named settings dialog box, type a name for the current settings in the Name for current settings box.

6	Click Add.

You can also
Retrieve a custom setting	In the Named settings dialog box, choose a setting from the Name for current settings list box. Click Retrieve.
Delete a customized setting	In the Named settings dialog box, choose a setting from the Name for current settings list box. Click Delete.
 Note

•	You cannot delete the default setting.

 Related topics


Setting up rulers, grids, and guidelines in Corel Presentations

You can use several visual aids, such as rulers, gridlines, alignment guides, and crosshairs, to help you place objects precisely on slides or drawings.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	setting up rulers

•	setting up gridlines

•	setting up alignment guides

•	setting up crosshairs and the pointer position


Setting up rulers

You can display or hide rulers on the horizontal and vertical axes in a slide show or drawing. Using these horizontal and vertical rulers allows you to move and align objects precisely, and to adjust indents and tabs in text.

 How to


To display or hide the ruler

•	Click View [image] Ruler.

A check mark beside the Ruler menu command indicates that the ruler is displayed.

 Related topics


Setting up gridlines

By displaying the grid in Corel Presentations, you can use a series of horizontal and vertical gridlines to align objects. You can also hide these gridlines. Grid options let you customize the gridlines.

By default, objects are forced to snap to the grid, even when the grid is hidden; however, you can disable snapping objects to the grid.

Setting the grid options allows you to specify the amount of space between the horizontal and vertical gridlines and intervals between displayed gridlines.

As well, when you make changes to the default settings, you can restore them. You can also save any options you specify as the default settings.

 How to


To display or hide gridlines

•	Click View [image] Grid/guides/snap [image] Display grid.

A check mark beside the Display grid menu command indicates that the grid is displayed.

 Related topics


To disable snapping objects to the grid

•	Click View [image] Grid/guides/snap [image] Snap to grid.

No check mark beside the Snap to grid menu command indicates that it is disabled.

 Note

•	The Snap to grid menu command is enabled by default.

 Related topics


To set grid options

1	Click View [image] Grid/guides/snap [image] Grid/guides/snap options.

2	Enable the Display grid check box.

3	Type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Horizontal spacing [image] changes the amount of space between the horizontal gridlines

•	Vertical spacing [image] changes the amount of space between the vertical gridlines

•	Interval [image] displays gridlines in intervals, based on the number you type (for example, if you type 4, every fourth gridline is displayed)

 Related topics


To restore default grid settings

1	Click View [image] Grid/guides/snap [image] Grid/guides/snap options.

2	Click Load defaults.

 Related topics


To save grid options as defaults

1	Click View [image] Grid/guides/snap [image] Grid/guides/snap options.

2	Make any changes to the snap options.

3	Click Save as defaults.

 Related topics


Setting up alignment guides

Displaying alignment guides allows you to line up objects within a slide show or drawing. You can also hide these alignment guides. You can create an alignment guide by dragging it from the horizontal or vertical ruler.

By setting alignment guide options, you can specify how objects snap to them. As well, you can clear an alignment guide.

 How to


To display or hide alignment guides

•	Click View [image] Grid/guides/snap [image] Display guides.

A check mark beside the Display guides menu command indicates that the alignment guides are displayed.

 Related topics


To create an alignment guide

1	Click View [image] Ruler.

2	Drag from the horizontal or vertical ruler to a position on the slide or drawing.

 Note

•	The ruler must be displayed to create an alignment guide.

 Related topics


To set alignment guide options

1	Click View [image] Grid/guides/snap [image] Grid/guides/snap options.

2	In the Alignment guide area, type a value in the Snap zone box to specify at what distance an object will snap to the alignment guide.

 Related topics


To snap objects to an alignment guide

•	Click View [image] Grid/guides/snap [image] Snap to guides.

 Related topics


To clear an alignment guide

•	Click View [image] Grid/guides/snap [image] Clear guides.

 Related topics


Setting up crosshairs and the pointer position

The crosshair pointer is a pointer that is attached to crossed lines extending to the edges of the slide show or drawing window. You can display or hide the crosshairs. You can also, in the application bar, display or hide the coordinates of the pointer's exact position.

 How to


To display or hide crosshairs

•	Click View [image] Crosshair.

A check mark beside the Crosshair menu command indicates that the crosshairs are displayed.

 Related topics


To display or hide the position of the pointer

•	Click View [image] Show pointer position.

A check mark beside the Show pointer position menu command indicates that the pointer position is displayed.

 Related topics


Drawing and editing shapes in slide shows and drawings

You can enhance Corel Presentations slides and drawings with seven categories of preset shapes: line, basic, arrow, flowchart, star, callout, and action.

In this section you'll learn about

•	drawing shapes

•	editing shapes


Drawing shapes

Line shapes can be everything from a simple line to a polyline. You can draw lines, polylines, and curves.

You can also draw closed curves and Bezier curves.

Other shapes that you can draw include basic shapes, such as rectangles and diamonds; arrow shapes; flowchart shapes, such as connectors and processes; star shapes; callout shapes; and action shapes, such as volume buttons and transition buttons. Certain shapes have more complex properties that you can modify to enhance a slide show. For example, action shapes can be linked to assigned actions that you initiate when displaying the slide show. For more information about assigning actions to objects, see "Creating SpeedLink objects."

 How to


To draw a line

1	Click Insert [image] Shape [image] Line shapes, and click a line shape.

2	Drag to draw the line shape.

 Tips

•	You can also draw a precise horizontal, vertical, or diagonal line shape by holding down Shift while dragging to draw the line.

•	You can also draw line shapes by clicking the Line shapes button on the tool palette.

 Related topics


To draw a polyline

1	Click Insert [image] Shape [image] Line shapes, and click a polyline shape.

2	Drag to draw the polyline.

3	Double-click to complete the shape.

 Tips

•	You can transform an elliptical arc polyline shape into a circle by clicking the shape and moving an edit point to the inside of the arc.

•	You can also draw line shapes by clicking the Line shapes button on the tool palette.

 Related topics


To draw a curve

1	Click Insert [image] Shape [image] Line Shapes [image] Curve.

2	Click once in the drawing or slide show window.

3	Drag to start the curved line.

4	Click to create the first section of the curve.

5	Drag to continue the curve.

6	Double-click to complete the curve.

 Tip

•	You can also draw line shapes by clicking the Line shapes button on the tool palette.

 Related topics


To draw a closed curve

1	Click Insert [image] Shape [image] Line shapes [image] Closed curve.

2	Click once in the drawing or slide show window.

3	Drag to start the curved shape.

4	Click to create the first section of the curve.

5	Continue to drag and click to create the curved shape you want.

6	Double-click to complete the closed curve.

 Tip

•	You can also draw line shapes by clicking the Line shapes button on the tool palette.

 Related topics


To draw a Bezier curve

1	Click Insert [image] Shape [image] Line shapes [image] Bezier.

2	For each section of the curve, click to start the curved line, and drag to curve the line in another direction.

3	Double-click to finish the curve.

 Note

•	The distance between the control points and the node determines the height or depth of the segment that you are drawing.

 Tips

•	You can draw a cusp in the Bezier curve by dragging from the anchor point, sizing and curving the segment, then holding down Alt and dragging in the direction that you want the next curve. You can then release Alt and size and curve the next segment.

•	You can also draw line shapes by clicking the Line shapes button on the tool palette.

 Related topics


To draw a shape

1	Click Insert [image] Shape, and click a shape in one of the following categories:

•	Basic shapes

•	Arrow shapes

•	Flowchart shapes

•	Star shapes

•	Callout shapes

•	Action shapes

If you want to draw a shape from the center, hold down ALT, and click where you want to create the center of the shape.

2	Drag diagonally to draw the shape.

 Note

•	For more information about creating action shapes, see "Creating SpeedLink objects."

 Tips

•	You can also create a shape with equal horizontal and vertical dimensions by holding down Alt + Shift as you draw the shape.

•	You can also draw shapes by clicking the Basic shapes button, the Arrow shapes button, the Flowchart shapes button, the Star shapes button, the Callout shapes button, or the Action shapes button on the tool palette.

 Related topics


Editing shapes

You can resize the shapes you add to slides and drawings by using a glyph.

You can also change the form, angle, or direction of a line or polyline by using the edit points. Edit points apply only to lines and polylines; however, you can access the edit points of other shapes by converting them to polygons. You can then shape the polygon.

This illustration shows how you can edit a shape by dragging a glyph.

 How to


To size a shape by using a glyph

1	Click a shape.

2	Drag a glyph until the shape is the size you want.

 Related topics


To change the shape of a line or polyline

1	Click a line or polyline.

2	Click Edit [image] Edit points.

3	Drag the edit points until the shape is the size you want.

 Note

•	Edit points are specific to lines and polylines. If you want to access the edit points of a shape other than a line or polyline, you must first convert the shape to a polygon. For information about converting a shape to a polygon, see "To convert a shape to a polygon."

 Related topics


To convert a shape to a polygon

1	Click a shape.

2	Click Tools [image] Convert to polygon.

 Related topics


To change the shape of a polygon

1	Click a polygon.

2	Click Edit [image] Edit points.

3	Drag any of the edit points.

 Note

•	When you edit a polygon, it does not maintain its standard size or proportions. The shape is treated as a series of lines or polylines instead of a preset shape.

 Related topics


Working with text in slide shows and drawings

You can customize the appearance of slides with a variety of text objects.

Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For information on customizing features to suit your particular typing requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating text objects

•	changing text with Corel RealTime Preview

•	setting text attributes

•	formatting text in text objects

•	applying special effects to text

•	correcting text


Creating text objects

You can create text objects by inserting text boxes, text lines, and TextArt. Text boxes expand in length and text lines expand in width to contain text as you type. For information about TextArt, see "Working with TextArt images."

 How to


To insert a text box

1	Click Insert [image] Text box.

2	Drag to define the text box.

3	Type text in the text box.

 Tips

•	You can also define the text box by clicking in the slide show or drawing window.

•	You can also insert a text box by clicking the Text box button on the tool palette.

 Related topics


To insert a text line

1	Click Insert [image] Text line.

2	Click in the slide show or drawing window.

3	Type text.

 Related topics


To insert TextArt

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] TextArt.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Click a shape on the Shapes palette.

4	Choose a font from the Font list box.

5	Choose a font style from the Font style list box.

6	Open the Justification picker, and click a text justification.

7	Choose a smoothness level from the Smoothness list box.

8	Type any text in the Type here box.

9	Click Insert symbol.

 Related topics


Changing text in Corel Presentations with Corel RealTime Preview

You can use Corel RealTime Preview to view different font styles, sizes, and colors before you apply them to your text.

 How to


To change a font with Corel RealTime Preview

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Open the Font face list box on the property bar, and point to a font.

Changes to the font display in the font face preview window.

3	Choose a font from the Font face list box.

 Related topics


To change a font size with Corel RealTime Preview

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Open the Font size list box on the property bar, and point to a font.

Changes to the font display in the font size preview window.

3	Choose a font from the Font size list box.

 Tip

•	You can also increase or decrease the size of font by clicking the Font increase button or the Font decrease button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To change a font color with Corel RealTime Preview

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Open any of the following pickers:

•	Fill pattern

•	Foreground fill color

•	Background fill color

3	Point to a pattern or color.

When you pause on a color, the text in the text object displays a preview of the font color.

4	Click a pattern or color.

 Related topics


Setting text attributes

You can customize the text in a slide show or drawing by setting text attributes. You can change the font by using a variety of font types, sizes, and colors. For example, you can use Arial font, in 12 point size and in red. You can also apply a style, such as bold, italic, or underlined.

You can also fill text with patterns or gradients. A pattern fill consists of two colors arranged to form a design. A gradient fill creates smooth transitions between two colors by gradually changing their transparency as it progresses from one color to another. Changing the gradient fill settings allows you to customize the look of the gradient fill, such as the angle and blend.

As well, you can apply an outline to text.

You can reverse the foreground and background colors of text. You can create subscript text which sits below the baseline, or superscript text, which sits above the baseline. If you have created subscript or superscript text, you can convert it back to normal text.

 How to


To change the font of text

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Format [image] Font.

4	Click the Font tab.

5	Choose a font from the Face list.

You can also
Change the appearance of text	In the Appearance area, enable the Bold, Italic, or Underline check box.
Change the font size	Choose a font size from the Size list box.
Change the font size relative to the current size	Click the Relative size picker, and click a size.
Change the font color	Open the Color picker, and click a color.
Restore the text appearance	Right-click the selected text, and click Normal.
 Tips

•	You can view a list of available attributes for each font by clicking the plus sign (+) to the left of the font.

•	You can also change the appearance of text by clicking the Bold button, the Italic button, or the Underline button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To apply a pattern or gradient fill to text

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Format [image] Font.

4	Click the Fill tab.

5	In the Fill style area, click one of the following:

•	Pattern

•	Gradient

6	Open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

7	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

8	Click a fill on the palette.

 Related topics


To change gradient fill settings

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Format [image] Font.

4	Click the Fill tab.

5	In the Fill style area, click Gradient.

6	Click Gradient settings.

7	In the Gradient settings dialog box, choose a gradient type from the Gradient type list box.

If you choose the Linear or Rectangular option, type a value in the Angle box.

8	In the Gradient color position area, type a value in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal offset

•	Vertical offset

9	In the Blending area, enable one of the following options:

•	Auto-stop blending [image] blends automatically

•	Fixed [image] blends using a fixed number of steps

If you enabled the Fixed option, type a value in the Fixed box.

 Related topics


To outline text

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Format [image] Font.

4	Click the Outline tab.

5	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Style picker, and click an outline style.

7	Open the Width picker, and click a line width.

If you want to specify the line width, type a value in the box below the Width picker.

 Related topics


To reverse colors of text

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Format [image] Font.

4	Click the Fill tab.

5	In the Fill style area, click one of the following:

•	Pattern

•	Gradient

6	Click Reverse colors.

 Tip

•	You can also reverse colors of text by clicking the Reverse colors button on the tool palette.

 Related topics


To create superscript or subscript text

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Format [image] Font.

4	Click the Font tab.

5	Click Position, and click one of the following:

•	Superscript

•	Subscript

 Related topics


To convert superscript or subscript text to normal text

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Format [image] Font.

4	Click the Font tab.

5	Click Position, and click Normal.

 Related topics


Formatting text in text objects

You can move individual characters or blocks of text, and you can delete them. By justifying text, you can position it left, right, or center in relation to the sides of a text box. You can also indent lines or paragraphs of text.

You can remove any indents from text.

You can also adjust the spacing between lines of text.

You can set the position of text. By using manual kerning, you can expand or contract the spaces between letters.

 How to


To move text

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Select the text.

3	Drag the selected text to a new position inside the selected text object.

 Related topics


To delete text

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Edit [image] Delete.

 Related topics


To justify text

1	Click a text box.

2	Click Format [image] Justification, and click one of the following:

•	Left [image] aligns text to the left

•	Right [image] aligns text to the right

•	Center [image] aligns text to the center

 Tip

•	You can also justify text by opening the Justification picker on the property bar and clicking an alignment.

 Related topics


To indent text

1	Double-click a text box.

2	Click at the beginning of a line of text.

3	Click Format [image] Paragraph, and click one of the following:

•	Indent [image] indents the left margin of the paragraph by one tab stop

•	Hanging indent [image] indents all but the first line of the paragraph by one tab stop

•	Double indent [image] indents the paragraph equally from both sides

 Related topics


To remove an indent from text

1	Double-click a text box.

2	Click at the beginning of the line of indented text.

3	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Back tab.

 Related topics


To set line spacing

1	Click a text box.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Spacing.

3	Type a number in the Spacing box.

 Related topics


To position text in a text box

1	Double-click a text box.

2	Click at the beginning of the text.

3	Click Format [image] Line, and click one of the following:

•	Center [image] centers text

•	Flush right [image] positions text to the right

 Related topics


To kern text

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Format [image] Manual kerning.

4	Type a value in the Amount to kern selected text box.

A positive number expands the space; a negative number contracts it.

 Related topics


Applying special effects to text

You can apply a variety of special effects to text. For example, you can shape text into a set shape, such as a bow, wave, or crescent. You can also contour text around an object to create unique designs, and you can add depth to text to give it a three-dimensional look.

 How to


To shape text

1	Click a text box or text line.

2	Click Tools [image] QuickWarp.

3	Click a shape on the palette.

 Related topics


To contour text around objects

1	Hold down CTRL, and click a text box or a text line and a shape.

2	Click Tools [image] Contour text.

3	Choose a position from the Position text list box.

If you wan to keep the graphic or shape visible, disable the Display text only check box.

 Note

•	You cannot contour text around bitmaps, charts, or clipart.

 Related topics


To add depth to text

1	Click a text box or text line.

2	Click Tools [image] Quick3-D.

3	Click the Rotation tab.

4	Click a rotation style on the Rotation palette.

If you wan to adjust the darkness of the bevel, move the Color adjustment slider.

5	Click the Perspective tab.

6	Click a perspective style on the Perspective palette.

7	Type a number in the Depth box.

 Related topics


Converting text to vector objects

Vector objects, such as clipart images, are a series of points joined by lines. Graphical elements in a vector file are self-contained entities with properties, such as color, shape, outline, size, and position on the screen, included in its definition. You can move and change the properties of a vector object repeatedly, while maintaining its original clarity and crispness and without affecting other objects in the image.

You can convert text boxes and text lines to vector objects. Once text has been converted, you can manipulate it as an object, for example, you can animate it, apply sound to it, and apply a shadow to it. For information on working with objects, see "Working with objects in slide shows and drawings."

Once you convert text to an object, you cannot format the text itself.

 How to


To convert text to a vector object

1	Click a text box or text line.

2	Click Tools [image] Trace text.

 Related topics


Correcting text in slide shows and drawings

Corel Presentations provides several ways to correct errors in text. You can find and replace text by searching for specific words or phrases and replacing them with other words or phrases. In slide shows, you can find and replace text in both the Slide Editor and Slide Outliner views.

You can display the text formatting codes that correspond to the line of text where the cursor is located. The codes appear in the lower-right corner of the application bar.

You can automatically correct spelling, capitalization, or spacing errors as you type. Common spelling errors and mistyped words are automatically replaced with the correct spelling. For example, "adn" is automatically replaced with "and." As well as using a predefined list of errors, you can create a list of errors for auto correction. The predefined list contains commonly misspelled words linked to the correct spelling. As well, you can delete entries from this list. You can also automatically correct spacing and capitalization errors, and you can automatically add opening and closing quotation marks.

 How to


To find text

1	Double-click a text object.

If you want to find text by using the Slide Outliner, click View [image] Slide Outliner.

2	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

3	Type text in the Find box.

4	Choose a direction from the Direction list box.

5	Click Find next.

 Related topics


To find and replace text

1	Double-click a text object.

If you want to find and replace text by using the Slide Outliner, click View [image] Slide Outliner.

2	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

3	Type text in the Find box.

4	Type replacement text in the Replace with box.

5	Choose a direction from the Direction list box.

6	Click one of the following:

•	Replace [image] replaces the selected occurrence of the text

•	Replace all [image] replaces all occurrences of the text

 Related topics


To display text formatting codes

1	Double-click a text object.

2	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

 Related topics


To correct words automatically as you type

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Enable the Replace words as you type check box.

3	Click Close.

 Related topics


To create a list of errors for automatic correction

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Type a word, phrase, or abbreviation in the Replace box.

3	Type a replacement word, phrase, or abbreviation in the With box.

4	Click Add entry.

 Related topics


To delete an entry from the automatic correction list of errors

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Choose an entry from the list.

3	Click Delete entry.

 Related topics


To correct spacing automatically between sentences

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Click Options.

3	In the End of sentence corrections area, enable one of the following options:

•	None

•	Change one space to two spaces between sentences

•	Change two spaces to one space between sentences

 Related topics


To correct capitalization and spacing automatically in a sentence

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Click Options.

3	In the Sentence corrections area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Capitalize next letter after end of sentence punctuation

•	Correct two irregular capitals (make second letter lowercase)

•	Change two spaces to one space between words

 Related topics


To use opening and closing quotation marks automatically

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Click Options.

3	In the Select quotation marks area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Use double quotation marks as you type [image] converts double quotation marks to the opening and closing double quotation marks you choose from the Open and Close list boxes

•	Use single quotation marks as you type [image] converts single quotation marks to the opening and closing single quotation marks you choose from the Open and Close list boxes

•	Use straight quotation marks after numbers [image] 6' 2'' [image] converts curly quotation marks to straight quotation marks when the quotation mark character follows a number

 Note

•	You cannot use the Corel Presentations 3.0 main dictionary (.Lex file) in this version of Corel Presentations.

 Related topics


Working with titles and subtitles in Corel Presentations

In Corel Presentations, when slides with layouts are inserted into a slide show, they are automatically created with placeholders for titles and subtitles. For more information about slide show layouts, see "Applying backgrounds and layouts to slides."

In this section, you'll learn about

•	formatting the appearance of titles and subtitles

•	changing the line spacing in titles and subtitles

•	adding boxes and fills to titles and subtitles

•	saving and applying title and subtitle text styles


Formatting the appearance of titles and subtitles

You can format the appearance of a title or subtitle by changing such attributes as the font, the font size, and the color. You can also change the font fill of a title or subtitle.

 How to


To format the appearance of a title or subtitle

1	Click a title or subtitle.

2	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Title properties

•	Subtitle properties

3	Click the Fonts tab.

4	Choose a font from the Font face list box.

5	Type a value in the Size box.

6	In the Appearance area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Bold

•	Underline

•	Italic

7	In the Color area, open the Foreground picker, and click a color.

8	Open the Background picker, and click a color.

 Note

•	The background color is visible only if a font fill style other than the default is selected. For information about changing the font fill, see "To change the font fill of a title or subtitle."

 Tip

•	You can also format the appearance of a subtitle by clicking the Subtitle properties button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To change the font fill of a title or subtitle

1	Click a title or subtitle.

2	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Title properties

•	Subtitle properties

3	Click the Fonts tab.

4	In the Appearance area, click Font properties.

5	In the Font properties dialog box, click the Fill tab.

6	In the Fill style area, click one of the following:

•	Pattern

•	Gradient

7	Open the Foreground picker, and click a color.

8	Open the Background picker, and click a color.

9	Click a fill style on the palette.

 Related topics


To change the font outline of a title or subtitle

1	Click a title or subtitle.

2	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Title properties

•	Subtitle properties

3	Click the Fonts tab.

4	In the Appearance area, click Font properties.

5	In the Font properties dialog box, click the Outline tab.

6	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

7	Open the Style picker, and click a line style.

8	Open the Width picker, and click a line width.

 Related topics


Changing the line spacing in titles and subtitles

You can specify the amount of space between the lines of text in a title or subtitle.

 How to


To change the line spacing in a title or subtitle

1	Click a title or subtitle.

2	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Title properties

•	Subtitle properties

3	Click the Spacing tab.

4	Type a value in the Line spacing box.

 Related topics


Adding boxes and fills to titles and subtitles

You can add a box to a title or subtitle and choose its position, shape, and color. You can then apply pattern or gradient fills to the box to, for example, emphasize certain points in your presentation. A pattern fill consists of two colors arranged to form a design. A gradient fill creates smooth transitions between two colors by gradually changing their transparency as it progresses from one color to another.

You can also change the pattern or gradient settings.

As well, you can apply texture or picture fills, including custom made fills, to a box. A texture fill lets you fill a title or subtitle box with a textured, natural looking pattern, such as clouds, wood, or oil. A picture fill lets you fill a box with a bitmap.

You can also change the picture settings.

 How to


To add a box to a title or subtitle

1	Click a title or subtitle.

2	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Title properties

•	Subtitle properties

3	Click the Box tab.

4	In the Position area, enable one of the following options:

•	Above

•	Below

•	Above and below

•	Behind

5	In the Corner style area, enable one of the following options:

•	Rectangle

•	Rounded rectangle

•	Octagon

6	In the Frame style area, choose a frame from the Type list box.

7	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

 Related topics


To apply a pattern or gradient fill to a title or subtitle box

1	Click a title or subtitle.

2	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Title properties

•	Subtitle properties

3	Click the Box tab.

4	In the Fill style and color area, click Properties.

5	In the Object properties dialog box, click one of the following:

•	Pattern

•	Gradient

6	Open the Foreground picker, and click a color.

7	Open the Background picker, and click a color.

8	Click a pattern or gradient on the palette.

 Related topics


To change the pattern fill settings of a title or subtitle box

1	Click a title or subtitle.

2	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Title properties

•	Subtitle properties

3	Click the Box tab.

4	In the Fill style and color area, click Properties.

5	In the Object properties dialog box, click Pattern.

6	Click Pattern settings.

7	In the Transparent color area, enable one of the following options:

•	None

•	Foreground color

•	Background color

 Related topics


To change gradient fill settings of a title or subtitle box

1	Click a title or subtitle.

2	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Title properties

•	Subtitle properties

3	Click the Box tab.

4	In the Fill style and color area, click Properties.

5	In the Object properties dialog box, click Gradient settings.

6	In the Gradient settings dialog box, choose a gradient from the Gradient type list box.

If applicable, type a value in the Angle box.

8	In the Gradient color position area, type values in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal offset [image] determines how much to move the gradient color horizontally

•	Vertical offset [image] determines how much to move the gradient color vertically

9	In the Blending area, enable one of the following options:

•	Auto-stop blending [image] blends the gradient fill automatically

•	Fixed [image] blends the colors by using the number of steps you specify in the Steps box

 Related topics


To apply a texture or picture fill to a title or subtitle box

1	Click a title or subtitle.

2	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Title properties

•	Subtitle properties

3	Click the Box tab.

4	In the Fill style and color area, click Properties.

5	In the Object properties dialog box, click one of the following:

•	Texture

•	Picture

6	Choose a texture or picture from the Category list box.

7	Click a texture or picture on the palette.

 Related topics


To apply a custom texture or picture fill to a title or subtitle box

1	Click a title or subtitle.

2	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Title properties

•	Subtitle properties

3	Click the Box tab.

4	In the Fill style and color area, click Properties.

5	In the Object properties dialog box, click one of the following:

•	Texture

•	Picture

6	Click Browse.

7	In the Open file dialog box, choose the drive and folder where the texture or picture fill is stored.

8	Type a filename in the Filename box.

9	Click Open.

 Related topics


To change the picture fill settings of a title or subtitle box

1	Click a title or subtitle.

2	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Title properties

•	Subtitle properties

3	Click the Box tab.

4	In the Fill style and color area, click Properties.

5	In the Object properties dialog box, click Picture.

6	Click Picture settings.

7	In the Picture settings dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Tile [image] fills the picture with tiles

•	Brick horizontal [image] fills the picture with horizontal rows

•	Brick vertical [image] fills the picture with vertical columns

•	Stretch/shrink to fit area [image] stretches or shrinks the picture to fit the box

•	Scale to fit area [image] scales the picture to fit the box

 Related topics


Saving and applying title and subtitle text styles

You can choose various attributes for titles and subtitles and save them for future use. For example, you can choose the color and size of fonts or the properties of a title or subtitle box and save them to use in new presentations. You can then apply saved text styles to titles and subtitles.

 How to


To save a title or subtitle text style

1	Click a title or subtitle.

2	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Title properties

•	Subtitle properties

3	Modify any attributes.

4	Click Save style.

5	In the Save chart style dialog box, choose the drive and folder where you want to save the text style.

6	Type a filename in the Filename box.

7	Click Save.

 Note

•	The file format extension of a text style file is .chs (chart styles).

 Related topics


To apply a title or subtitle text style

1	Click a title or subtitle.

2	Click Format, and click one of the following:

•	Title properties

•	Subtitle properties

3	Click Load style.

4	In the Retrieve chart style dialog box, choose the drive and folder where the text style is stored.

5	Type a filename in the Filename box.

6	Click Open.

 Related topics


Using macros in Corel Presentations

You can use macros to perform repetitive or complex tasks automatically. Macros are scripts that contain a list of instructions, and they can perform most of the tasks that you would normally perform using keystrokes, mouse actions, and menu commands.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	understanding macros

•	working with macros

For more information about using macros, see "Reference: Using macros in Corel Presentations."


Understanding macros

A macro can consist of programming commands, product commands, and comments. Macro tasks consist of instructions called statements. There are several kinds of statements: assignments, conditions, and loops. For example, the commands

SetBrushShape (Circle!)

SetBrushWidth (25)

set the properties for the Paint Brush tool. Each command represents one instruction or statement. The simplest macro consists of only one statement. Complex macros have hundreds of statements. The sequence of statements determines how a macro performs its tasks.

There are two types of macros that can be used in Corel Presentations:

•	A PerfectScript macro, which is stored with a .wcm file extension. This macro is useful if you want to interact with other WordPerfect Office applications, such as Quattro Pro or WordPerfect. For information about PerfectScript macros, see "Generating and editing Corel Presentations macros by using PerfectScript."

•	Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA), which lets you develop scripts that are saved in specific projects that use VBA programming language. You can access the VBA editor from within Corel Presentations. For information about VBA macros, see "Working with Corel Presentations macros using Visual Basic for Applications (VBA)."


Working with macros

One way to create a macro is to record and save a task in Corel Presentations. When you record a macro, you convert actions into macro commands, which are stored and can be played back. You can then play a macro to repeat a sequence of steps for a task that you have recorded or written, including project and global VBA macros. You can only play a project macro from the document that was used to create it. For information about VBA macros in Corel Presentations, see "Working with Corel Presentations macros using Visual Basic for Applications (VBA)." While recording or playing a macro, you can pause, resume, or stop it.

 How to


To record a macro

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the macro.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box.

4	Click Save.

5	Perform the actions you want to record.

6	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Stop.

 Related topics


To play a macro

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the macro is stored.

3	Choose a filename.

4	Click Open.

 Related topics


To play a project VBA macro

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Play.

2	Choose Project from the Macros in list box.

3	Type a macro name in the Macro name list box.

4	Click Run.

 Related topics


To play a global VBA macro

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Play.

2	Choose Global from the Macros in list box.

3	Type a macro name in the Macro name box.

4	Click Run.

 Related topics


To pause, resume, or stop recording or playing a macro

To	Do the following
Pause or resume a macro	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Pause.
Stop a macro	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Stop.
 Note

•	A check mark beside the Pause menu command indicates that the macro is paused.

 Tip

•	You can also stop a macro recording by disabling the checkmark beside the Record menu command.

 Related topics


Reference: Using macros in Corel Presentations

Several macros are included with Corel Presentations.

Playing macros included with Corel Presentations

When you installed Corel Presentations, the shipping macros listed in the following table were included to help you automate and simplify several common tasks.

Play	To
chngfnt.wcm	Change the font face and color throughout a slide show.
headfoot.wcm	Add a header or footer to a document, which includes the date, filename, slide number, slide title, and any other information you specify.
imgemap.wcm	Create HTML Image Map codes for any existing bitmaps, which allows you to use them on the Internet.
macedit.wcm	Edit a macro in a Corel Presentations text box.
mastconv.wcm	Convert older Corel Presentations masters to Corel Presentations 11 masters.
obj2back.wcm	Move selected object(s) on the slide layer to the background layer of a slide show master.
shw2wpg.wcm	Convert all the slides in a slide show to separate .wpg files.
textanim.wcm	Convert text to curves and apply an animation effect to each character.
textbttn.wcm	Create a three dimensional button graphic with text you type in.


Welcome to Corel Presentations

Corel Presentations lets you create high-quality slide shows and drawings that can include text, data charts, organization charts, and graphic objects.

You can use Corel Presentations to produce professional-looking project proposals, interactive demonstrations, multimedia presentations, flyers, signs, banners, and more. Slide shows can be presented on large monitors, portable computers, overhead transparencies, 35mm slides, or printed in color or black-and-white. You can also send presentations to other people over the Internet.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	Corel Corporation

•	using Corel Presentations documentation

•	exploring the work area


About Corel Corporation

Founded in 1985, Corel Corporation (www.corel.com) is a leading technology company specializing in content development (both text and graphics), business process management and XML-enabled enterprise solutions. The company’s goal is to give consumers and enterprise customers the ability to create, exchange and instantly interact with content that is always relevant, accurate and available. With its headquarters in Ottawa, Canada, Corel’s common stock trades on the Nasdaq Stock Market under the symbol CORL and on the Toronto Stock Exchange under the symbol COR.

You can access the Corel Web site through Corel Presentations. You can also access information about fonts, macros, technical support, tips and tricks, training and certification, and service bureaus on the Corel Web site.

 How to


To access the Corel Web site

•	Click Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Corel Web site.

 Related topics


To get information from the Corel Web site

Click	To get information about
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Fonts online	Fonts
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Macros online	Macros
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Technical support	Technical support
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Tips and tricks	Tips and tricks
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Training and certification	Training and certification
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Approved service bureaus	Service bureaus
 Related topics


Using Corel Presentations documentation

The documentation conventions in Corel Presentations are easy to follow, and they allow you to use the application efficiently. Corel Presentations also includes online and paper documentation to help you learn the application. The following table lists the different documentation available.

Documentation	What it does
Online Help	Lets you quickly retrieve all the information you need. Help displays in a separate window on your screen. For quick access, you can keep the Help window displayed on top of the application window.
Context-sensitive Help	Displays information relevant to the task you are currently performing. Context-sensitive Help provides help for menu commands, toolbar buttons, dialog boxes, and dialog box controls. You access context-sensitive Help by clicking the What's This? Help button, and clicking the item you want information about.
Corel Presentations Macros Help	The Corel Presentations Macros Help gives you detailed information about working with macros. It can be accessed from the Macro commands item in the Help menu.
WordPerfect Office Macro Command Reference Center	The Macro Command Center gives you a complete listing of available macro commands, including PerfectScript macro commands. You can access the Macro Command Center from the Macro commands item in the Help menu or from the Start menu.
QuickTips	Provide information about icons and buttons on the toolbars and the Toolbox. QuickTips display in a balloon when you point to an icon or a button.
User Guide	Contains most of the information from the online Help. Some reference information, such as the glossary, table functions, and details about equations, is included only in online Help.
You can access online Help in four ways. You can use the Contents page to select a topic, use the Index page to search for a topic, or use the Find page to search for specific words and phrases in Help topics. You can also use the Corel Knowledge Base to search for information on the Corel home page.

Context-sensitive Help is accessible wherever you are in Corel Presentations. You can access context-sensitive Help from the menus, dialog boxes, property bars, and all other toolbars in Corel Presentations.

For a complete listing of available macro commands, including PerfectScript macro commands, go to the WordPerfect Office Macro Command Center, which can be accessed through the Macros Help link in the Reference information section of the online Help.

You can print specific Help topics or print entire sections of online Help.

Corel Presentations also provides easy access to information about the program and your system.

Program information consists of the program name, version number, serial number, and user name. This information doesn't change and is useful if you ever need help from Corel Technical Support Services.

System information consists of details about any of the following five categories: system, display, printing, Corel .Exe and .Dll files, and system .Dll files. For example, you can see how much memory you have on the drive to which you want to save a file.

You can also view product and license information, and edit your PIN (personal identification number).

We want your feedback

If you have any comments or suggestions about Corel Presentations documentation, you can email them to presentationsprodmgr@corel.ca, mail them to Corel Presentations Product Manager, Corel Corporation, 1600 Carling Avenue, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada, K1Z 8R7, or fax them to (613) 728-9790. Unfortunately, we won't be able to respond to your messages individually.

 How to


To follow documentation conventions

When you see this	Do this
Click File [image] New.	Click the File menu, and click New in the menu.
Click Format [image] Justification [image] Left.	Click the Format menu, click Justification, and click Left in the submenu that displays.
Enable a check box.	Click the check box to place a check mark or an "X" inside the box.
Disable an option.	Click the option to remove the indicator.
Select text.	Click and drag to highlight text.
Click an object.	Click anywhere on an object.
Right-click, and click Paste.	Click the right mouse button, and click Paste in the submenu that displays.
Press Enter.	Press the Enter key.
Ctrl + Shift	Press the Control key and the Shift key at the same time.
 Related topics


To access online Help

1	Click Help [image] Help topics.

2	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Contents [image] browses through topics by category

•	Index [image] lists index entries. Type the first few letters of the subject about which you want information.

•	Find [image] searches for a particular word or phrase in the online Help

•	Corel Knowledge Base [image] to search for information on the Corel home page on the Internet

 Tip

•	You can keep the Help window on top of the application you're working on by clicking Options in the Help window, and clicking Keep Help on top, On top.

 Related topics


To access context-sensitive Help

To	Do the following
Access dialog box Help	In the dialog box, click Help.
Access menu and toolbar button Help	Point to the menu item or toolbar button for ToolTip information.
Access dialog control Help	Right-click a dialog control, and click What's This?.
 Tip

•	You can also access context-sensitive Help in a dialog box by pressing F1.

 Related topics


To print Help

To	Do the following
Print a section	Select the section you want to print, and click Print.
Print a topic	Click Print.
 Tip

•	You can also print a topic by right-clicking the window and clicking Print topic.

 Related topics


To display the PerfectExpert

•	Click Help [image] PerfectExpert.

 Related topics


To view program and system information

1	Click Help [image] About Corel Presentations.

2	Click System info.

3	Choose a category from the Choose a category list box.

 Note

•	The About Corel Presentations dialog box displays the version number and registration information for the software.

 Tip

•	You can store system information for printing by clicking Save. System information is saved in the file as sysinfo.txt. A message indicates where the file is saved.

 Related topics


To view product and license information

1	Click Help [image] About Corel Presentations.

2	Click one of the following:

•	Copyright

•	License

 Related topics


To edit the serial number and PIN

1	Click Help [image] About Corel Presentations.

2	Click Edit serial/PIN.

3	Type a serial number in the Serial number box.

4	Type a Personal Identification Number in the PIN box.

 Related topics


Exploring the work area

The work area in Corel Presentations includes everything you see on your screen when you start the program. The large open area is the drawing window. Depending on the view you choose, the drawing window displays one or more slides. For information about changing the settings for your view, see "Using slide show views."

The menu bar, which is located at the top of the work area, just below the title bar, provides access to most of the Corel Presentations commands. Many of these commands can also be accessed through toolbars and flyouts. Toolbars and flyouts give you quick access to Corel Presentations tools.

Using toolbars

Toolbars provide quick, one-click access to commands. You can choose to display or hide the toolbars.

The Standard toolbar is displayed by default in the drawing window. Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For information on customizing your toolbars to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

Accessing flyouts

Flyouts are toolbars that are accessible from a tool on another toolbar.

A small black arrow at the bottom-right corner of a tool button indicates that you can access a flyout from that tool.

 How to


To display or hide a toolbar

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	Enable the check box beside each toolbar you want to display.

3	Disable the check box beside each toolbar you want to hide.

 Related topics


To display a flyout

•	Click the black arrow at the right of the tool button.

 Tip

•	You can also display a flyout by clicking the tool and holding the mouse button down until the flyout is displayed.

 Related topics


Generating and editing Corel Presentations macros by using PerfectScript

With PerfectScript, the command-based macro language of WordPerfect Office, you can combine statements to automate routine tasks and simplify large ones.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	understanding components of macro commands

•	using types of macro commands

•	understanding syntax

•	using macro conventions

•	formatting macros

•	using programming commands

•	using parameters

•	using variables

•	assigning variables in PerfectScript

•	inserting commands with the Macro Command Browser

•	using macro commands to retrieve information

•	inserting codes into macros

•	compiling macros using the macro compiler

•	fixing compile errors

•	editing and deleting macros in PerfectScript

•	adding search capabilities to macros


Understanding components of macro commands

Recording and playing macros can simplify routine tasks, but when product commands are used together with PerfectScript programming commands, you can create more complex macros. By using product commands and programming commands, the functionality of WordPerfect Office features is combined with the customizing, decision making, and iterative capabilities of a programming language. Using programming commands also makes it possible to include the functionality of other applications in WordPerfect Office.

PerfectScript macros are composed using PerfectScript, the common macro language for all applications in WordPerfect Office. PerfectScript is a command-based language. When you record a macro, PerfectScript records the results of keystrokes or mouse selections instead of recording the keystrokes themselves. For example, instead of recording each keystroke required to change the top margin of a page to 2" (5.1 cm), the macro records the command:

MarginTop(MarginWidth:2.0")

PerfectScript also includes programming commands that direct the function of the macro. These commands let you prompt for user input, make decisions based on conditions in a document, access system variables, and so on. Using programming commands with product commands can automate long, complex tasks.

A written macro can include nonrecordable statements, which cannot be included in recorded macros that specify how a macro performs a task. Writing a macro provides greater flexibility to determine function than recording a macro. You can create a macro in WordPerfect and play it in the application for which it was written.

WordPerfect lets you include the functionality of other applications in WordPerfect Office with the PerfectScript language. A macro written in one application can open another application and perform tasks, giving you tools to use Quattro Pro, Corel Presentations, and WordPerfect together.

Macro commands consist of three parts: a command name, parameters, and separators. The table below describes these elements of syntax.

Component	Definition
Command names	Indicate the type of action to be performed. Some commands consist only of a command name, such as FileOpenDlg().
Parameters	Provide more information about the command, such as which options of a feature are active. Parameters are always enclosed in parentheses; for example, SelectTextChart(Chart:Bullets!).
Separators	Mark the parameters in a command. Semicolons separate individual parameters; parentheses enclose a series of parameters; braces enclose a series of repeating parameters.
In the example included in the following table, the statement selects the title, subtitle, or bullet chart for a slide that contains these elements. The 'Bullet!' enumeration will only work for bullet charts inserted from the layout layer. The command has one parameter called 'Chart'. The value of the parameter is set to 'Bullet!'. Other acceptable values for this parameter are 'Title!' and 'Subtitle!'. The various acceptable values for this type of parameter are called enumerations. Other parameter types accept values of the type string or numeric.

Statement	Parameter	Type	Acceptable values
SelectTextChart (Chart:Bullets!)	Chart	Enumeration	Bullets!
Title!
Subtitle!


Using types of macro commands

The PerfectScript programming language consists of Corel Presentations application commands and functions, and programming statements and functions. PerfectScript can do more than perform recorded Corel Presentations commands [image] it can extend the functionality of slide shows in a number of ways, such as prompting you for input, displaying messages, controlling other Corel and Windows-based applications, and performing and repeating commands. You can also build complete applications or Wizards so that a user with limited experience using Corel Presentations can still use some of the more complex functions.

There are three types of macro commands: product commands, OLE object commands, and programming commands. Product commands are specific to a product, such as Corel Presentations or Quattro Pro. OLE object commands perform tasks on an OLE object. Programming commands work across applications; they are PerfectScript commands.

Command names often describe an action, such as AlignObjectsLeft, BitmapBlur, SelectAllObjects, and ToolbarCopy. Command names are not case sensitive and usually do not contain spaces. Exceptions include programming commands that call a subroutine, such as Case call or OnCancel call.

A macro can use more than one application product and OLE object. Commands to the non-default application or OLE object require a prefix, which is specified in an application or object statement. In the following example,

A1.AboutDlg ()

A1 (followed by a period) is the prefix. It tells the compiler to use the application or object assigned A1 in a PerfectScript application or object statement.


Understanding syntax

Syntax refers to the grammatical rules that govern the form of macro statements and expressions. For example, the syntax of the following statement, which types "John Doe," is correct:

Type(Text: "John Doe")

The syntax of the next example is incorrect and produces an error message because the statement lacks a closing parenthesis:

Type(Text: "John Doe"

If you find it difficult to distinguish different parts of a macro, remember that you can add extra line spaces, tabs, and even font changes to make the macro more readable. As long as the commands are written correctly, the macro compiler ignores extra spaces and lines.


Using macro conventions

When you create macros in WordPerfect, you must obey macro command syntax for the macro to compile properly. You do not need to follow macro formatting conventions for a macro to compile correctly. However, you will improve the readability of a macro if you use these conventions.

Macro command syntax must be correct for a macro to compile. Understanding the following conventions used in WordPerfect macros will help you avoid common syntax errors:

•	You can enter programming commands in uppercase, lowercase, or mixed case. The compiler is not case sensitive.

•	Product commands, such as AboutDlg or AddSlide, are shown in mixed case.

•	Corel Presentations system variables begin with Env, such as EnvCurrentSlideNumber or EnvSlideTitle. They are shown in mixed case and they return information about the application environment.

•	Line wrapping does not affect macro execution.

•	Do not insert a space in a command name unless the space is part of the syntax.

•	Do not use hard returns, tabs, or indents in a character expression (a character string enclosed in double quotation marks).

•	You can use spaces, tabs, indents, and hard returns before and after commands, or between parameters, to make a macro easier to read.

•	Smart quotes in a macro create a compile-time syntax error.


Formatting macros

You can type commands into a macro that is saved in a file. If you want to improve the readability of a macro, you can format it so that it includes tabs, spaces, and font or text appearance changes. Formatting the macro does not affect how it works. The two forward slashes indicate comments within the macro formula. For example, WordPerfect records the following macro in this format:

// Create a chart

BeginDataChart()

ChartCreate (VertBar!;Button1!;Yes!;Yes!)

// Display subtitle which is off by default

ChartSubtitleToggle()

// Display the chart title

ChartTitlesDisplay(Title!;On!)

However, if you type the commands yourself or edit an existing macro, you can format the macro the way you want. For example, you can format it as follows:

// Create a chart

BeginDataChart()

ChartCreate (VertBar!;Button1!;Yes!;Yes!)

// Display subtitle which is off by default

ChartSubtitleToggle()

// Display the chart title

ChartTitlesDisplay(Title!;On!)


Using programming commands

Programming commands work across WordPerfect Office applications. They control macro functions, such as

•	Repeating macro commands or statements a specified number of times or until certain conditions are met (For, Endfor, Repeat, Until, While, EndWhile)

•	Invoking or jumping to a specified subroutine with Call or Go

•	Specifying conditions under which other macro commands or statements operate (Case, IfElse, Endif, Switch, EndSwitch)

For example,

If (x = "A")

EditBackground

Else

EditLayouts

Endif

displays the background layer of a slide in edit mode if x equals the value "A". If x has another value, the subroutine displays the layout layer of a slide for you to edit. The If, Else, and Endif commands are programming commands. EditBackground and EditLayouts are product commands.


Using parameters

Commands often require parameters, which can be assigned values (data). Parameters are passed to the compiler (which translates the macro so that it can be played in the application) or passed between subroutines. In this WordPerfect command,

Advance (Where: AdvanceDown!; Amount: 1.0")

Advance is the command name, Where and Amount are parameters, and Advance Down! and 1.0" are parameter data. This command advances the insertion point down one inch. The parameter names, Where and Amount, are optional.

Data types

A data type represents information that is needed by a parameter or returned by a command (return value). In the command syntax, data types are displayed in italics. For example, the enumerations for the Rotation parameter of BoxCaptionRotation are Degrees90!, Degrees180!, Degrees270!, and None!. Only these enumerations can replace the data type in the command syntax. Enumerations are identified by a trailing exclamation point. The most common data types in product commands are string, enumeration, and numeric. Programming commands frequently use variables.

Parameter names

Using parameter names is optional. For example, the command InhibitInput (State: Off!) works just like the command InhibitInput (Off!). Some product commands have no parameters. Their syntax is usually written with empty parameters, such as PosScreenUp (). Some programming commands and all system variables have no parameters. Their syntax is the command name alone, such as Pause and ?FeatureBar.

Italics

Italics in macros syntax indicate parameter names or types to be replaced with data. For example, the syntax of GraphicsLineLength is

GraphicsLineLength (Length: measurement)

After you replace measurement with a number, the command might be

GraphicsLineLength (Length: 21)

or

GraphicsLineLength (21)

Punctuation

You must enclose parameters in parentheses(()). A missing parenthesis is a common error that prevents macros from compiling. Parentheses are optional for commands with no parameters but must be used with user-defined functions and procedures.

You must separate multiple parameters with semicolons (;). If you omit an optional parameter, include the semicolon in the syntax to keep following parameters in their correct positions. For example,

AbbreviationExpand (AbbreviationName:; Template: PersonalLibrary!)

or

AbbreviationExpand (; PersonalLibrary!)

Repeating parameters are enclosed in braces (<>)and are separated by semicolons. For example,

CASE (<test>: any ; {<Case>: any; <Label>: label; <Case>: and; <Label>: label...})

When data is supplied, the command could be

CASE (vChoice; {1; Exclaim; 2; Info; 3; Question; 4; Stop; 5; QuitMacro}; QuitMacro)

Product commands perform product tasks in a specific application. For example,

ShowSlide(Slide: 4)

displays the fourth slide in the current slide show in Corel Presentations.

Spaces between command names and the opening parenthesis of the parameter section and after semicolons in parameters are optional.

Product commands are specific for each application. They perform various functions in that application, such as

•	displaying a dialog box(InitialCodesStyleDlg)

•	specifying settings, such as styles (BorderBottomLine), user settings (PrefZoom), or attributes (font)

•	enabling and disabling features (InhibitInput) or (TableCellIgnoreCalculation)

•	performing actions, such as inserting a file (FileInsert) or code, (PrinterCommand), renaming a bookmark (BookmarkRename), converting comments to text (CommentConvert), or moving the insertion point (PosColBottom)

•	playing macros that are included with the application (AddressMergeShippingMacro)

Product commands that report information (return value) about the state of an application or feature are sometimes called system variables. In Corel Presentations, system variables begin with a leading Env (EnvPaths). Some system variables in Corel Presentations have parameters as well as return values.


Using variables

A variable represents a place in memory where data is stored for use by a macro or a merge. As its name indicates, the data in a variable is changeable. All variables must be declared and named. The name and content are determined by the programmer. You can perform operations on variables and change the content. The variable name is used to access the value of the variable.

There are four different types of variables: local, global, persistent, and constant. When a variable is declared, its type determines how visible the variable is (scope) and how long the variable will exist in memory. By default, when a variable is declared, it is local.

Local, global, and persistent variables all have a valid use and purpose. It is important to understand the scope and duration of the variables in macros. In most situations, local variables should be used. Global and persistent variables may be a necessity in some cases, but should be used with care. Constant variables should be used sparingly, if at all.

Other programming languages force you to specify the type of data that will be stored in a variable. PerfectScript, however, is an untyped language [image] it does not force the user to specify the type of data that a variable will contain. If a variable called x was declared in WordPerfect, that variable could contain a text string or a number.

Declaring variables

Variables must be declared before they can be used. Declaring a variable instructs PerfectScript to set aside memory for the variable. When declaring a variable, you specify a name and, optionally, a value for the new variable. Variables may be initialized with a value at the time of declaration. The following sections show how to appropriately name variables and how to declare (and initialize) the four types of variables.

Naming variables

Variable names should be descriptive. Variable names must begin with a letter, can include any other combination of letters or numbers, must be 50 characters or less in length, and are not case sensitive. Variables that have a string value should be named with a lowercase 's' as the beginning character of the name. The lowercase 's' denotes string. Variables that have a numeric value should be named with a lowercase 'n' to denote number. Some example variable names follow:

// String values

sFirstName := "Claudia"

sAddress := "1625 East Nowhere St."

sBirthday := "6/12/69"

// Number values

nAge := 25

nTotal := 145.97

The preceding code sample shows some variable examples. Each variable above has a descriptive name to help you remember what type of value should be expected. The variables that were declared in these examples are local variables by default, because no variable type is specified.


Assigning variables in PerfectScript

A variable acts as a placeholder that represents a value, which can be text, numbers, or measurements, that can be used repeatedly in a macro. This value can be changed or manipulated. Variables are typically preceded by the letter "v." You can assign a variable.

 How to


To assign a variable

•	Type Assign where you want to define the variable.

If you want to assign the text "Claudia" to the variable "vName", type Assign (vName;"Claudia").

 Tip

•	You can type a colon followed by the equals sign (:=) as a shortcut to assigning a variable. For example, you could type vName:="Claudia" for the above procedure.

 Related topics


Inserting commands with the Macro Command Browser

Product commands perform tasks that you would normally perform manually using WordPerfect Office applications. Many product commands require you to specify parameter values. These values give the application information about where and how to perform the task associated with the specified command. You can use the Macro Command Browser to choose commands and set parameters quickly.

You can use the Macro Command Browser to insert product or programming commands in a macro you are editing. If the command you choose has required parameters, you must set values for these before you insert the macro.

When you create macros using the Macro Command Browser, the commands are inserted in the correct format. If you type a macro without the Macro Command Browser, you must arrange macro commands and their elements in a precise order of syntax. Each macro command must be spelled correctly and must include all the required parameters and separators.

 How to


To insert a command using the Macro Command Browser

1	If the Macro toolbar is not already displayed, click Tools [image] Macro [image] Macro toolbar.

2	Click Commands.

3	Choose a product from the Command type list box.

4	Choose a command from the Commands list box.

If the Parameters list box does not display, proceed to step 7.

5	Choose any parameters from the Parameters list box.

If the Enumeration list box does not display, proceed to step 7.

6	Choose an enumeration from the Enumeration list box.

7	Type any additional parameters in the Command box.

8	Click Insert.

 Note

•	A parameter that is displayed in bold is a required parameter. The macro will not compile or run without it. Other parameters are optional and may, in some cases, be useless depending on the values given to required parameters.

 Tips

•	You can also insert system variables with the Macro Command Browser. System variables contain current system information, such as the current chart type or the default directory. In WordPerfect, system variables begin with a question mark (?). In Corel Presentations, system variables begin with the letters "Env."

•	You can add blank lines to separate programming commands and subroutines.

•	You can indent lines to show levels of nested commands.

 Related topics


Using macro commands to retrieve information

WordPerfect allows you to use commands, such as MessageBox or GetString, that gather information for macros. You can use these types of commands, for example, to prompt the user to type in information. For information about the MessageBox command, see the PerfectScript Programming Macros Help in the PerfectScript Macro Command Browser.

You can use the GetString command if you need to enter text that will be used by your macro. The GetString command uses the following format:

GetString (Var;Prompt Text; Title; MaxLength)

The Prompt text, Title, and Maximum length parameters are optional. The Var parameter specifies a string variable to load with text entered by the user. You can use the GetUnits command if you want the user to provide the macro with measurement information that can be used to move the insertion point and set margins. If you want the user to enter information for use in a numeric expression (such as addition or subtraction), you can use the GetNumber command. Both the GetUnits and GetNumber commands are similar to the GetString command; however, they do not use maximum parameter length. The user can use any of the abbreviations listed in the following table to represent units of measurement.

Unit of measurement	Abbreviation
WP Units (1200 per inch)	w
Points (72 per inch)	p
Millimeters	m
Centimeters	c
Inches	i or "
 Note

•	If the user doesn't type a unit of measurement with the number when prompted, WordPerfect uses WP Units as the default unit of measurement.


Inserting codes into macros

You can use WordPerfect to insert a code into a macro.

 How to


To insert a code into a macro

1	On the Windows taskbar, click Start {bmctt onestep.bmp} WordPerfect Office 11 {bmctt onestep.bmp} WordPerfect 11.

2	Click Tools {bmctt onestep.bmp} Macro {bmctt onestep.bmp} Macro toolbar.

3	Click Codes.

4	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Search [image] allows you to select search find codes

•	Merge [image] allows you to select merge find codes

•	Date [image] allows you to select date find codes

•	Other [image] allows you to select chapter, page, section page, total page, and volume number find codes

5	Choose a code from the Find codes list.

6	Click Insert.

7	Click Close.

 Note

•	When you insert a code into a macro, you must use straight double quotation marks around the code so that WordPerfect recognizes the code in the macro.

 Related topics


Compiling macros using the macro compiler

The programs that compile macros are called compilers. A macro compiler is used to compile or "translate" macros so that WordPerfect Office applications can play them. The macro compiler creates an object, which it saves in a hidden area of the source file (the macro compiler does not create a separate object file). When you edit the source file, the object is destroyed. The object is recreated each time the source file is compiled. Macros in WordPerfect are compiled when you record, play, save, save and compile them, or when you close the macro from the Macro toolbar. You must compile a macro before you can play it.

If you receive an error message while the macro is compiling, you must correct all the errors before the macro will play. For information about fixing compile errors, see "Fixing compile errors."

 How to


To compile a macro

•	Click the Save & compile button on the Macro toolbar.

 Note

•	If a macro you compile has error messages, WordPerfect still saves it even if you do not fix the compile errors. For information about fixing compile errors, see "Fixing compile errors."

 Related topics


Fixing compile errors

Macros have three types of errors: syntax errors, run-time errors, and logic errors. You can set PerfectScript to generate a list when you compile a macro. You can also use the PerfectScript debugger to find errors. WordPerfect lets you to test for errors from inside the PerfectScript utility. WordPerfect allows you several options for debugging macros. You can debug macros step-by-step so that the macro executes the current commands and stops at the next command. You can also debug macros with a breakpoint so that the macro executes all the commands in the macro until it reaches the breakpoint. Macro breakpoints are set by default to be the beginning of the macro, the end of the macro, and at any errors. WordPerfect also lets you debug a macro by briefly displaying or "animating" each command before it is executed.

Animation allows you to step through macros line by line, automatically bringing up the debugging dialog box at each step so you can check the variables and other calls. You can specify how long the debugger will pause before moving to the next step.

You can also view the meaning of commands from the PerfectScript debugger.

Identifying syntax errors

Syntax errors appear when you are compiling a macro. The PerfectScript compiler flags unrecognizable commands, such as missing parentheses or semi-colons and incorrectly spelled command names.

The compiler identifies syntax errors and suggests solutions. The error message displays information about the error and its location. The compiler makes a best guess and may not always be accurate.

Common syntax errors include

•	missing semicolons between parameters

•	missing parentheses

•	missing double quotation marks

•	missing command in a conditional or loop statement

•	misspelled macro command names

•	undefined calling statements

•	using commas between parameters instead of semicolons

Identifying run-time errors

Run-time is the same as execution time. Run-time errors occur while the macro is playing. Referencing a variable that has not been assigned a value causes a run-time error. Run-time error messages identify errors that occur while the macro plays and show where errors occur.

Identifying logic errors

When a macro does not produce the expected result, you may have a logic error. When a macro has a logic error, it plays without producing any error messages because WordPerfect accepts all of the macro commands.

 How to


To set PerfectScript to generate a listing file when you compile a macro

1	On the Windows taskbar, click Start [image] Programs [image] WordPerfect Office 11 [image] Utilities [image] PerfectScript.

2	Click Tools [image] Settings.

3	Click the Compile tab.

4	Enable the Generate listing file check box.

 Note

•	When you generate a listing file, PerfectScript saves it with a .wcl filename extension, and it is saved to the same location as the macro you are compiling.

 Related topics


To use the PerfectScript debugger to find errors

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Edit.

2	Choose the macro you want to debug.

3	Click Edit.

4	Click where you want to begin debugging the macro.

5	Type Step (On!).

If you want to display a debug window, type Display (On!).

6	Click Save & compile.

7	Type a file path and filename in the Listing filename box.

 Related topics


To debug a macro from PerfectScript

1	Click File [image] Debug [image] Play.

2	Choose the macro you want to debug.

3	Type a file path and filename in the Listing filename box.

4	Click OK.

5	Click Debug [image] Step into.

 Related topics


To set a macro breakpoint

1	Select the line of the macro in which you want to insert a breakpoint.

2	Click Debug [image] Breakpoint [image] Add.

The Breakpoint symbol displays beside the line in which you added the breakpoint.

 Related topics


To debug a macro with a breakpoint

1	Select the line of the macro in which you want to insert a breakpoint.

2	Click Debug [image] Breakpoint [image] Add.

The Breakpoint symbol displays beside the line in which you added the breakpoint.

3	Click Debug [image] Continue.

 Related topics


To animate a macro

1	Click Edit [image] Settings.

2	Click the Debug tab.

3	In the Animate settings area, enable one of the following options:

•	RunTo does 'step into' [image] executes the next single statement

•	RunTo does 'step over' [image] executes the call of the label or routine without stopping until it has completed

4	Type a value in the Delay (seconds) box.

This value specifies the number of seconds the macro should display after executing each step.

5	Click OK.

6	Click Debug [image] Animate.

 Tip

•	When correcting compilation errors, start at the beginning, correcting errors that are obvious and leaving the others until later, as some of these errors may have been caused by an earlier error.

 Related topics


To view the meaning of commands from the PerfectScript debugger

•	Point to a command line.

When you pause on a line of code, the command or variable name and definition is displayed.

 Related topics


Editing and deleting macros in PerfectScript

You can edit a macro by adding new and modifying existing commands. If you have written a macro for Corel Presentations, you can only edit the macro from within WordPerfect or by using the PerfectScript utility. You can also delete macros.

 How to


To edit a macro

1	Click Tools {bmctt onestep.bmp} Macro {bmctt onestep.bmp} Edit.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the macro is stored.

3	Click a filename.

4	Click Edit.

5	Edit the macro commands.

6	Click Save & compile.

7	Click Options {bmctt onestep.bmp} Close macro on the macro toolbar.

 Related topics


To delete a macro

1	Click Tools {bmctt onestep.bmp} Macro {bmctt onestep.bmp} Edit.

2	Choose a macro.

3	Press DELETE.

 Related topics


Adding search capabilities to macros

WordPerfect allows you to add search capabilities to a macro. You can apply all of the search functionality included in WordPerfect when you are searching in a macro.

 How to


To add search capabilities to a macro

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Edit.

2	Click in the macro where you want to add the search capability.

3	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record.

4	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

5	Type text in the Find box.

If you want to search for codes, click Match [image] Codes, and choose any codes from the Find codes list box.

6	Type text in the Replace box.

 Related topics


Reference information

You can access many of the dialog boxes and commands in Corel Presentations by using keystrokes or by clicking buttons on the various toolbars. You can also import and export various file formats in Corel Presentations. As well, enhanced zooming and scrolling features are provided for Microsoft IntelliMouse users. Conversion notes have been provided for converting between Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations files.

Open Document Management API (ODMA) is a standard managed by the Association for Information and Image Management (AIIM). A Document Management System (DMS) allows a group of users in an organization to store and manage documents in a common database: document management includes version control, security, project management, and file/content querying. Corel Presentations uses ODMA to integrate with the DMS, allowing it to control the Open and Save dialog boxes.

In this section, you'll learn about

Keyboard shortcuts

•	File menu command keyboard shortcuts

•	Edit menu command keyboard shortcuts

•	View menu command keyboard shortcuts

•	Insert menu command keyboard shortcuts

•	Format menu command keyboard shortcuts

•	Tools menu command keyboard shortcuts

•	Help menu command keyboard shortcuts

•	keyboard shortcuts for objects

•	keyboard shortcuts for slide show controls

•	keyboard shortcuts for chart controls

•	keyboard shortcuts for dialog boxes

•	keyboard shortcuts for selecting, moving, and deleting

•	other keyboard shortcuts

Import and export file formats

•	import graphic file formats

•	export graphic file formats

•	import and export text file formats

Using Microsoft Intellimouse

•	zooming by using Microsoft Intellimouse

•	scrolling by using Microsoft Intellimouse

Conversion notes for Microsoft PowerPoint and Corel Presentations

•	Microsoft PowerPoint opening notes

•	Microsoft PowerPoint saving notes

Open document management API

•	opening and saving files with ODMA

Object linking and embedding

•	Corel Presentations, PerfectScript, and OLE Automation

•	other OLE Automation controllers

Startup switches

•	using Corel Presentations startup switches

•	setting permanent startup switches for Corel Presentations

Two-digit year entry assumptions

•	two-digit year entry assumptions


File menu command keyboard shortcuts

You can use keyboard shortcuts to perform the functions of the commands in the File menu.

 How to


File menu keyboard shortcuts

Press	To
Ctrl + N or F4	Open a new document
Ctrl + Shift + N or Shift + F4	Create a new document from a project
Ctrl+ O	Open a document
Ctrl + S or Shift + F3	Save a document
F3	Save the active document with a different name or file format
Ctrl + F8	Set information about page size, margins, white space around graphics, and other options
Ctrl + P or F5	Print a document
Shift + Ctrl + P	Print the current document
Ctrl + F4	Close the active document
Alt + F4	Exit Corel Presentations
 Note

•	Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For more information on customizing Corel Presentations to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 Related topics


Edit menu command keyboard shortcuts

You can use keyboard shortcuts to perform the functions of the commands in the Edit menu.

 How to


Edit menu keyboard shortcuts

Press	To
Ctrl + Z	Undo last change made
Ctrl + Shift + R	Reverse the last Undo operation
Ctrl + X or Shift + Delete	Move the selected object(s) to the Clipboard
Ctrl + C or Shift + Insert	Copy the selected object(s) to the Clipboard
Ctrl + V or Shift + Insert	Insert object(s) from the Clipboard into the slide or drawing
Delete	Delete the selected item or text
Ctrl + Shift + F4	Clear the document contents
Ctrl + A	Select all
Ctrl + F or F2	Open the Find and Replace dialog box
Alt + F2	Find previous
Shift + F2	Find next
Ctrl + G	Display a list of slide, layout, and background names
 Note

•	Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For more information on customizing Corel Presentations to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 Related topics


View menu command keyboard shortcuts

You can use keyboard shortcuts to perform the functions of the commands in the View menu.

 How to


View menu keyboard shortcuts

Press	To
Alt + Shift + F3	Display or hide the ruler
Alt + F8	Display or hide the grid
Alt + Shift + F8	Enable or disable snapping to the grid
Alt + F3	Display or hide the Reveal Codes in a document
Shift + F5	Zoom to full page
Alt + F5	Zoom to margin size
Ctrl + Shift + F5	Zoom to a selected area
Ctrl + F5	Zoom to the previous level
Shift + Page up	In the Slide Editor view, zoom in
Ctrl + Page up	In the Slide Sorter view, zoom in on a thumbnail
Shift + Page down	In the Slide Editor view, zoom out
Ctrl + Page down	In the Slide Sorter view, zoom out from a thumbnail
 Note

•	Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For more information on customizing Corel Presentations to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 Related topics


Insert menu command keyboard shortcuts

You can use keyboard shortcuts to perform the functions of the commands in the Insert menu.

 How to


Insert menu keyboard shortcuts

Press	To
Ctrl + W	Insert symbols and characters
Ctrl + D	Insert the current date
Shift + Ctrl + D	Insert an automatically updated date
F11	Open Scrapbook
 Note

•	Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For more information on customizing Corel Presentations to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 Related topics


Format menu command keyboard shortcuts

You can use keyboard shortcuts to perform the functions of the commands in the Format menu.

 How to


Format menu keyboard shortcuts

Press	To
F9	Change the properties of the current text font
Ctrl + B	Bold text
Ctrl + I	Italicize text
Ctrl + U	Underline text
F7	Indent the left margin of the current paragraph one tab stop
Ctrl + F7	Indent all but the first line of the current paragraph one tab stop
Ctrl + Shift + F7	Indent the current paragraph equally from both margins
Shift + Tab	Move text one tab stop to the left
Ctrl + E or Shift + F7	Center the current line of text
Ctrl + R or Alt + F7	Right justify a line of text
Ctrl + L	Left justify a line of text
Ctrl + Shift + G	Copy the attributes of the selected object
Ctrl + Shift + A	Apply copied attributes to the selected object(s)
 Note

•	Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For more information on customizing Corel Presentations to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 Related topics


Tools menu command keyboard shortcuts

You can use keyboard shortcuts to perform the functions of the commands in the Tools menu.

 How to


Tools menu keyboard shortcuts

Press	To
Ctrl + F1	Check text for misspelled words, double words, and irregular capitalization
Alt + Shift + F1	Check text for proper grammar and spelling
Alt + F1	Find words of similar or opposite meaning
Ctrl + Alt + F1	Check the spelling, definition, and phonetics of a word
Ctrl + Shift + F1	Correct typing and spelling errors as you type
Alt + F10	Play back a series of macro commands
Ctrl + F10	Record a series of macro commands
Ctrl + Shift + F10	Stop recording or playing a macro
Alt + Shift + F10	Pause while recording or playing a macro
Alt + F11	Open Visual Basic Editor
Alt + F12	Open the Settings dialog box to change default settings
 Note

•	Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For more information on customizing Corel Presentations to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 Related topics


Help menu command keyboard shortcuts

You can use keyboard shortcuts to perform the functions of the commands in the Help menu.

 How to


Help menu keyboard shortcuts

•	Press F1 to display a list of Help topics.

 Note

•	Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For more information on customizing Corel Presentations to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 Related topics


Keyboard shortcuts for objects

You can use keyboard shortcuts to work with objects, such as shapes, charts, and text boxes.

 How to


Object keyboard shortcuts

Press	To
Spacebar	Select an object when you point to it
Spacebar + Arrow key	Control horizontal and vertical movement of the pointer when you draw an object or control the movement of an object if it is selected
Tab	Move between objects in the drawing window, in the order they were created
Shift + Tab	Move backwards between objects in the drawing window
F6	Move the selected object(s) forward one layer in the document
Shift + F6	Move the selected object(s) backward one layer in the document
 Note

•	Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For more information on customizing Corel Presentations to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 Related topics


Keyboard shortcuts for slide show controls

You can use keyboard shortcuts to work with slide shows.

 How to


Slide show control keyboard shortcuts

Press	To
Enter, Spacebar, Right Arrow key, or Down Arrow key	Advance to the next transition
Left Arrow key, Up Arrow key, or Page up	Return to the previous slide
Page down	Advance to the next slide
Ctrl + Home	Return to the first slide
Ctrl + End	Advance to last slide
Backspace	Scroll through previous slides
Esc or Ctrl + F4	Stop a slide show
Ctrl + E	Erase onscreen annotations
+	Turn the slide show volume up
-	Turn the slide show volume down
Home	Replay a slide show sound
End	Stop a slide show sound
 Note

•	Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For more information on customizing Corel Presentations to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 Related topics


Keyboard shortcuts for chart controls

You can use keyboard shortcuts to work with charts.

 How to


Chart control keyboard shortcuts

Press	To
Ctrl + F3	Redraws the chart
Ctrl + O	Import data or an outline
F3	Export data or an outline
Ctrl + F12	Change the format for numbers and dates in datasheets
Alt + Shift + F12	Recalculate the current formula with new data
Ctrl + Shift + F12	Fill the selected cells with a series of numbers or dates
Alt + F9	Sort datasheet data in ascending or descending order
 Note

•	Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For more information on customizing Corel Presentations to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 Related topics


Keyboard shortcuts for dialog boxes

You can use keyboard shortcuts to navigate through dialog boxes.

 How to


Dialog box keyboard shortcuts

Press	To
Ctrl + Tab or Ctrl + Page up	Move to the next tab
Ctrl + Shift + Tab or Ctrl + Page down	Switch to the previous tab
Tab	Move to the next option
Shift + Tab	Move to the previous option or option group
Alt + Down Arrow key or F4	Open a selected list box or access the Browse button
Esc	Close a selected list box
 Note

•	Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For more information on customizing Corel Presentations to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 Related topics


Keyboard shortcuts for selecting, moving, and deleting

You can use keyboard shortcuts to select, move, and delete text in slide shows and drawings. You can also use keyboard shortcuts to select slides in the Slide Sorter.

 How to


Text keyboard shortcuts

Press	To
Shift + Left Arrow key	Select one character to the left
Shift + Right Arrow key	Select one character to the right
Ctrl + Shift + Left Arrow key	Select to the beginning of a word
Ctrl + Shift + Right Arrow key	Select to the end of a word
Shift + Home	Select to the beginning of a line
Shift + End	Select to the end of a line
Shift + Up Arrow key	Select the previous line
Shift + Down Arrow key	Select the next line
Ctrl + Shift + Home	Select to the beginning of a text box or to the top of the document
Ctrl + Shift + End	Select to the end of a text box or to the bottom of the document
Shift + Page up	Select all text from the screen upwards
Shift + Page down	Select all text from the screen downwards
Left Arrow key	Move one character to the left
Right Arrow key	Move one character to the right
Up Arrow key	Move one line up
Down Arrow key	Move one line down
Ctrl + Left Arrow key	Move one word to the left
Ctrl + Right Arrow key	Move one word to the right
Home	Move to the beginning of a line
End	Move to the end of a line
Ctrl + Home	Move to the beginning of a text box or to the top of the document
Ctrl + End	Move to the end of a text box or to the bottom of the document
Page up	Move up one screen
Page down	Move down one screen
Backspace	Delete one character to the left
Delete	Delete one character to the right
Ctrl + Backspace	Delete one word to the left
Ctrl + Delete	Delete one word to the right
Ctrl + Shift + Z	Undelete text
 Note

•	Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For more information on customizing Corel Presentations to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 Related topics


Keyboard shortcuts for selecting slides in Slide Sorter mode

Press	To
Ctrl + Right arrow	Lets you select a slide and scroll to the right
Ctrl + Left arrow	Lets you select a slide and scroll to the left
Ctrl + Down arrow	Lets you select a slide and scroll down
Ctrl + Up arrow	Lets you select a slide and scroll up
Ctrl + Spacebar	Lets you select the slide at the current cursor position
 Related topics


Other keyboard shortcuts

You can use keyboard shortcuts for such things as opening What's This Help, switching between open documents, displaying popup menus, increasing or decreasing letter spacing, and increasing or decreasing the amount of space between bullets and text.

If you are in zoom mode, you can scroll using the keyboard in the Slide Editor. You can also select nonconsecutive slide in the Slide Sorter.

 How to


Miscellaneous keyboard shortcuts

Press	To
F10	Enables the menu bar.
Shift + F1	Open What's This Help
Ctrl + F6	Switch to the next open document
Shift + Ctrl + F6	Switch to the previous open document
Shift + F10	Display the popup menu
Shift + Ctrl + = or Num+ + Ctrl	Increase letter spacing of selected text
Ctrl + -	Decrease letter spacing of selected text
Shift + Ctrl + >	Increase the amount of space between a bullet and text
Shift + Ctrl + <	Decrease the amount of space between a bullet and text
Alt + Up arrow	In zoom mode, lets you scroll up
Alt + Down arrow	In zoom mode, lets you scroll down
Alt + Left arrow	In zoom mode, lets you scroll to the left
Alt + Right arrow	In zoom mode, lets you scroll to the right
 Note

•	Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For more information on customizing Corel Presentations to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 Related topics


Import graphic file formats

Corel Presentations lets you import the graphic file formats listed in the following table.

Format	Name
.bmp	Windows bitmap
.cal	CALS bitmap
.cdr	Corel DRAW 3-11 File
.cdt	Corel DRAW Template
.cgm	Computer Graphics Metafile
.ch3	Harvard Graphics 3.0 DOS Chart
.cmx	Corel Presentations Exchange
.cpt	Corel Photo-Paint
.drw	Micrografx Designer
.dxf	AutoCAD Format
.emf	Enhanced Windows Metafile
.eps	Encapsulated PostScript
.gif	Graphics Interchange Format bitmap
.hpg and .plt	Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language
.img	GEM Paint bitmap
.jpg or .jpeg	Joint Photographic Experts Group(JPEG)
.mac	MacPaint Bitmap
.mst	Corel Presentations Master
.pat	Pattern Fill file
.pcd	Kodak Photo CD Image
.pct	Macintosh PICT
.pcx	PC Paintbrush bitmap
.pic	Lotus PIC
.png	Portable Network Graphics
.pp4	Picture Publisher 4 bitmap
.ppt	Microsoft PowerPoint Windows versions 2, 3, 4, and 7
.pre	Lotus Freelance Graphics (Slide show) 2.x
.psd	Adobe Photoshop bitmap
.prs	Harvard Graphics for Windows versions 1, 2, 3
.sct	Scitex CT Bitmap
.shw	Corel Presentations file
.svg	Scalable Vector Graphic
.sy3	Harvard Graphics 3.0 DOS Symbol
.tga	TrueVision TARGA bitmap
.tp3	Harvard Graphics 3.0 DOS Templates
.tif	Tagged Image File Format bitmap
.wmf	Microsoft Windows Metafile Format
.wpg	WordPerfect Graphic
.wvl and .wi	Wavelet bitmap


Export graphic file formats

Corel Presentations lets you export the graphic file formats listed in the following table.

Format	Name
.bmp	Windows Bitmap
.cgm	Computer Graphics Metafile
.cal	Compressed Bitmap
.cpt	Corel Photo-Paint
.emf	Enchanced Windows Metafile
.eps	Encapsulated PostScript File
.img	GEM Paint Bitmap
.gif	CompuServe Bitmap
.jpg or .jpeg	Joint Photographic Experts Group Format(JPEG)
.mac	MacPaint Bitmap
.mst	Corel Presentations Master
.pcx	PC Paintbrush Format
.png	Portable Network Graphics
.sct	Scitex CT Bitmap
.shw	Corel Presentations Slide Show
.tga	Targa Bitmap
.tif	Tagged Image File Format
.wmf	Windows Metafile
.wpg	WordPerfect Graphics
.wvl and .wi	Wavelet Compressed Bitmap


Import and export text file formats

Corel Presentations lets you import the text file formats in the following table.

Format	Name
.txt	ANSI (Windows) Delimited Text
.txt	ANSI (Windows) Text CR/LF to SRt
.txt	ANSI Windows Text
.txt	ASCII (DOS) Delimited Text
.txt	ASCII (DOS) Text CR/LF to SRt
.txt	ASCII DOS text
.txt	IA5
.doc	Microsoft Word 6.0/7.0 for Windows
.doc	Microsoft Word 97 for Windows
.txt	QuickFinder Log
.rtf	Rich Text Format
.rtf	RTF Japanese
.txt	UNICODE Text
.wri	Windows Write
.wp5	WordPerfect 5.0
.wp5	WordPerfect 5.1/5.2
.doc	WordPerfect 5.1/5.2 Far East
.wpd	WordPerfect Compound File
Corel Presentations lets you export the text file formats in the following table.

Format	Name
.wpd	WordPerfect


Zooming by using Microsoft IntelliMouse

Using Microsoft IntelliMouse, you can zoom in and zoom out, viewing slides at different levels of magnification.

 How to


To zoom in with Microsoft IntelliMouse

1	Hold down Ctrl.

2	Rotate the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel backward.

 Note

•	Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For more information on customizing Corel Presentations to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 Tip

•	You can zoom out with Microsoft IntelliMouse by holding down Ctrl and rotating the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel forward.

 Related topics


Scrolling by using Microsoft IntelliMouse

You can use the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel to scroll vertically and horizontally. By default, rotating the wheel forward, toward the monitor, scrolls up, while rotating the wheel back, toward you, scrolls down.

 How to


To scroll using Microsoft IntelliMouse

1	Double-click a slide.

2	Rotate the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel in the direction you want to scroll.

 Note

•	Corel Presentations is also accessible to users with disabilities. For more information on customizing Corel Presentations to suit your particular requirements, see "Using Accessibility features."

 Tip

•	You can scroll horizontally using Microsoft Intellimouse by holding down Shift and rotating the Microsoft Intellimouse wheel in the direction you want to scroll.

 Related topics


Microsoft PowerPoint opening notes

Corel Presentations lets you open files saved in the following versions of Microsoft PowerPoint:

•	Microsoft PowerPoint 2.0

•	Microsoft PowerPoint 3.0

•	Microsoft PowerPoint 4.0

•	Microsoft PowerPoint 7.0 (Microsoft Office 95)

•	Microsoft PowerPoint 97

Several features, however, are not supported.

Multimedia and animation

•	Sound features, such as MIDI, Digital Audio, and CD sound information, are not supported.

•	Cascading bullets are not supported.

•	Object animation is not supported.

Text

•	Text attributes, such as patterns, gradients, and outlined color text, are not supported.

•	If you have text that is positioned as superscript or subscript, it will be converted to the normal text position.

•	Text shadows are converted to normal text.

•	Emboss effects on text are converted to normal text.

Lines

•	If you have a pattern added to a line, it will not be supported.

•	Line thickness may appear incorrectly.

•	Line endcaps, such as arrowheads, are not supported.

Data charts

•	Data charts are imported as graphic objects.

•	Bubble charts are not supported.

Organization charts

•	Organization charts are imported as graphic objects.

Slides

•	Go to keys are not supported.

•	Skipped slides are not supported.


Microsoft PowerPoint saving notes

Corel Presentations lets you save slide shows in the Microsoft PowerPoint file format. For more information on how Corel Presentations treats Microsoft PowerPoint files, see "Microsoft PowerPoint opening notes."

There are, however, several features that are not supported or display differently.

Text and lines

•	Text placed on a path may not be supported in Microsoft PowerPoint 95.

•	You may experience minor text spacing and/or margin issues that can cause the text in some of your Microsoft PowerPoint files to appear out of place.

•	The position and size of chart items, such as titles and legends, may display incorrectly.

•	Various text blocks are not supported.

•	Headers and footers are not supported; they will appear as normal text.

•	Line endcaps, such as arrowheads, are not supported.

Data charts

•	The color of chart items, such as bars and slices, may appear incorrectly because Microsoft PowerPoint only allows 56 colors in its chart color table.

•	Mixed chart types, where each series has a different chart type, will appear as a single chart type.

•	Chart bar types, such as cone and markers, are not supported.

•	If you create XY 100% charts, they may not appear correctly.

Slides

•	If you create files with multiple slides it is possible that you may not be able to open them in Microsoft PowerPoint 95.

•	Go to keys are not supported.

•	Templates that contain default attributes, such as text and bullet attributes, are not supported.

•	Action settings, such as advance slide on mouse click, are not supported.

•	Background colors and styles may appear incorrectly.

Objects

•	Animation effects added to graphic objects are not supported.

•	Hyperlinks are not supported.

•	OLE objects may not be supported.

•	Gradients applied to graphic objects are not supported.

•	PowerPoint color indexed template objects are not supported.

Organization charts

•	Organization charts will be converted to the Windows Metafile file format.


Opening and saving files with ODMA

If ODMA is installed on your system, the DMS open dialog box opens by default when you open a file in Corel Presentations, and the DMS save dialog box opens by default when you save a file in Corel Presentations.

 How to


To open a file with ODMA

•	Click the file, and click OK.

 Note

•	If the dialog box does not appear, ODMA is not installed on your system or not properly setup. Contact your in-house DMS administrator for more information.

 Related topics


To save a file with ODMA

1	Click File, and click one of the following:

•	Save

•	Save as

2	Click a file format in the DMS options menu.

3	Type the required information in the Document profile dialog box.

 Notes

•	If the dialog box does not appear, ODMA is not installed on your system or is not properly set up. Contact your in-house DMS administrator for more information.

•	In most cases, you will not be asked for a file path or filename. You will only be asked for the document description and other required information as determined by your DMS administrator.

 Related topics


Corel Presentations, PerfectScript, and OLE Automation

OLE Automation for Corel Presentations is a flexible and powerful feature you can use to quickly build applications that use Corel Presentations components. OLE Automation is an integration standard that has developed to allow applications to "expose" their programmable objects so that other applications can access them. The exposed commands become an extension of the controlling programming language.

Applications that support OLE Automation are called OLE Automation servers. Programming applications that can use a server's scripting or macro commands are called OLE Automation controllers.

As shown in the following diagram, an OLE Automation server application exposes its programmable objects to the OLE Automation controller. The OLE Automation controller then incorporates the server application's scripting or macro commands as part of its own language. The controller can then send these commands back to the server.

You can use OLE Automation for long and complicated manual processes that transfer data between two or more applications. For example, you may have a manual process that puts data into a spreadsheet to be used to create a Corel Presentations graphic. The graphic is then used in a word processing application. If you use OLE Automation, you may be able to create a program that automatically does these steps for you. OLE Automation gives you control over a variety of different applications, letting you build the applications you need through its seamless integration capabilities.

OLE Automation is a way for applications to speak to and control each other through their own scripting or macro programming languages. For example, you could have Corel Presentations speak to and control Microsoft Word, another OLE Automation server. Because Corel Presentations, in this case the OLE Automation controller, is a presentations application and does not know about the inner workings of Microsoft Word, the OLE Automation server, it needs a way to get information from the server.

Conversely, Corel Presentations can be controlled by other OLE Automation applications through its PerfectScript application commands and a programming language. Some of the most widely used programming languages can support OLE automation, including Microsoft Visual Basic, Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications, and C++.

If you have ever used a script to send commands to Corel Presentations or another Corel application, you've used OLE Automation. When you run a script that sends commands to a Corel application, you must use the WithObject statement to enable a programmable object in the application.

Any Corel application including, Corel Presentations, that supports OLE Automation provides one programmable object that allows the PerfectScript controller to send it commands. The following table lists all the Corel applications that support OLE Automation (and PerfectScript) and the name of their programmable object.

Corel application	Programmable object name
Corel Presentations 11	Presentation.PerfectScript.11
WordPerfect 11	WordPerfect.PerfectScript.11
Quattro Pro 11	QuattroPro.PerfectScript.11
Corel Draw 11	CorelDraw.Automation.11
Corel PHOTO-PAINT 11	CorelPaint.Automation.11
Corel VENTURA 10	CorelVentura.Automation.10
Since the Corel applications listed above provide one programmable object, their documents cannot be directly accessed as objects from a controller. The Microsoft Visual Basic GetObject command, for example, cannot be used to access a Corel document. Additionally, Corel applications do not support properties and methods. The only way to access a Corel document through OLE Automation is by using PerfectScript application commands.

You can also use other scripting languages to call Corel OLE Automation applications. For example, you can call the WordPerfect object using a script created in Visual Basic. The following Visual Basic script creates a new WordPerfect document and inserts a footnote.

Private Sub Form_Load()

Dim objWP As Variant

Set objWP = CreateObject("WordPerfect.PerfectScript")

objWP.FootnoteCreate

objWP.Tab

objWP.Type "This was inserted with VB."

objWP.Quit

End Sub

 Note

•	As in the previous example, the Microsoft Word Basic commands or any other OLE automation application commands must be preceded by a period.


Other OLE Automation controllers

Rather than only using PerfectScript, you can use other applications as your OLE Automation controller. For example, you can use either Microsoft Visual Basic, Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications, or Microsoft C++, as your OLE Automation controller for Corel applications.

However, if you use a programming language other than PerfectScript to send commands to Corel applications, you cannot use PerfectScript programming statements and functions, such as For...Next or Message, or Corel dialog box definition statements. You can only use the Corel application commands.

For information about commands and functions and PerfectScript OLE Automation overviews, see the online Help in the respective application. However, it does not provide procedural and reference information about programming using OLE automation controllers other than PerfectScript. For more information about other OLE automation controllers, see the following reference sources:

•	Microsoft Visual Basic Programmer's Guide

•	Microsoft Windows Developer's Kit

•	Microsoft Office Developer's Kit

 Note

•	The Quit command in PerfectScript is specifically for use with OLE Automation. If you are scripting languages such as Visual Basic, C, C++, Delphi, FoxPro, or Corel Script, you should use the Quit command at the end of the script. Because Corel Presentations hosts VBA, the Quit command should not be used from VBA.


Using Corel Presentations startup switches

Startup switches are commands that allow you to control what happens when you start Corel Presentations. The following table shows the startup commands in Corel Presentations.

Startup switch	Action executed
Prwin11.exe File.shw	Starts Corel Presentations and opens a previously saved presentation; File.shw specifies the filename, including extension, of the presentation. If the filename has a space in it, type the full path of the file, enclosed in quotation marks. For example, if the filename is Testfile.shw, the startup switch is Prwin11.exe C:\Testfile.shw. If the filename is Test File.shw, the startup switch is Prwin11.exe "C:\Test File.shw."
Prwin11.exe File.shw /s	Starts Corel Presentations and opens a copy of previously saved presentation; File.shw specifies the filename, including extension, of the presentation. If the filename has a space in it, type the full path of the file, enclosed in quotation marks. For example, if the filename is Testfile.shw, the startup switch is Prwin11.exe C:\Testfile.shw /s. If the filename is Test File.shw, the startup switch is Prwin11.exe "C:\Test File.shw" /s.
Prwin11.exe /l XX	Starts Corel Presentations and uses the specified interface language, if present. XX specifies the two letter name of the interface language to use. For example, the code CE indicates English-Canada.
Prwin11.exe /bs	Starts Corel Presentations and bypasses the Corel PerfectExpert dialog box on startup
Prwin11.exe /bsd	Starts a new Corel Presentations drawing and bypasses the Corel PerfectExpert dialog box on startup
Prwin11.exe /bss	Starts a new Corel Presentations slide show and bypasses the Corel PerfectExpert dialog box on startup
You can start Corel Presentations using a startup switch.

 How to


To start Corel Presentations using a startup switch

1	Click Start on the Windows taskbar, and click Run.

2	In the Open box, type Prwin11.exe, a space, and the appropriate switch.

 Notes

•	When you use more than one startup switch, you must type a space between each command.

•	For information about setting a permanent startup switch, see "Setting permanent startup switches for Corel Presentations."

 Related topics


Setting permanent startup switches for Corel Presentations

You can use the same startup switch every time you open Corel Presentations. For information about startup switches, see "Using Corel Presentations startup switches."

 How to


To set a permanent startup switch for Corel Presentations

1	Click Start on the Windows taskbar, and click Settings [image] Taskbar.

2	Click the Start menu programs tab.

3	Click Advanced.

Windows Explorer opens and displays the contents of the Start menu.

4	In Windows Explorer, click the WordPerfect Office 11 folder.

5	Right-click the Corel Presentations 11 program icon, and click Properties.

6	In the Corel Presentations 11 properties dialog box, click the Shortcut tab.

7	In the Target box, type a space and the startup switch after Prwin11.exe.

For example, to start Corel Presentations and bypass the Corel PerfectExpert dialog box on startup, the Target box should read

X:\Program Files\Corel\Wordperfect Office 11\Prwin11.exe /bs

where X indicates the drive on which Corel Presentations is installed.

 Notes

•	When you use more than one startup switch, you must add a space between command.

•	Each time you start Corel Presentations using the Start button on the Windows taskbar, that startup switch is applied. If you access Corel Presentations from Windows Explorer, the startup switch will not be applied.

 Tips

•	You can also open the Taskbar properties dialog box by right-clicking the Windows taskbar and clicking the Properties command.

•	If you have a Corel Presentations shortcut icon on your desktop, you can also set a permanent startup switch by right-clicking the icon, clicking the Properties command, clicking the Shortcut tab, and, in the Target box, typing a space and the startup switch following the command line.

 Related topics


Two-digit year entry assumptions

If you choose to enter dates in two digit year format (i.e. mm/dd/yy), please be aware that Corel Presentations makes certain assumptions to determine the century you intended.

•	A 00 - 50 year entry defaults to the twenty-first century; for example, 2000 - 2050.

•	A 51 - 99 year entry defaults to the twentieth century; for example, 1951 - 1999.

To avoid possible ambiguity, always enter dates on a chart axis using a four-digit year.


Working with Corel Presentations macros using Visual Basic for Applications (VBA)

You can use Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) with Corel Presentations.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	integrating with VBA

•	creating and editing VBA macros

•	using the PerfectScript Class to change slide shows

•	working with VBA methods


Integrating with VBA

VBA is an object-oriented programming language that lets you create VBA macros to automate tasks. You can, for example, create a macro for Corel Presentations that changes the color of the title and subtitle headings. VBA is not part of the typical install of WordPerfect Office 11. To use VBA, you must do a custom install that includes Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications.

Event-driven programming

Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications is an event-driven programming language. Most of the code you create is written to respond to an event. An event is an action that is recognized by VBA; for example, clicking a button or choosing an option from a list box. Unlike traditional procedural programming, in which the program starts at line 1 and executes line-by-line, event-driven programming executes code in response to events.

PerfectScript and VBA

Product commands and programming commands are both used in conjunction with the PerfectScript language. The PerfectScript language is useful for developing simple macros. VBA offers more flexibility and power. When you use VBA to create macros, you are assisted by the Microsoft Visual Basic compiler. The compiler helps by providing context-sensitive Help when you are coding a VBA macro. You can combine the power of VBA with the PerfectScript product commands to create powerful macros. You have to use the Microsoft Visual Basic Editor to create VBA macros; however, PerfectScript macros are developed from the PerfectScript utility or the WordPerfect Editor. For information about PerfectScript macros, see "Generating and editing Corel Presentations macros by using PerfectScript." You can access the VBA Editor only when you are working in an active document.

The PerfectScript class

All product commands used in WordPerfect, Quattro Pro, and Corel Presentations can be used in VBA macros. You must call the PerfectScript object to access a product command. An object is an instance of a class. All objects have properties; for example, the name of a document is a property that belongs to the document object. You can set or change an object's properties by calling certain methods. A method performs a specific action, such as inserting a table into a document. You can, for example, close a document by calling the close method, or you can save a document by calling the save method. The term class is a VBA programming term and means a collection of related methods, which are referred to as class members. The product commands are the class members that belong to the PerfectScript class. WordPerfect, Quattro Pro, and Corel Presentations each have their own PerfectScript class because the class members, which are the product commands, are different depending on the application.

Working in the VBA Editor

In most cases, the name of the class is the same as the name of the object. WordPerfect Office 11 has one object, which is the document object. In WordPerfect, the name of the document object is ThisDocument, which is the same as the class. In Corel Presentations, the name of the document object is ThisSlideShow, which is the same as the class. In Quattro Pro, the name of the document object is ThisDocument, which is the same as the class. The document object is the host application that is open.

An experienced programmer can work directly with the Windows Application Programming Interface (API), and be able to determine how much disk space is free or gain access to the system's time and date values. Most VBA users will want to automate such specific and repetitive tasks.

Assigning security

When you open WordPerfect Office 11 documents created by other users, be aware that a document could contain a macro virus. As a screening measure, VBA includes a security mechanism to help manage document security. For more information about the VBA security mechanism, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in Visual Basic Editor.


Creating and editing VBA macros

You can create a project or global VBA macro in Corel Presentations. You can also debug a macro created in VBA. Debugging is an extremely important part of the programming process. Debugging allows you to step through your code line by line to ensure that the macro executes properly. This feature of programming is known as single-stepping. For example, if you are at a point in the code where a variable is about to be assigned a value, you can step into this line of code to determine the value of the variable at run-time. As well, you can edit a VBA macro.

 How to


To create a project macro

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

2	Double-click VBA Project (SlideShow1) in the project window.

3	Click Insert [image] UserForm.

4	Change the form so that it resembles the following diagram:

5	Change the name of the TextBox control to NameBox as illustrated in the following example:

TextBox - NameBox

You can change all of the control's attributes, including the name of the control, in the Properties dialog box.

6	Double-click the CommandButton1 control to create a new method for the UserForm1 class, and type the following lines of code in the CommandButton1_Click method:

Private Sub CommandButton1_Click()

Dim myname, Msg As String

myname = NameBox

Msg = "Hello " & myname

MsgBox Msg

End

End Sub

This code responds to the event that occurs when the command button is clicked.

7	Double-click the Presentations objects folder in the project window.

8	Double-click ThisSlideShow, and type the following lines of code in the editor window:

Public Sub ShowForm()

End Sub

This code will add a new method to the ThisSlideShow class. If you declare ShowForm as a Private method, you will not be able to run it from Corel Presentations.

9	Type the following code in the ShowForm method:

Public Sub ShowForm()

UserForm1.Show

End Sub

 Related topics


To create a global macro

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

2	Double-click GlobalMacros in the project window.

3	Click Insert [image] UserForm.

4	Change the form so that it resembles the following diagram:

5	Change the name of the TextBox control to NameBox as illustrated in the following example:

TextBox - NameBox

You can change all of the control's attributes, including the name of the control, in the Property dialog box.

6	Double-click the CommandButton1 control to create a new method for the UserForm1 class, and type the following lines of code in the CommandButton1_Click method:

Private Sub CommandButton1_Click()

Dim myname, Msg As String

myname = NameBox

Msg = "Hello " & myname

MsgBox Msg

End

End Sub

This code responds to the event that occurs when the command button is clicked.

7	Double-click the Presentations objects folder in the project window.

8	Double-click ThisSlideShow, and type the following lines of code in the editor window:

Public Sub ShowForm()

End Sub

This code will add a new method to the ThisSlideShow class. If you declare ShowForm as a Private method, you will not be able to run it from Corel Presentations.

9	Type the following code in the ShowForm method:

Public Sub ShowForm()

UserForm1.Show

End Sub

 Related topics


To debug a macro created in VBA

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Play.

2	Choose a macro from the Macro name list.

3	Click Step into.

4	Click Debug [image] Step into.

5	Repeat step 4 for each line of code you want to step into.

6	Make any changes to the code.

 Note

•	After you have stepped into a line of code, you can point to a specific variable to determine the value of the variable. For more information about debugging in VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in Visual Basic Editor.

 Related topics


To edit a VBA macro

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Play.

2	Choose a macro from the Macro name list.

3	Click Edit.

4	Make any changes to the code.

 Note

•	For more information about editing a VBA macro, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in Visual Basic Editor.

 Related topics


Using the PerfectScript class to change slide shows

The PerfectScript class lets you automate specific and repetitive tasks. The members of the PerfectScript class are the product commands that are used in conjunction with the PerfectScript language. You can use the PerfectScript class to change a slide show.

 How to


To change a slide show using the PerfectScript class

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Visual Basic Editor.

2	Double-click VBAProject(SlideShow1), and double-click the Presentations objects folder in the project window.

3	Double-click ThisSlideShow, and type the following lines of code in the editor window:

Public Sub ShowChart()

UserForm1.Show

End Sub

This code adds a new method to the ThisSlideShow class. UserForm1 is the name of the form object. The Show method will call UserForm1.

4	Click Insert [image] UserForm, and change the form so that it resembles the following diagram.

The default names of the controls are used. A CommandButton control and a ComboBox control are located on this form. You can change all of the control's attributes, including the name of the control, in the Properties dialog box.

5	Double-click the form to access the editor window, choose General from the left list box, and insert the following code into the editor window:

Dim myStyle As String

This code creates a string variable called myStyle.

6	Choose UserForm from the left list box.

7	Choose Initialize from the right list box, and insert the following code into the UserForm_Initialize method:

Private Sub UserForm_Initialize()

ComboBox1.AddItem "Area"

ComboBox1.AddItem "Bar"

ComboBox1.AddItem "Line"

End Sub

This code responds to the event that occurs when the form is initialized. Three string items are added to the ComboBox1 control.

8	Choose CommandButton1 from the left list box to create a new method for the UserForm1 class, and type the following lines of code in the CommandButton1_Click method:

Private Sub CommandButton1_Click()

myStyle = ComboBox1

If myStyle = "" Then

MsgBox "You have not selected a chart style", vbExclamation

End If

'The user selected the Area chart

If myStyle = "Area" Then

PerfectScript.ChartCreate Area_ChartCreate_Type, Button1_ChartCreate_GalleryStyle, Yes_ChartCreate_SampleData, Yes_ChartCreate_ThreeDChart

End If

'The user selected the Bar chart

If myStyle = "Bar" Then

PerfectScript.ChartCreate VertBar_ChartCreate_Type, Button1_ChartCreate_GalleryStyle, Yes_ChartCreate_SampleData, Yes_ChartCreate_ThreeDChart

End If

'The user selected the Line chart

If myStyle = "Line" Then

PerfectScript.ChartCreate Line_ChartCreate_Type, Button1_ChartCreate_GalleryStyle, Yes_ChartCreate_SampleData, Yes_ChartCreate_ThreeDChart

End If

PerfectScript.ChartSetLabels

Unload Me

End Sub

This code responds to the event that occurs when the command button is clicked.

 Related topics


Working with VBA methods

You can use VBA to retrieve system information, such as the system's date and time values.

 How to


To access the system's date and time values

1	Click Tools {bmctt onestep.bmp} Macro {bmctt onestep.bmp} Visual Basic Editor.

2	Double-click VBAProject(Document1) in the project window.

3	Double-click the Presentations objects folder in the project window.

4	Double-click ThisSlideShow, and type the following lines of code in the editor window:

Public Sub ShowTime()

End Sub

This code adds a new method to the ThisSlideShow class. Make sure that ShowTime is declared public so that you can access this macro from Corel Presentations.

5	Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to declare two new variables:

Public Sub ShowTime()

Dim myTime

Dim myDate As Date

End Sub

6	Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to populate the myTime and the myDate variables:

Public Sub ShowTime()

Dim myTime

Dim myDate As Date

myTime = Time

myDate = Date

End Sub

7	Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to convert the two variables to string data types:

Public Sub ShowTime()

Dim myTime

Dim myDate As Date

myTime = Time

myDate = Date

Dim myStrTime, myStrDate, Msg As String

myStrDate = Str(myDate)

myStrTime = Str(myTime)

End Sub

8	Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to populate and display the Msg variable:

Public Sub ShowTime()

Dim myTime

Dim myDate As Date

myTime = Time

myDate = Date

Dim myStrTime, myStrDate, Msg As String

myStrDate = Str(myDate)

myStrTime = Str(myTime)

Msg = "The date is " & myStrDate & " and the time is " & myStrTime

MsgBox Msg

End Sub

 Note

•	For the purpose of this procedure, a message box was selected to display the date and time; however, you can create a new form and then display the time and date in this form. For more information about working with VBA methods, see Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

 Related topics